cm escalade edition: february 2017, cadillac …...cadillac escalade owner manual...

GENERAL MOTORSOVERSEAS DISTRIBUTION

LLC

www.cadillaceurope.com

Copyright Cadillac Europe GmbH, Zürich, Switzerland.

All information contained in this booklet is based on latest product information available at the time of printing, and is effective as of the date indicated below. Cadillac Europe GmbH reserves the exclusive right to make modifications to this booklet.

Edition: February 2017, Cadillac Europe GmbH, Zürich, Switzerland.

Printed on chlorine-free bleached paper.

ID-DES0OLBE1702-EN

Owner’s Manual

Ow

ner’s

Man

ual

EscaladeOwner’s Manual

C

M

Y

CM

MY

CY

CMY

K

17_CAD_Escalade_COV_en_GB_ID-DES0OLBE1701-en_2017FEB17.ai 1 2/14/2017 4:20:43 PM

Cadillac Escalade Owner Manual (GMNA-Localising-Europe-10293082) -2017 - CRC - 2/7/17

Contents Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Keys, Doors, and Windows . . . . . . . . . 27

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Instruments and Controls . . . . . . . . 122

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Service and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 343

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Customer Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364


2 INTRODUCTION

Introduction

The names, logos, emblems, slogans,vehicle model names, and vehiclebody designs appearing in this manualincluding, but not limited to, GM, theGM logo, CADILLAC, the CADILLACEmblem, and ESCALADE aretrademarks and/or service marks ofGeneral Motors LLC, its subsidiaries,affiliates, or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on the vehiclebecause of optional equipment thatwas not purchased on the vehicle,model variants, country specifications,features/applications that may not beavailable in your region, or changessubsequent to the printing of thisowner's manual.

Refer to the purchase documentationrelating to your specific vehicle toconfirm the features.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in the backof the manual. It is an alphabeticallist of what is in the manual and thepage number where it can be found.

Danger, Warning, andCautionWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

{ Danger

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will resultin serious injury or death.

{ Warning

Warning indicates a hazard thatcould result in injury or death.

Caution

Caution indicates a hazard thatcould result in property or vehicledamage.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “Do Not,”“Do not do this,” or “Do not let thishappen.”

Part No. ID-DES0OLBE1702-en


INTRODUCTION 3

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message, gauge,or indicator.

M : Shown when the owner's manualhas additional instructions orinformation.

* : Shown when the service manualhas additional instructions orinformation.

0 : Shown when there is moreinformation on another page —“see page.”

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbols thatmay be found on the vehicle and whatthey mean. For more information onthe symbol, refer to the Index.

0 : Adjustable Pedals

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

` : Do Not Puncture

^ : Do Not Service

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

_ : Flame/Fire Prohibited

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp Main/Dipped-BeamChanger

( : Heated Steering Wheel

j : LATCH System Child Restraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

g : Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors

O : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tyre Pressure Monitor

_ : Tow/Haul Mode

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®

a : Under Pressure

M : Windscreen Washer Fluid


4 INTRODUCTION

2 NOTES


IN BRIEF 5

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . 8Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Heated and Cooled Front Seats . . . 14Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . . . . 14Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . 14Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . 16Throttle and Brake PedalAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Windscreen Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . 17

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Vehicle FeaturesInfotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . 20Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Driver InformationCentre (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Forward AutomaticBraking (FAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . . . . . . 22Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . . . . . . . 22Surround Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . 22Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Power Sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Universal Remote System . . . . . . . . . 23Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Performance and MaintenanceTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Tyre Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26


6 IN BRIEF

Instrument Panel


IN BRIEF 7

1. Air Vents 0 188.

2. Head-Up Display (HUD) 0 149 (IfEquipped).

3. Indicator Lever. See Indicator andLane-Change Signals 0 176.

Windscreen Wiper/Washer 0 124.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer0 125.

4. Hazard Warning Flashers 0 176.

5. Instrument Cluster 0 132.

6. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission 0 214.

Tow/Haul Mode Selector Button.See Tow/Haul Mode 0 218.

Range Selection Mode Buttons (IfEquipped). See Manual Mode0 217.

7. Magnetic Ride Control Button.See Magnetic Ride Control 0 229.

Pedal Adjust Switch (IfEquipped). See Adjustable Throttleand Brake Pedal 0 207.

Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 226.

8. Light Sensor. See AutomaticHeadlamp System 0 175.

9. Infotainment 0 181.

10. Glove Box Button. See Glove Box0 118.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) 0 251 (IfEquipped).

Parking Assist Button. SeeAssistance Systems for Parking orReversing 0 240.

11. Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem 0 182.

Instrument Panel Storage 0 118.

12. CD Player. See the infotainmentmanual.

13. ENGINE START/STOP Button.See Ignition Positions 0 207.

14. Steering Wheel Controls 0 123.

Driver Information Centre (DIC)Controls. See Driver InformationCentre (DIC) 0 146.

15. Horn 0 123.

16. Steering Wheel Adjustment 0 123.

17. Bonnet Release. See Bonnet0 270.

18. Cruise Control 0 230 (IfEquipped).

Adaptive Cruise Control 0 233 (IfEquipped).

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 245 (If Equipped).

Heated Steering Wheel 0 123 (IfEquipped).

Phone Button. See theinfotainment manual.

19. Automatic Transfer Case Knob (IfEquipped). See Four-Wheel Drive0 219.

20. Data Link Connector (DLC) (Outof View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp (Check EngineLight) 0 138.

21. Electric Parking Brake 0 224 (IfEquipped).

22. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 172.

23. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl 0 177.


8 IN BRIEF

Initial Drive InformationThis section provides a brief overviewabout some of the important featuresthat may or may not be on yourspecific vehicle.

For more detailed information, refer toeach of the features which can befound later in this owner's manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is used to remotely lockand unlock the doors from up to 60 m(197 ft) away from the vehicle.

K : Press to unlock the driver door.Press K again within three seconds tounlock all remaining doors.

Q : Press to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalised. See VehiclePersonalisation 0 162.

b : Press twice to open or close thetailgate. Press once to stop the liftgatefrom moving.

c : Press twice to open the liftglass.

7 : Press and release to initiatevehicle locate. The indicator lampsflash and the horn sounds threetimes.

Press 7 and hold for more thanthree seconds to sound the panicalarm.

Press 7 again to cancel the panicalarm.

See Keys 0 27 and Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System 0 28.

Remote Vehicle StartThe engine can be started fromoutside of the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Press and release Q on the RKEtransmitter.

2. Immediately press and hold /for at least four seconds or untilthe indicator lamps flash.

Start the vehicle normally afterentering.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglights will turn on.

Remote start can be extended.

Cancelling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:

. Press and hold/ until theparking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warning lights.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

See Remote Vehicle Start 0 33.


IN BRIEF 9

Door LocksTo lock or unlock the doors frominside the vehicle:

. Press Q or K on a power doorlock switch.

. Push down the manual lock knobon the driver door to lock alldoors. Push down the lock knobon a passenger door to lock thatdoor only.

. Pull the door handle once tounlock that door. Pull the handleagain to unlatch it.

To lock or unlock the doors fromoutside the vehicle press Q or K onthe RKE transmitter or use the key inthe front doors. The key cylinder iscovered by a cap. See Door Locks 0 34.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 28.

Power Door Locks

Q : Press to lock the doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

See Door Locks 0 34.

Keyless Access

The RKE transmitter must be within1 m (3 ft) of the door being opened.Pressing the button on the driver doorhandle will unlock the driver door.If the handle button is pressed againwithin five seconds, the passengerdoors and tailgate will unlock. See

“Keyless Access Operation” in RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation0 28.

Tailgate

To open the tailgate, press K on the

power door lock switch or press K onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter twice to unlock all doors.Press the touch pad (1) on theunderside of the tailgate handle andlift up. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation 0 28.


10 IN BRIEF

Use the pull cup to lower and closethe tailgate. Do not press the touchpad while closing the tailgate. Thiswill cause the tailgate to be unlatched.

To open the liftglass, press thebutton (2) above the number plate.Close the liftglass before opening thetailgate to avoid damaging it.

Power Tailgate Operation

If equipped with a power tailgate, theswitch is on the overhead console. Thevehicle must be in P (Park).

Choose the power tailgate mode byselecting MAX or 3/4. Press8 onthe overhead console or on the RKEtransmitter pressb twice quickly.

Press any tailgate button while thetailgate is moving to stop it. Pressingagain reverses the direction.

To close, pressl on the bottom ofthe tailgate next to the latch.

To disable the power tailgate function,select OFF on the tailgate switch. SeeTailgate 0 37.

Windows

The windows work when the vehicle isin ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,or when Retained Accessory Power(RAP) is active. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 210.

Press or pull the switch to open orclose the window.

The windows will be temporarilydisabled if the window switches areused repeatedly within a short time.

Seat Adjustment

Uplevel Seat Adjustment

If equipped, the ignition must be onto use all uplevel seat features.

Uplevel Seat Control

1. Feature Select2. Up3. Rearward4. Down5. Forward


IN BRIEF 11

. Move Feature Select (1) to displayseat adjustments on theinfotainment display. Press andrelease or hold to scroll throughfeatures.

. Press Up (2) to make upwardadjustments of the selectedfeature.

. Press Rearward (3) to makerearward adjustments of theselected feature.

. Press Down (4) to make downwardadjustments of the selectedfeature.

. Press Forward (5) to make forwardadjustments of the selectedfeature.

Base Seat Adjustment

To adjust the seat:

. Move the seat forward or rearwardby sliding the control forward orrearward.

. Raise or lower the front part of theseat cushion by moving the frontof the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the seat by movingthe rear of the control up or down.

See Electrically Operated SeatAdjustment 0 57.

Lumbar and Bolster Support

Uplevel Seat Adjustment

If equipped, the ignition must be onto use all uplevel seat features.

To adjust lumbar support, if equipped:

. Press and release or hold FeatureSelect (1) to scroll to lumbarsupport on the infotainmentdisplay.

. Press Forward (5) or Rearward (3)to adjust lumbar forward orrearward.

. Press Up (2) or Down (4) to adjustlumbar up or down.


12 IN BRIEF

See Lumbar Adjustment 0 58.

To adjust bolster support, if equipped:

. Press and release or hold FeatureSelect (1) to scroll to bolstersupport on the infotainmentdisplay.

. Press Forward (5) or Rearward (3)to adjust bolster support inward oroutward.


Upper Shoulder Support

To adjust upper shoulder support,if equipped:

. Press and release or hold FeatureSelect (1) to scroll to uppershoulder support on theinfotainment display.

. Press Forward (5) or Rearward (3)to adjust shoulder support forwardor rearward.


Reclining Seat Backrests

Base Shown, Uplevel Similar

To adjust the seat back:

. Tilt the top of the controlrearward to recline.

. Tilt the top of the control forwardto raise.

See Reclining Seat Backrests 0 59.


IN BRIEF 13

Massage

Driver Seat Shown, Passenger SeatSimilar

If equipped, the ignition must be onto use the massage feature.

To activate and adjust massage:

1. Turn the selection control (1) toview massage options on theinfotainment display.

2. Select massage feature.

3. Press up or down to selectmassage type.

See Massage 0 62.

Memory Features

The SET, 1, 2, andB (Exit) buttonson the driver door are used tomanually store and recall memorysettings for the driver seat, outsidemirrors, power tilt and telescopingsteering column, adjustable pedals (ifequipped), and massage settings (ifequipped).

Automatic Memory Recall and/or EasyExit Recall features may be enabled inthe personalisation menus toautomatically recall positions storedto the 1, 2, andB buttons.

See Memory Seats 0 60 and VehiclePersonalisation 0 162.

Second Row SeatsThe second row backrests can befolded for additional cargo space,or the seats can be folded andtumbled for easy entry/exit to thethird row seats. The backrests alsorecline.

See Second Row Seats 0 64.

Third Row SeatsThird row backrests can be folded. SeeThird Row Seats 0 69.


14 IN BRIEF

Heated and Cooled FrontSeats

The buttons are near the climatecontrols on the centre stack. Tooperate, the engine must be running.

PressI or+ to heat the driver orpassenger backrest only.

Press J or z to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion and seatback.

PressC or { to cool the driver orpassenger seat.

See Heated and Cooled Front Seats0 62.

Head Restraint AdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatback reclineangle as little as necessary whilekeeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the proper position.

See Head Restraints 0 55 andElectrically Operated Seat Adjustment0 57.

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly:

. Seat Belts 0 71.

. How to Wear Safety Belts Properly0 72.

. Three-Point Belt 0 73.

. ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems0 112.

Passenger Sensing System

The passenger sensing system willturn off the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag under certainconditions. No other airbag is affectedby the passenger sensing system. SeePassenger Sensing System 0 85.


IN BRIEF 15

The passenger airbag status indicatorwill light on the overhead consolewhen the vehicle is started. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator0 137.

Mirror Adjustment

Interior Mirror

Adjustment

Adjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind the vehicle.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

The mirror automatically dims toreduce the glare of headlamps frombehind. The dimming feature comeson when the vehicle is started.

Exterior Mirrors

Power Mirrors

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Press (1) or (2) to select thedriver or passenger side mirror.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move each mirror in thedesired direction.

3. Press either (1) or (2) again todeselect the mirror.

See Power Mirrors 0 46.

Power Folding Mirrors

1. Press{ to fold the mirrorsinward.

2. Press{ again to return themirrors to the driving position.

Heated Mirrors

If equipped, press1 to heat theoutside mirrors.

See “Rear Window Demister” underDual Automatic Climate Control System0 182.


16 IN BRIEF

Steering Wheel Adjustment

To adjust the power tilt andtelescoping steering wheel:

Press the control to move the steeringwheel up and down or forward andrearward.

Do not adjust the steering wheel whiledriving.

Throttle and Brake PedalAdjustmentIf equipped, the position of thethrottle and brake pedals can bechanged.

Press the top of the switch to movethe pedals closer to your body. Pressthe bottom of the switch to move thepedals away.

See Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal0 207.

The vehicle may have a memoryfunction, which lets pedal settings besaved and recalled. See Memory Seats0 60.

Interior LightingDome Lamps

There are dome lamps in the overheadconsole and the headliner, if equipped.

To change the dome lamp settings,press the following:

OFF : Turns the lamps off, even whena door is open.

DOOR : The lamps come onautomatically when a door is opened.

ON : Turns all dome lamps on.


IN BRIEF 17

Reading Lamps

There are reading lamps in theoverhead console and the headliner,if equipped. To operate, the ignitionmust be in the ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN position or using RetainedAccessory Power (RAP).

Pressm orn next to each readinglamp to turn it on or off.

For more information about interiorlighting, see Instrument PanelIllumination Control 0 177.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

P : Turns off the automaticheadlights and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL). Turning the headlightcontrol to the off position again willturn the automatic headlights andDRL back on.

AUTO : Automatically turns theexterior lamps on and off, dependingon outside lighting.

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps.

5 : Turns on the headlamps togetherwith the parking lamps andinstrument panel lights.

See:

. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 172

. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)0 174

. Automatic Headlamp System 0 175

Windscreen Wiper/Washer

The windscreen wiper control is onthe indicator lever.

The windscreen wipers are controlledby turning the band withz FRONTon it.

1 : Fast wipes.


18 IN BRIEF

w : Slow wipes.

3 INT : Use this setting forintermittent wipes or Rainsense™.For intermittent wipes, turnthez FRONT band up for morefrequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes.

To turn on Rainsense,pressz AUTO on the lever, then

turn thez FRONT band on thewiper lever to adjust the sensitivity.

. Turn the band up to a higher INTsetting for more sensitivity tomoisture.

. Turn the band down to the lowerINT setting for less sensitivity tomoisture.

Move the band out of the3 INTposition to deactivate Rainsense.

OFF : Turns the windscreenwipers off.

8 : For a single wipe, turn to8,then release. For several wipes, holdthe band on8 longer.

Lm : Push the paddle at the top ofthe lever to spray washer fluid on thewindscreen.

See Windscreen Wiper/Washer 0 124.

Climate ControlsThe climate control buttons and thetouch screen are used to adjust theheating, cooling, and ventilation.

Climate Control Buttons

1. Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls

2. Fan Control

3. OFF (Fan)

4. Driver and Passenger Heated andCooled Seats

5. Recirculation

6. Rear Window Demister

7. Defrost

8. AUTO (Automatic Operation)


IN BRIEF 19

Climate Touch Screen Controls

1. Outside Temperature Display


3. Fan Control

4. SYNC (SynchronisedTemperature)

5. A/C Mode (Air Conditioning)

6. Climate Control Selection(Application Tray Button)

7. Rear (Rear Climate ControlTouch Screen)

8. Air Delivery Mode Control

See Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem 0 182 and Rear Climate ControlSystem 0 186 (If Equipped).

Transmission

Range Selection Mode

The Range Selection Mode switch,if equipped, is on the gear lever.

1. To enable the Range Selectionfeature, move the gear lever tothe L (Manual Mode) position.The current range will appearnext to the L. This is the highestattainable range with all lowergears accessible. As an example,when 5 (Fifth) gear is selected,1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gearsare available.

2. Tap the plus/minus buttons onthe gear lever to select thedesired range of gears for currentdriving conditions. See ManualMode 0 217.

While using Range Selection Mode,cruise control and the Tow/Haul Modecan be used.

Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active. SeeTow/Haul Mode 0 218.

Four-Wheel DriveIf equipped with four-wheel drive, youcan send the engine's driving power toall four wheels for extra traction.


20 IN BRIEF

Automatic Transfer Case

This transfer case knob is to the leftof the steering column.

The different drive options that maybe available are described following.

2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High) : Thissetting is used for driving in moststreet and highway situations.

AUTO (Automatic Four-WheelDrive) : This setting is ideal for usewhen road surface traction conditionsare variable.

Do not use AUTO mode to park on asteep gradient with poor traction suchas ice, snow, mud or gravel. In AUTOmode only the rear wheels will holdthe vehicle from sliding when parked.If parking on a steep gradient, use 4 mto keep all four wheels engaged.

4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High) : Usethis setting when extra traction isneeded, such as on snowy or icy roadsor in most off-road situations.

4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low) : Thissetting sends maximum power to allfour wheels. Choose 4n when drivingin deep sand, mud, or snow, and whileclimbing or descending steep hills.

N (Neutral) : Shift to this setting onlywhen towing the vehicle. See TrailerTowing 0 259.

See Four-Wheel Drive 0 219.

Vehicle Features

Infotainment SystemSee the infotainment manual forinformation on the radio, audioplayers, phone, navigation system, andvoice or speech recognition. It alsoincludes information on settings.

Steering Wheel ControlsThe infotainment system can beoperated by using the steering wheelcontrols. See "Steering WheelControls" in the infotainment manual.


IN BRIEF 21

Cruise Control

J : Press to turn the system on andoff. A white indicator appears in theinstrument cluster when cruise isturned on.

+RES : If there is a set speed inmemory, press the control up brieflyto resume that speed or press andhold to accelerate. If the cruise controlis already active, use to increasevehicle speed.

SET− : Press the control down brieflyto set the speed and activate cruisecontrol. If the cruise control is alreadyactive, use to decrease vehicle speed.

* : Press to disengage cruise controlwithout erasing the set speed frommemory.

See Cruise Control 0 230 or AdaptiveCruise Control 0 233 (if equipped).

Driver InformationCentre (DIC)The DIC display is in the instrumentcluster. It shows the status of manyvehicle systems.

y orz : Move SEL up or down togo to the previous or next selection.

S or T : Press to move between theinteractive display zones in thecluster. Press S to go back to theprevious menu.

SEL : Press to open a menu or select amenu item. Press and hold to resetvalues on certain screens.

See Driver Information Centre (DIC)0 146.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemIf equipped, FCA may help avoid orreduce the harm caused by front-endcrashes. FCA provides a greenindicator,V, when a vehicle isdetected ahead. This indicatordisplays amber if you follow a vehiclemuch too closely. When approaching avehicle ahead too quickly, FCAprovides a flashing red alert on thewindscreen and rapidly beeps orpulses the driver seat.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 245.


22 IN BRIEF

Forward AutomaticBraking (FAB)If the vehicle has Forward CollisionAlert (FCA), it also has FAB, whichincludes Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA).When the system detects a vehicleahead in your path that is travelling inthe same direction that you may beabout to crash into, it can provide aboost to braking or automaticallybrake the vehicle. This can help avoidor lessen the severity of crashes whendriving in a forward gear.

See Forward Automatic Braking (FAB)0 248.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA)If equipped, LKA may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. It may assist by gentlyturning the steering wheel if thevehicle approaches a detected lanemarking without using a indicator inthat direction. It may also provide aLane Departure Warning (LDW) alertas the lane marking is crossed. Thesystem will not assist or alert if itdetects that you are actively steering.

Override LKA by turning the steeringwheel. LKA uses a camera to detectlane markings between 60 km/h (37mph) and 180 km/h (112 mph).

See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)0 251 and Lane Keep Assist (LKA)0 251.

Lane Change Alert (LCA)If equipped, the LCA system is alane-changing aid that assists driverswith avoiding lane change crashesthat occur with moving vehicles in theside blind zone (or spot) areas or withvehicles rapidly approaching theseareas from behind. The LCA warningdisplay will light up in thecorresponding outside mirror and willflash if the indicator is on. The SideBlind Zone Alert (SBZA) system isincluded as part of the LCA system.

See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) 0 249and Lane Change Alert (LCA) 0 249.

Surround VisionIf equipped, views around the vehicledisplay in the infotainment display toaid with parking and low-speedmaneuvers.

See “Surround Vision” underAssistance Systems for Parking orReversing 0 240.

Front Vision Camera

If equipped, a view of the area in frontof the vehicle displays on theinfotainment display to aid withparking and low-speed maneuvers.

See “Front Vision Camera” underAssistance Systems for Parking orReversing 0 240.

Rear Vision Camera (RVC)If equipped, RVC shows a view of thearea behind the vehicle on theinfotainment display when the vehicleis shifted into R (Reverse) to aid withparking and low-speed backingmanoeuvres.

See Assistance Systems for Parking orReversing 0 240.


IN BRIEF 23

Rear Cross Traffic Alert(RCTA) SystemIf equipped, the RCTA system uses atriangle with an arrow displayed onthe infotainment display to warn oftraffic behind your vehicle that maycross your vehicle's path while inR (Reverse). In addition, beeps willsound, or the driver seat will pulse.


Parking AssistIf equipped, Rear Parking Assist (RPA)uses sensors on the rear bumper toassist with parking and avoidingobjects while in R (Reverse).It operates at speeds less than 8 km/h(5 mph). RPA may show a warningtriangle on the infotainment displayand a graphic on the instrumentcluster to provide the object distance.In addition, multiple beeps or seatpulses may occur if very close to anobject.

The vehicle may also have the FrontParking Assist system.


Power Sockets

Power Sockets 12 Volt DirectCurrent

Accessory power sockets can be usedto plug in electrical equipment, suchas a mobile phone, MP3 player, etc.

The vehicle has five accessory powersockets:

. One near the cupholders on thecentre console.

. One inside the centre console.

. One on the rear of the centreconsole.

. One in the third row seat on thedriver side.

. One in the rear cargo area on thepassenger side.

Lift the cover to access and replacewhen not in use.

See Power Sockets 0 127.

Universal Remote System

If equipped, these buttons are in thefront overhead console.

This system provides a way to replaceup to three remote controltransmitters used to activate devicessuch as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home automationdevices.

See Universal Remote SystemProgramming 0 169.


24 IN BRIEF

Sunroof

1. SLIDE Switch2. TILT Switch

If equipped, the sunroof only operateswhen the ignition is on or in ACC/ACCESSORY, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active. SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 210.

Slide Switch

Express-Open/Express-Close : Toexpress-open the sunroof, fully pressand release I (1). Press the switchagain to stop the movement. To

express-close the sunroof, fully pressand releaseK (1). Press the switchagain to stop the movement.

Open/Close (Manual Mode) : Toopen the sunroof, press and hold I(1). Release the switch to stop themovement. Press and holdK (1) toclose the sunroof. Release the switchto stop the movement.

Tilt Switch

Vent : From the closed position,pressJ (2) to vent the sunroof. PressK (2) to close the sunroof vent.

When the sunroof is opened, an airdeflector will automatically raise. Theair deflector will retract when thesunroof is closed.

The sunroof also has a sunshadewhich can be pulled forward to blocksun rays. The sunshade must beopened and closed manually.

If an object is in the path of thesunroof while it is closing, theautomatic reversal feature will detectthe object and stop the sunroof.

See Sunroof 0 53.

Performance andMaintenance

Traction Control/ElectronicStability ControlThe vehicle has a traction controlsystem that limits wheel spin and theStabiliTrak system that assists withdirectional control of the vehicle indifficult driving conditions. Bothsystems come on automatically whenthe vehicle is started and beginsto move.

. To turn off traction control, pressand release g on the centre

console. The traction off light idisplays in the instrument cluster.The appropriate DriverInformation Centre (DIC) messagedisplays. See Ride Control SystemMessages 0 158.

. To turn off both traction controland StabiliTrak, press and hold guntil i and g illuminate in theinstrument cluster and the


IN BRIEF 25

appropriate DIC message displays.See Ride Control System Messages0 158.

. Press and release g again to turnon both systems.

StabiliTrak will automatically turn onif the vehicle exceeds 56 km/h(35 mph). Traction control willremain off.

See Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 226.

Tyre Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a Tyre PressureMonitor System (TPMS).

The low tyre pressure warning lightalerts to a significant loss in pressureof one of the vehicle's tyres. If the

warning light comes on, stop as soonas possible and inflate the tyres to therecommended pressure shown on theTyre and Loading Information label.See Vehicle Load Limits 0 202. Thewarning light will remain on until thetyre pressure is corrected.

The low tyre pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thismay be an early indicator that the tyrepressures are getting low and the tyresneed to be inflated to the properpressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tyre maintenance. Maintainthe correct tyre pressures.

See Tyre Pressure Monitor System0 307.

Fuel

Premium Recommended Fuel

Use unleaded petrol rated at 95 RONor higher in your vehicle. Unleadedpetrol with an octane rating as low as91 RON may be used, but it willreduce performance and fuel economy.See Fuel 0 253.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message when it is time tochange the engine oil and filter. Theoil life system should be reset to 100%only following an oil change.

Resetting the Oil Life System

After you change the oil, the oil lifesystem will need to be reset. See yourdealer for service.


26 IN BRIEF

See Engine Oil Life System 0 274.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuel mileage.Here are some driving tips to get thebest fuel economy possible.

. Avoid fast starts and acceleratesmoothly.

. Brake gradually and avoid abruptstops.

. Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speed limitsor drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tyres properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tyres withthe same TPC Spec numbermoulded into the tyre's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.


KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS 27

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

DoorsTailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Anti-theft Locking System . . . . . . . . 45Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Immobiliser Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Interior MirrorsInterior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . 48Automatic Dimming Rear ViewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Rear Camera Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Child-View Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle with aRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is dangerous andchildren or others could beseriously injured or killed. Theycould operate the power windowsor other controls or make thevehicle move. The windows willfunction with the RKE transmitterin the vehicle, and children orothers could be caught in the pathof a closing window. Do not leavechildren in a vehicle with an RKEtransmitter.


28 KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS

The key is used for the driver's door.

The transmitter has a button on theside used to remove the key. Do notpull the key out without pressing thebutton.

See your dealer if a replacement keyor additional key is needed.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Declaration of Conformity 0 356.

If there is a decrease in the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) operating range:

. Check the distance. Thetransmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Other vehiclesor objects may be blocking thesignal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” later inthis section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see your dealeror a qualified technician forservice.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Keyless Access system allows forvehicle entry when the transmitter iswithin 1 m (3 ft). See “Keyless AccessOperation” later in this section.

The RKE transmitter functions maywork up to 60 m (197 ft) away fromthe vehicle.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) System0 28.



/ : If equipped, press and release Q,then immediately press and hold /until the indicators flash or for atleast four seconds. The engine may bestarted from outside the vehicle usingthe RKE transmitter. See RemoteVehicle Start 0 33.

Q : Press to lock all doors.

If the driver door is open when Q ispressed, all doors will lock and thenthe driver door will immediatelyunlock, if enabled in vehiclepersonalisation. See Vehicle

Personalisation 0 162. If the passengerdoor is open when Q is pressed, alldoors lock.

If enabled through vehiclepersonalisation, the indicator lampsflash once to indicate locking hasoccurred. If enabled through vehiclepersonalisation, the horn chirpswhen Q is pressed again withinthree seconds. See VehiclePersonalisation 0 162.

Pressing Q arms the alarm system.See Vehicle Alarm System 0 43.

If equipped with auto mirror folding,pressing and holding Q forone second will fold mirrors. The automirror folding feature will not operateunless it is enabled. See VehiclePersonalisation 0 162.

K : Press once to unlock only thedriver door. If K is pressed againwithin three seconds, all remainingdoors unlock. The interior lamps maycome on and stay on for 20 secondsor until the ignition is turned on.

If enabled through vehiclepersonalisation, the indicator lampsflash twice to indicate unlocking hasoccurred. If enabled through thevehicle personalisation, the exteriorlamps may turn on. See VehiclePersonalisation 0 162.

Pressing K on the RKE transmitterdisarms the alarm system. See VehicleAlarm System 0 43.

If equipped with auto mirror folding,pressing and holding K forone second will unfold mirrors. Theauto mirror folding feature will notoperate unless it is enabled. SeeVehicle Personalisation 0 162.

c : Press twice to open the liftglass.

b : Press twice to open or close thetailgate. Press once to stop the liftgatefrom moving.

7 : Press and release to initiatevehicle locate. The indicators flashand the horn sounds three times.

Press and hold 7 for more thanthree seconds to activate the panicalarm. The indicators flash and thehorn sounds repeatedly for



30 seconds. The alarm turns off whenthe ignition is moved to ON/RUN or7 is pressed again. The ignition mustbe in LOCK/OFF for the panic alarmto work.

Keyless Access Operation

The Keyless Access system allows forthe doors and tailgate to be accessedwithout pressing the RKE transmitterbutton. The RKE transmitter must bewithin 1 m (3 ft) of the door beingopened. If the vehicle has this feature,there will be a button on the outsidedoor handles.

Keyless Access can be programmed tounlock all doors on the first lock/unlock press from the driver door. SeeVehicle Personalisation 0 162.

Keyless Unlocking/Locking from theDriver Door

When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) ofthe door handle, pressing the lock/unlock button on the driver doorhandle will unlock the driver door,unless the lock/unlock button wasused to lock the doors within the lastfive seconds. When the driver door is

unlocked using the lock/unlockbutton, and the lock/unlock button ispress again with five seconds, allpassenger doors will unlock.

Driver Side Shown, Passenger Similar

Pressing the lock/unlock button willcause all doors to lock if any of thefollowing occur:

. It has been more than five secondssince the first lock/unlock buttonpress.

. Two lock/unlock button presseswere used to unlock all doors.

. Any vehicle door has been openedand all doors are now closed.

Keyless Unlocking/Locking from thePassenger Doors

When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) ofthe door handle, pressing the lock/unlock button on a passenger doorhandle will unlock all doors, unlessthe lock/unlock button was used tolock the doors within the lastfive seconds.

Pressing the lock/unlock button willcause all doors to lock if any of thefollowing occur:

. The lock/unlock button was usedto unlock all doors.

. Any vehicle door has been openedand all doors are now closed.

Anti-Theft Locking from Any Door

When all doors are locked using thelock/unlock button, a second press ofthe button within five seconds willactivate the Anti-theft LockingSystem.

Anti-Theft Unlocking from Any Door

When all doors are unlocked using thelock/unlock button, the Anti-theftLocking system will be deactivated.



Passive Locking

Keyless Access will lock the vehicleseveral seconds after all doors areclosed, if the vehicle is off and at leastone RKE transmitter has beenremoved from the interior, or noneremain in the interior.

If other electronic devices interferewith the RKE transmitter signal, thevehicle may not detect the RKEtransmitter inside the vehicle.If passive locking is enabled, the doorsmay lock with the RKE transmitterinside the vehicle. Do not leave theRKE transmitter in an unattendedvehicle.

To customise the doors toautomatically lock when exiting thevehicle, see “Remote Lock, Unlock,Start” under Vehicle Personalisation0 162.

Temporarily Disabling of PassiveLocking Feature

Temporarily disable passive locking bypressing and holding K on theinterior door switch with a door openfor at least four seconds, or until threechimes are heard. Passive locking will

then remain disabled until Q on theinterior door is pressed, or until thevehicle is switched on.

Remote Left In Vehicle Alert

When the vehicle is turned off and aremote is left in the vehicle, the hornwill chirp three times after all doorsare closed. To turn on or off seeVehicle Personalisation 0 162.

Auto Door Relock

If a door is not opened or the vehicleis not started within three minutes ofunlocking the vehicle and disarmingthe alarm system with the RKEtransmitter, all doors areautomatically locked and the vehiclealarm system is re-armed. This can beturned on or off in through vehiclepersonalisation. See VehiclePersonalisation 0 162.

Keyless Tailgate Opening

Press the touch pad on the rear of thetailgate above the number plate toopen the tailgate when all doors areunlocked or when the transmitter iswithin 1 m (3 ft).

Keyless Liftglass Opening

Press the exterior tailgate glass buttonto open the tailgate glass when alldoors are unlocked or when thetransmitter is within 1 m (3 ft).

Key Access

To access a vehicle with a deadtransmitter battery, see Door Locks0 34.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmed tothe vehicle will work. If a transmitteris lost or stolen, a replacement can bepurchased and programmed throughyour dealer. When the replacementtransmitter is programmed to thisvehicle, all remaining transmittersmust also be reprogrammed. Any lostor stolen transmitters will no longerwork once the new transmitter isprogrammed. Each vehicle can haveup to eight transmitters programmedto it. See your retailer to programtransmitters to the vehicle.



Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery

If the transmitter battery is weak or ifthere is interference with the signal,the DIC may display NO REMOTEDETECTED or NO REMOTE KEY WASDETECTED. PLACE KEY INTRANSMITTER POCKET. THENSTART YOUR VEHICLE. when startingthe vehicle. See Key and Lock Messages0 155.

To start the vehicle:

1. Open the centre console storagearea and the storage tray.

2. Place the transmitter in thetransmitter pocket/insert.

3. With the vehicle in P (Park) orN (Neutral) press the brake pedaland ENGINE START/STOP.

Replace the transmitter batteryas soon as possible.

Battery Replacement

{ Warning

Make sure that you dispose of oldbatteries in accordance withenvironmental protectionregulations to help protect theenvironment and your health.

Caution

When replacing the battery, do nottouch any of the circuitry on thetransmitter. Static from your bodycould damage the transmitter.

Replace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEY messagedisplays in the DIC.

1. Press the button on the side ofthe transmitter near the bottomand pull the key out.



2. Separate the two halves of thetransmitter using a flat toolinserted into the bottom centreof the transmitter. Do not usethe key slot.

3. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.

4. Insert the new battery on theback housing, positive side facingdown. Replace with a CR2032 orequivalent battery.

5. Align the front and back housingthen snap the transmittertogether.

Remote Vehicle StartThe climate control system will comeon when the vehicle is startedremotely depending on the outsidetemperature.

The rear demist and heated andcooled seats, if equipped, may alsocome on. See Heated and Cooled FrontSeats 0 62 and Vehicle Personalisation0 162.

Laws in some communities mayrestrict the use of remote starters.Check local regulations for anyrequirements on remote starting ofvehicles.

Do not use remote start if the vehicleis low on fuel.

The vehicle cannot be remotestarted if:

. The transmitter is in the vehicle.

. The bonnet is not closed.

. There is an emission controlsystem malfunction and themalfunction indicator lamp is on.

The engine will turn off during aremote vehicle start if:

. The coolant temperature getstoo high.

. The oil pressure gets low.

The RKE transmitter range may beless while the vehicle is running.



Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System0 28 or Vehicle Personalisation 0 162.

Starting the Engine Using RemoteStart

1. Press and release Q.

2. Immediately press and hold /until the indicator lamps flash orfor at least four seconds.

When the vehicle starts, theparking lights will turn on. Thedoors will be locked and theclimate control system maycome on.

The engine will continue to runfor 10 minutes. Repeat theSteps 1 and 2 for one 10-minutetime extension.

Place the ignition in ON/RUN/STARTto operate the vehicle.

Extending Engine Run Time

The engine run time can be extendedby 10 minutes, for a total of20 minutes, if during the first10 minutes Steps 1 and 2 are repeated

while the engine is still running. Anextension can be requested30 seconds after starting.

A maximum of two remote starts, or asingle start with an extension, isallowed between ignition cycles.

The vehicle's ignition must be turnedon and then back off to use remotestart again.

Cancelling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:

. Press and hold/ until theparking lamps turn off.


. Turn the ignition on and then off.

Door Locks

{ Warning

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a moving

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if the doorsare not locked. So, allpassengers should wear safetybelts properly and the doorsshould be locked wheneverthe vehicle is driven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking the doorscan help prevent this fromhappening.



To lock the doors from inside thevehicle:

. Press Q on a power door lockswitch.

. Push down the manual lock knobon the driver door to lock alldoors. Push down the manual lockknob on a passenger door to lockonly that door.

To unlock the doors from inside thevehicle:

. Press K on a power door lockswitch.

. Pull the door handle once tounlock it. Pull the door handleagain to unlatch it.

From outside the vehicle uses theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter or the key in the frontdoors. The key cylinder is covered bya cap.

Keyless Access

The RKE transmitter must be within1 m (3 ft) of the door or boot beingopened. Press the button on the door

handle to open. See "Keyless AccessOperation" in Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation 0 28.

Key Cylinder Access (SlidingCap Access) (In Case of DeadBattery)

To access the key cylinder:

1. Pull the handle open fully.

2. Slide the cap inward and removeto expose the key cylinder.

3. Slide the cap on.

Key Cylinder Access (SlottedCap Access) (In Case of DeadBattery)

To access the key cylinder:

1. Pull the door handle (1) to theopen position.

2. Insert the key (4) into theslot (3) on the bottom of thecap (2) and lift the key upward.

3. Remove the cap (2).

4. Use the key (4) in the cylinder.



To replace the slotted cap:

1. Pull the door handle to the openposition.

2. Position the cap onto thelower tabs.

3. Rotate the cap upward.

4. Check that the cover is secure.

5. Release the door handle.

Free Turning Locks

The door lock cylinder turns freelywhen either the wrong key is used,or the correct key is not fully inserted.The free turning door lock featureprevents the lock from being forcedopen. To reset the lock, turn it to the

vertical position with the correct keyfully inserted. Remove the key andinsert it again. If this does not resetthe lock, turn the key halfway aroundin the cylinder and repeat the resetprocedure.

Power Door Locks

Press Q or K on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation0 28.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

Delayed LockingThis feature delays the locking of thedoors until five seconds after all doorsare closed.

When Q is pressed on the power doorlock switch while a door or thetailgate is open, a chime will soundthree times indicating delayed lockingis active.

The doors will lock automaticallyfive seconds after all doors are closed.If a door is reopened before that time,the five-second timer will reset whenall doors are closed again.

Press Q on the door lock switch again

or press Q on the RKE transmitter tolock doors immediately.

This feature can also be programmed.See Vehicle Personalisation 0 162.

Automatic Door LocksThe doors will lock automaticallywhen all doors are closed, the ignitionis on, and the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park).



To unlock the doors:

. Press K on the power door lockswitch.

. Shift the transmission intoP (Park).

Automatic door locking and unlockingcannot be programmed.

Lockout ProtectionIf the vehicle is off and locking isrequested while a door is open, whenall doors are closed the vehicle willcheck for RKE transmitters inside.If an RKE transmitter is detected andthe number of RKE transmitters insidehas not reduced, the driver door willunlock.

Lockout Protection can be manuallyoverridden with the driver door openby pressing and holding Q on thepower door lock switch.

If Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout isturned on and the vehicle is off, thedriver door is open, and locking isrequested, all the doors will lock andonly the driver door will unlock. TheUnlocked Door Anti-Lockout feature

can be turned on or off using thevehicle personalisation menus. SeeVehicle Personalisation 0 162.

Safety LocksThe rear door safety locks preventpassengers from opening the reardoors from inside the vehicle.

Press { to activate the safety locks onthe rear doors. The indicator lightcomes on when activated.

Press { again to deactivate the safetylocks.

Doors

Tailgate

{ Warning

Exhaust gases can enter the vehicleif it is driven with the tailgate orboot/hatch open, or with anyobjects that pass through the sealbetween the body and the boot/hatch or tailgate. Engine exhaustcontains carbon monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousness andeven death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe tailgate or boot/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air and

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

set the fan speed to thehighest setting. See “ClimateControl Systems” in the Index.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power tailgate, disable thepower tailgate function.

See Engine Exhaust 0 213.

Caution

To avoid damage to the tailgate ortailgate glass, make sure the areaabove and behind the tailgate isclear before opening it.

Power Tailgate Operation

{ Warning

You or others could be injured ifcaught in the path of the powertailgate. Make sure there is no onein the way of the tailgate as it isopening and closing.

Caution

Driving with an open andunsecured tailgate may result indamage to the power tailgatecomponents.

The switch is on the overhead console.The vehicle must be in P (Park).

The modes are:

MAX : Opens to maximum height.

3/4 : Opens to a reduced height thatcan be set from 3/4 to fully open. Useto prevent the liftgate from openinginto overhead objects such as a garagedoor or roof-mounted cargo. Theliftgate can be opened all the waymanually.

OFF : Opens manually only.

To open or close the tailgate, selectMAX or 3/4 mode and then:

. Pressb twice quickly on the RKEtransmitter until the tailgatemoves.

. Press8 on the overheadconsole. The driver door must beunlocked.

. Press the touch pad on theunderside of the tailgate handleafter unlocking all doors. A lockedvehicle can be opened if the RKEtransmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) ofthe touch pad.



. Pressl on the bottom edge ofthe tailgate next to the latch toclose.

Press any tailgate button, the touchpad, orb on the RKE transmitterwhile the tailgate is moving to stop it.Pressing any tailgate button orpressingb twice quickly on the RKEtransmitter restarts the operation inthe reverse direction. Pressing thetouch pad on the tailgate handle willrestart the motion, but only in theopening direction.

Caution

Manually forcing the tailgate toopen or close during a power cyclecan damage the vehicle. Allow thepower cycle to complete.

The power tailgate may be temporarilydisabled in extremely lowtemperatures, or after repeated powercycling over a short period of time.If this occurs, the tailgate can still beoperated manually. Select OFF on thetailgate switch.

If the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park)while the power function is inprogress, the tailgate will continue tocompletion. If the vehicle isaccelerated before the tailgate hascompleted moving, the tailgate maystop or reverse direction. Check forDriver Information Centre (DIC)messages and make sure the tailgateis closed and latched before driving.

Falling Tailgate Detection

If the power tailgate automaticallycloses after a power opening cycle, itindicates that the system is reacting

to excess weight on the tailgate or apossible support strut failure. Removeany excess weight. If the tailgatecontinues to automatically close afteropening, see your dealer for servicebefore using the power tailgate.

Interfering with the power tailgatemotion or manually closing thetailgate too quickly after poweropening may resemble a support strutfailure. This could also activate thefalling tailgate detection feature. Allowthe tailgate to complete its operationand wait a few seconds beforemanually closing the tailgate.

Obstacle Detection Features

If the tailgate encounters an obstacleduring a power open or close cycle,the tailgate will automatically reversedirection and move a short distanceaway from the obstacle. Afterremoving the obstruction, the powertailgate operation can be used again.If the tailgate encounters multipleobstacles on the same power cycle,the power function will deactivate.After removing the obstructions,



manually close the tailgate. This willallow normal power operationfunctions to resume.

If the vehicle is locked while thetailgate is closing, and an obstacleprevents the tailgate from completelyclosing, the horn will sound as analert that the tailgate did not close.

Pinch sensors are on the side edges ofthe tailgate. If an object is caughtbetween the tailgate and the vehicleand presses against a sensor, thetailgate will reverse direction and stopat a partially open position. Thetailgate will remain open until it isactivated again or closed manually.

Setting the 3/4 Mode

To change the position the tailgatestops at when opening:

1. Select MAX or 3/4 mode andopen the liftgate.

2. Stop the tailgate movement atthe desired height by pressingany tailgate button. Manuallyadjust the liftgate position ifneeded.

3. Press and holdl on thebottom edge of the tailgate nextto the latch on the outside of thetailgate until the indicators flashand a beep sounds. Thisindicates the setting has beenrecorded.

The liftgate cannot be set below aminimum programmable height.If there is no light flash or sound,then the height adjustment may betoo low.

Manual Operation

Select OFF to manually operate thetailgate.

Caution

Attempting to move the tailgate tooquickly and with excessive forcemay result in damage to thevehicle.

Operate the tailgate manually with asmooth motion and moderate speed.The system includes a feature whichlimits the manual closing speed toprotect the components.

To open the tailgate, press K on the

power door lock switch or press K onthe RKE transmitter twice to unlockall doors. Press the touch pad (1) onthe underside of the tailgate handleand lift up.

Press the button (2) above the numberplate to open the liftglass, or pressctwice quickly on the RKE transmitter.Do not leave the liftglass open whenraising the tailgate.

There will be a delay in the release ofthe liftglass if there is an attempt toopen it while the rear wiper is inmotion.



Use the pull cup to lower and closethe tailgate. Do not press the touchpad while closing the tailgate. Thiswill cause the tailgate to be unlatched.

The RKE transmitter must be within1 m (3 ft) of the tailgate toautomatically unlock it. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation0 28.

The tailgate has an electric latch.If the battery is disconnected or haslow voltage, the tailgate will not open.The tailgate will resume operationwhen the battery is reconnected andcharged.

Hands-Free Operation

The tailgate may be operated with akicking motion under the rear bumper.

The tailgate will not operate if theRKE transmitter is not within1 m (3 ft).

The hands-free feature will not workwhile the tailgate is moving. To stopthe tailgate while in motion use oneof the tailgate switches.

Length of Kick Zone

To operate, move your foot in aforward kicking motion under thecentre of the rear bumper, then pullit back.

Caution

Splashing water may cause thetailgate to open. Keep the RKEtransmitter away from the rearbumper detection area or turn thetailgate mode to OFF when cleaningor working near the rear bumper toavoid accidental opening.

. Do not sweep your foot sideto side.

. Do not keep your foot under thebumper; the tailgate will notactivate.

. Do not touch the tailgate until ithas stopped moving.

. This feature may be temporarilydisabled under some conditions.If the tailgate does not respond tothe kick, open or close the tailgateby another method or start thevehicle. The feature will bere-enabled.



When closing the tailgate using thisfeature, there will be a short delay.The rear lights will flash and a chimewill sound. Step away from thetailgate before it starts moving.

Power Assist Steps

{ Warning

Never place hands or other bodyparts between the deployed powerassist steps and the vehicle. You orothers could be seriously injured.

{ Warning

Never step on a moving assist step.You or others could be seriouslyinjured.

Disable the assist steps before jackingor placing any object under thevehicle.

Too much ice build-up may preventdeployment of the power assist steps.Check the step position before exitingthe vehicle. If this happens, disablethe power assist steps, clear the ice,then enable the assist steps andconfirm normal function prior to use.

Keep hands, children, pets, objects,and clothing clear of the power assiststeps when in motion. The steps willreverse direction if they encounter anobstruction when opening or closing.Remove the obstruction, then openand close the door on the same sideto complete the motion of the assiststeps. If the obstruction is not cleared,the assist steps remain extended whiledriving.

To change the settings:

1. TouchF.

2. Touch Running Boards icon.

The options are:

OFF : Disables the power assist steps,so they will not deploy.

ON : Power assist steps will deploywhen a door is opened. When a dooris closed the assist steps willautomatically retract afterthree seconds.

Extended : Keeps the steps deployedwhen the vehicle is in P (Park) orN (Neutral). This setting may be usedwhen cleaning the steps.



Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm System

The indicator light, on the instrumentpanel near the windscreen, indicatesthe status of the system.

Off : Alarm system is disarmed.

On Solid : Vehicle is secured duringthe delay to arm the system.

Fast Flash : Vehicle is unsecured.A door, the tailgate or the bonnetis open.

Slow Flash : Alarm system is armed.

Arming the Alarm System

1. Turn off the vehicle.

2. Lock the vehicle in one ofthree ways:

. Use the RKE transmitter.

. Use the Keyless Accesssystem.

. With a door open, press Qon the interior of the door.

3. After 30 seconds, the alarmsystem will arm and theindicator light will begin toslowly flash. Pressing Q on theRKE transmitter a second timewill bypass the 30-second delayand immediately arm the alarmsystem.

The vehicle alarm system will not armif the doors are locked with the key.

If the driver door is opened withoutfirst unlocking with the RKEtransmitter, the horn will chirp andthe lights will flash to indicatepre-alarm. If the vehicle is not started,or the door is not unlocked bypressing K on the RKE transmitterduring the 10-second pre-alarm, thealarm will be activated.

The alarm will also be activated if apassenger door, the tailgate, or thehood is opened without firstdisarming the system. When thealarm is activated, the indicators flashand the horn sounds for about30 seconds. The alarm system willthen re-arm to monitor for the nextunauthorised event.

Disarming the Alarm System

To disarm the alarm system or turnoff the alarm if it has been activated:

. Press K on the RKE transmitter.

. Unlock the vehicle using theKeyless Access system.

. Start the vehicle.



To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:

. Lock the vehicle after alloccupants have exited.

. Always unlock a door with theRKE transmitter, or use theKeyless Access system.

Unlocking the driver door with thekey will not disarm the system orturn off the alarm.

How to Detect a TamperCondition

If K is pressed on the RKEtransmitter and the horn chirps threetimes, an alarm occurred previouslywhile the alarm system was armed.

If the alarm has been activated, amessage will appear on the DIC. SeeSecurity Messages 0 159.

Power Sounder, InclinationSensor and Intrusion Sensor

In addition to the standardtheft-deterrent system features, thissystem also has a power sounder,inclination sensor and intrusionsensor.

The power sounder provides anaudible alarm which is distinct fromthe vehicle's horn. It has its ownpower source, and can sound an alarmif the vehicle's battery iscompromised.

The inclination sensor can set off thealarm if it senses movement of thevehicle, such as a change in vehicleorientation.

The intrusion sensor monitors thevehicle interior, and can activate thealarm if it senses unauthorised entryinto the vehicle's interior. Do not allowpassengers or pets to remain in thevehicle when the intrusion sensor isactivated.

Before arming the theft-deterrentsystem and activating the intrusionsensor:

. Make sure all doors and windowsare completely closed.

. Secure any loose items such assunshades.

. Make sure there are noobstructions blocking the sensorsin the front overhead console.

. Close DVD screens before leavingthe vehicle.

Inclination and IntrusionSensors Disable Switch

It is recommended that the intrusionand inclination sensors be deactivatedif pets are left in the vehicle or thevehicle is being transported.

With the vehicle turned off, pressoin the front overhead console. Theindicator light will come onmomentarily, indicating that thesesensors have been disabled until thenext time the alarm system is armed.



Anti-theft Locking System

{ Warning

Do not use the system if there arepeople in the vehicle! The doorscannot be unlocked or opened fromthe inside.

The vehicle is equipped with adeadbolt locking feature in addition tothe standard door locks.

The deadbolt is engaged whenever youpress Q on the RKE transmitter twicewithin five seconds with all doorsclosed and the vehicle off. Thedeadbolt lock can also be engagedwith the Keyless Access system. See“Keyless Access Operation” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 28.

When the doors are secured with thedeadbolt, they cannot be unlocked oropened using the controls or handlesinside the vehicle.

Press K on the transmitter once toopen the deadbolt and unlock thedriver door. Pressing the button againwithin five seconds will unlock all ofthe doors.

ImmobiliserSee Declaration of Conformity 0 356.

Immobiliser OperationThis vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilised when the vehicle isturned off.

The immobilisation system isdisarmed when the ignition button ispressed in and a valid transmitter isfound in the vehicle.

The security light in the instrumentcluster comes on if there is a problemwith arming or disarming thetheft-deterrent system.

The system has one or moretransmitters matched to animmobiliser control unit in thevehicle. Only a correctly matchedtransmitter will start the vehicle.If the transmitter is ever damaged,you may not be able to start thevehicle.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn thevehicle off and try again.



If the RKE transmitter appears to beundamaged, try another transmitter orplace the transmitter in thetransmitter pocket/insert next to thecentre console storage area betweenthe driver and front passenger seats.See “Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation0 28.

If the engine does not start with theother transmitter or when thetransmitter is in the pocket/insert, thevehicle needs service. See your dealerwho can service the theft-deterrentsystem and have a new transmitterprogrammed to the vehicle.

Do not leave the transmitter or devicethat disarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ Warning

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If you cuttoo sharply into the right lane, youcould hit a vehicle on the right.Check the inside mirror or glanceover your shoulder before changinglanes.

The driver and passenger side mirrorsare convex shaped. A convex mirror'ssurface is curved so more can be seenfrom the driver seat.

Power Mirrors

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Press (1) or (2) to select thedriver or passenger side mirror.The indicator light comes on.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move the mirror up,down, right, or left.

3. Adjust the outside mirror so thatthe side of the vehicle and thearea behind are seen.

4. Press either (1) or (2) again todeselect the mirror. The indicatorlight goes off.



Exterior Automatic DimmingMirror

If equipped, the driver outside mirrorautomatically adjusts for the glare ofheadlights behind. This feature comeson when the vehicle is started. SeeAutomatic Dimming Rear View Mirror0 48.

Indicator

The vehicle may have an indicator onthe mirrors that flashes in thedirection of the turn or lane change.

Folding Mirrors

Power Folding

1. Press{ to fold the mirrorsinward.

2. Press{ again to return themirrors to the driving position.

Resetting the Power Folding Mirrors

Reset the power folding mirrors if:

. The mirrors are accidentallyobstructed while folding.

. They are accidentally manuallyfolded/unfolded.

. The mirrors will not stay in theunfolded position.

. The mirrors vibrate at normaldriving speeds.

Fold and unfold the mirrors one timeusing the mirror controls to resetthem to their normal position.A popping noise may be heard duringthe resetting of the power foldingmirrors. This sound is normal after amanual folding operation.

Auto Mirror Folding

If equipped, with the ignition off,press and hold Q on the RKEtransmitter for approximatelyone second to automatically fold theexterior mirrors. Press and hold K onthe RKE transmitter for approximatelyone second to unfold. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation0 28.

This feature is turned on or offthrough vehicle personalisation. SeeVehicle Personalisation 0 162.



Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with heated mirrors:

1 (Rear Window Demister) : Pressto heat the mirrors.

See “Rear Window Demister” underDual Automatic Climate Control System0 182.

Reverse Tilt MirrorsIf equipped with memory seats, thepassenger and/or driver mirror tilts toa preselected position when thevehicle is in R (Reverse). This allowsthe kerb to be seen when parallelparking.

The mirror(s) return to the originalposition when:

. The vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse), or remains inR (Reverse) for about 30 seconds.

. The ignition is turned off.

. The vehicle is driven inR (Reverse) above a set speed.

To turn this feature on or off, seeVehicle Personalisation 0 162.

Interior Mirrors

Interior Rearview MirrorsAdjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind the vehicle.

Do not spray glass cleaner directly onthe mirror. Use a soft towel dampenedwith water.

Automatic Dimming RearView MirrorThe rearview mirror automaticallydims to reduce the glare of theheadlamps from behind. This featurecomes on when the vehicle is started.

Rear Camera MirrorIf equipped, this automatic dimmingmirror provides a wide angle cameraview of the area behind the vehicle.

Pull the tab rearward to turn on thedisplay. Push the tab forward to turnit off. When off, the mirror isautomatic dimming. Adjust the mirrorfor a clear view of the area behind thevehicle while the display is off.



To adjust the brightness, press thebutton (1) on the back of therear-view mirror without covering thelight sensor (2).

Each button press cycles thebrightness between five settings.

{ Warning

The Rear Camera Mirror (RCM) hasa limited view. Portions of the road,vehicles, and other objects may notbe seen. Do not drive or park thevehicle using only this camera.Objects may appear closer thanthey are. Check the outside mirrorsor glance over your shoulder whenmaking lane changes or merging.Failure to use proper care mayresult in injury, death, or vehicledamage.

The camera that provides the RearCamera Mirror (RCM) image is abovethe license plate, next to the RearVision Camera (RVC).

To clean the rear camera, see RearWindow Wiper/Washer 0 125.

Troubleshooting

If the tab is in the rearward positionand a blue screen and d are displayedin the mirror and the display shutsoff, see your retailer for service.



The RCM may not work properly ordisplay a clear image if:

. There is glare from the sun orheadlights. This may obstructobjects from view.

. Dirt, snow, or other debris blocksthe camera lens. Clean the lenswith a soft damp cloth.

. The back of the vehicle has beendamaged and the position andmounting angle of the camera haschanged.

Child-View Mirror

If equipped, push up on thesunglasses bin and release. Push thebin back in halfway to secure themirror in position.

Push the mirror back up when notin use.

Windows

{ Warning

Never leave a child, a helpless adultor a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windows closedin warm or hot weather. They canbe overcome by the extreme heatand suffer permanent injuries oreven death from heat stroke.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rear



window is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce the sound,open either a front window or thesunroof, if equipped.

Power Windows

{ Warning

Children could be seriously injuredor killed if caught in the path of aclosing window. Never leave keys ina vehicle with children. When thereare children in the rear seat, use thewindow lockout button to preventoperation of the windows. See Keys0 27.

The windows work when the vehicle isin ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,or when Retained Accessory Power(RAP) is active. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 210.

Press or pull the switch to open orclose the window.

The windows will be temporarilydisabled if the window switches areused repeatedly within a short time.

Window Lockout

This feature prevents the rearpassenger windows from operating,except from the driver position.

. PressZ to activate the rearwindow locks. An indicator lightwill illuminate when the featureis on.

. PressZ again to deactivate therear window locks.

Window Express Movement

Express-down/up, if equipped, allowsthe windows to be opened or closedwithout holding the window switch.Press the window switch fully down orpull it up, and quickly release it toengage. Briefly press or pull the sameswitch to stop window movement.



Express Window ObstacleDetection

The express-up feature will reversewindow movement if it comes incontact with an object. Extreme coldor ice could cause the window toauto-reverse. The window will operateas normal after the object or conditionis removed.

Obstacle Detection Override

{ Warning

If obstacle detection override isactivated, the window will notreverse automatically. You or otherscould be injured and the windowcould be damaged. Before you useobstacle detection override, makesure that all people andobstructions are clear of thewindow path.

The window can be closed by holdingthe window switch in the up positionif conditions prevent it from expressclosing.

Programming the PowerWindows

Programming may be necessary if thevehicle's battery has beendisconnected or discharged. If thewindow is unable to express-up,program the window:

To program the window:

1. Close all doors.

2. Place the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.

3. Partially open the window to beprogrammed, then close it andcontinue to pull the switchbriefly after the window has fullyclosed.

4. Press the power window switchuntil the window is fully openand briefly hold.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to block glare.Detach the sun visor from the centremount to pivot to the side window or,if equipped, extend along the rod.



Roof

Sunroof

1. SLIDE Switch2. TILT Switch

If equipped, the sunroof only operateswhen the ignition is on or in ACC/ACCESSORY, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active. SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 210.

Slide Switch

Express-Open/Express-Close : Toexpress-open the sunroof, fully pressand release I (1). Press the switch

again to stop the movement. Toexpress-close the sunroof, fully pressand releaseK (1). Press the switchagain to stop the movement.

Open/Close (Manual Mode) : Toopen the sunroof, press andhold I (1). Release the switch tostop the movement. Press andholdK (1) to close the sunroof.Release the switch to stop themovement.

Tilt Switch

Vent : From the closed position,pressJ (2) to vent the sunroof. PressK (2) to close the sunroof vent.

When the sunroof is opened, an airdeflector will automatically raise. Theair deflector will retract when thesunroof is closed.

The sunroof also has a sunshadewhich can be pulled forward to blocksun rays. The sunshade must beopened and closed manually when thesunroof is in the vent or fully closedposition.

Automatic Reversal System

The sunroof is equipped with anautomatic reversal system that is onlyactive when the sunroof is beingoperated in express mode. If an objectis in the path of the sunroof while it isexpress-closing, the reversal systemwill detect the object and stop. In theevent of closing difficulties like frostor other conditions, it is possible tooverride the reversal system. Tooverride the reversal system, close inmanual mode. To stop the movement,release the switch.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation or noise. It could also plugthe water drainage system.Periodically open the sunroof and



remove any obstacles or loose debris.Wipe the sunroof seal and roof sealingarea using a clean cloth, mild soap,and water. Do not remove grease fromthe sunroof.

If water is seen dripping into thewater drainage system, this is normal.


SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 55

Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Front SeatsElectrically Operated SeatAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Reclining Seat Backrests . . . . . . . . . . 59Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Massage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Heated and Cooled Front Seats . . . 62

Rear SeatsHeated Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Seat BeltsSeat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Three-Point Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Seat-Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Seat Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Replacing Safety Belt System Partsafter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Airbag SystemAir-Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . 81When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . 83How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . 84What Will You See after an AirbagInflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . 85Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . 89

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Replacing Airbag System Partsafter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Infants and Young Children . . . . . . 93Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . 95Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . . 96ISOFIX Child RestraintSystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in theRear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in theFront Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Head RestraintsFront Seats

The vehicle's front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinalinjury in a crash. Do not drive untilthe head restraints for all occupantsare installed and adjusted properly.


56 SEATS AND RESTRAINTS

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraint upto raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it is lockedin place.

To lower the head restraint, press thebutton, located on the top of the seatbackrest, and push the head restraintdown. Try to move the head restraintafter the button is released to makesure that it is locked in place.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not removable.

Second Row Seats

The vehicle's second row seats havehead restraints in the outboardseating positions that cannot beadjusted.

The second row seat outboard headrestraints are not removable.

Third Row Seats

The third row seat head restraint canbe lowered to allow for better visibilitywhen the rear seat is unoccupied.



To lower the head restraint, press thebutton located on the top of thebackrest and push the headrestraint down.

Return the lowered head restraint tothe upright position until it locks intoplace. Push and pull on the headrestraint to make sure it is locked.

The third row seat outboard headrestraints are not removable.

Front Seats

Electrically Operated SeatAdjustment

Up-level Seat Adjustment

{ Warning

You can lose control of the vehicleif you try to adjust a driver seatwhile the vehicle is moving. Adjustthe driver seat only when thevehicle is not moving.

If equipped, the ignition must be onto use all up-level seat features.

Up-level Seat Control

1. Feature Select2. Up3. Rearward4. Down5. Forward

. Move Feature Select (1) to displayseat adjustments on theinfotainment display. Press andrelease or hold to scroll throughfeatures.

. Press Up (2) to make upwardadjustments of the selectedfeature.



. Press Rearward (3) to makerearward adjustments of theselected feature.

. Press Down (4) to make downwardadjustments of the selectedfeature.

. Press Forward (5) to make forwardadjustments of the selectedfeature.


To adjust the seat:

. Move the seat forward or rearwardby sliding the control forward orrearward.

. Raise or lower the front part of theseat cushion by moving the frontof the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the seat by movingthe rear of the control up or down.

Lumbar Adjustment

Lumbar and Bolster Support


To adjust lumbar support:

. Press and hold the control forwardto increase or rearward to decreaseupper and lower lumbar supportat the same time.

. Press and hold the control up toincrease upper lumbar supportand decrease lower lumbarsupport.

Press and hold the control downto increase lower lumbar supportand decrease upper lumbarsupport.


To adjust lumbar support, if equipped:

. Press and release or hold FeatureSelect (1) to scroll to lumbarsupport on the infotainmentdisplay.



. Press Forward (5) or Rearward (3)to adjust lumbar forward orrearward.

. Press Up (2) or Down (4) to adjustlumbar up or down.

To adjust bolster support, if equipped:


. Press and release or hold FeatureSelect (1) to scroll to bolstersupport on the infotainmentdisplay.

. Press Forward (5) or Rearward (3)to adjust bolster support inward oroutward.

Upper Shoulder Support

To adjust upper shoulder support,if equipped:

. Press and release or hold FeatureSelect (1) to scroll to uppershoulder support on theinfotainment display.

. Press Forward (5) or Rearward (3)to adjust shoulder support forwardor rearward.


Base Shown, Up-level Similar

To recline the seat backrest:

. Tilt the top of the controlrearward to recline.

. Tilt the top of the control forwardto raise.

{ Warning

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckled up,the safety belts cannot do their job.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it will bein front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would bethere, not at your pelvic bones. Thiscould cause serious internalinjuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit well backin the seat and wear the safety beltproperly.

Do not have a backrest reclined if thevehicle is moving.

Memory Seats

The SET, 1, 2, andB (Exit) buttonson the driver's door are used tomanually store and recall memorysettings for the driver seat, exteriormirrors, power tilt and telescopingsteering column, adjustable pedals (ifequipped), and massage settings (ifequipped).

Storing Memory Positions

To store positions to the 1 and 2buttons:

1. The ignition must be in ON/RUNor ACC/ACCESSORY.

2. Adjust the driver's seat, exteriormirrors, power tilt andtelescoping steering column,adjustable pedals (if equipped),and massage settings (ifequipped) to the desiredpositions.

3. Press and release SET. A beepwill sound.

4. Immediately press and hold 1until two beeps sound.

5. Repeat Steps 1–4 for a seconddriver using 2.



To store exit positions and easy exitfeatures to theB (Exit) button,

repeat Steps 1–4 usingB to storeyour positions for getting out of thevehicle.

Manually Recalling MemoryPositions

Press and hold 1, 2, orB tomanually recall the previously storedmemory positions.

To stop recall movement, release 1, 2,orB before the stored positions arereached; or press the SET, powermirror, or power seat controls; orpress the power tilt and telescopingsteering wheel control; or press theadjustable pedal control.

If the massage feature is off when thememory recall is performed, thepreviously stored type and intensitywill be recalled, but it will remain offuntil activated with the massagecontrol.

Automatically Recalling MemoryPositions (Auto Memory Recall)

If programmed on in vehiclepersonalisation, the Auto (Automatic)Memory Recall feature automaticallyrecalls the current driver's previouslystored 1 or 2 position and massagesettings (if equipped) when theignition is changed from OFF to ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.

See “Auto Memory Recall” under"Comfort and Convenience" in VehiclePersonalisation 0 162.

To stop recall movement, pressB,power mirror, or power seat controls;or press the power tilt and telescopingsteering wheel control; or press theadjustable pedal control. Turning theignition off also stops the recall.

If the vehicle driver has changed, insome vehicles the Driver ID may bedisplayed for the first few ignitioncycles.

RKE transmitters are not labelled witha number. If your memory seatposition is stored to 1 or 2 but thisposition is not automatically recalling,

then store your positions to the otherbutton or switch RKE transmitterswith the other driver.

Easy Exit Recall

If programmed on in vehiclepersonalisation, the easy exit featureautomatically recalls the previouslystored Exit positions when leaving thevehicle. See “Storing MemoryPositions” previously in this section.See also Vehicle Personalisation 0 162.

Easy exit recall automatically activateswhen one of the following occurs:

. The vehicle is turned off and thedriver's door is opened within ashort time.

. The vehicle is turned off with thedriver's door open.

RKE transmitters are not labelled witha number. If your memory seatposition is stored to 1 or 2 but thisposition is not automatically recalling,then store your positions to the otherbutton or switch RKE transmitterswith the other driver.



To stop recall movement, press one ofthe memory, power mirror, or powerseat controls; press the power tilt andtelescoping steering column control;or press the adjustable pedal control.

Obstructions

If something has blocked the driverseat, power tilt and telescopingsteering column, and/or adjustablepedals while recalling a memoryposition, the recall may stop. Removethe obstruction. Then do one of thefollowing:

. If automatically or manuallyrecalling the stored memoryposition, press and hold theappropriate manual control fortwo seconds. Try recalling againby pressing the appropriatememory button.

. If recalling the exit position, pressand hold the appropriate manualcontrol for the exit feature notrecalling for two seconds. Then tryrecalling the exit position again.

If the memory position is still notrecalling, see your dealer for service.

Massage

Driver Seat Shown, Passenger SeatSimilar

If equipped, the ignition must be onto use the massage feature.

To activate and adjust massage:

1. Turn the selection control (1) toview massage options on theinfotainment display.

2. Select massage feature.

3. Press up or down to select themassage type.

4. Press forward or rearward tochange the intensity.

5. To activate massage at lastmassage type and intensitysettings or to turn massage off,press the massage On/Offcontrol (2).

Heated and Cooled FrontSeats

{ Warning

If temperature change or pain tothe skin cannot be felt, the seatheater may cause burns. To reducethe risk of burns, use care whenusing the seat heater, especially forlong periods of time. Do not placeanything on the seat that insulatesagainst heat, such as a blanket,cushion, cover, or similar item. Thismay cause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seat heatermay cause a burn or may damagethe seat.



To operate, the engine must berunning.

PressI or+ to heat the driver orpassenger backrest only.

Press J or z to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion and backrest.


When this feature is off, the heatedand cooled seat symbols on thebuttons are white. When a heated seatis turned on, the symbol turns red.When a cooled seat is turned on, thesymbol turns blue.

Press the button once for the highestsetting. With each press of the button,the seat will change to the next lowersetting, and then to the off setting.The indicator lights next to thebuttons indicate three for the highestsetting and one for the lowest. If theheated seats are on high for anextended time, their level mayautomatically be lowered.

The passenger seat may take longer toheat up.

Remote Start Auto Heated andCooled Seats

During a remote start, the heated orcooled seats will turn on if enabled invehicle personalisation. When it iscold outside, the heated seats turn on;when it is hot outside, the cooledseats turn on. The seats will continueto operate depending on the vehicle'sinternal temperature. If auto heated orcooled seats are not equipped orenabled, seat operation is cancelledwhen the ignition is turned on. Pressthe heated or cooled seat button touse the heated or cooled seats afterthe vehicle is started. See RemoteVehicle Start 0 33 and VehiclePersonalisation 0 162.

The heated or cooled seat indicatorlights do not turn on during a remotestart.

The temperature performance of anunoccupied seat may be reduced. Thisis normal.



Auto Heated and Cooled Seats

When the ignition is on, the autoheated or cooled seats willautomatically activate at the leveldetermined by the vehicle's interiortemperature, if enabled in vehiclepersonalisation. See VehiclePersonalisation 0 162. The indicatorlights next to the buttons indicate thelevel of operation. Use the heated orcooled seat buttons to turn off autoheated or cooled seats. If thepassenger seat is unoccupied, thisfeature will not activate that seat.

Rear Seats

Heated Rear Seats

{ Warning

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, the seatheater may cause burns. See theWarning under Heated and CooledFront Seats 0 62.

The buttons are on the rear of thecentre console.

With the ignition in ON/RUN/START,press M or L to heat the left or rightoutboard seat cushion. An indicatoron the rear climate control displayappears when this feature is on.

Press the button once for the highestsetting. With each press of the button,the seat will change to the next lowersetting, and then to the off setting.The indicator lights next to thebuttons indicate three for the highestsetting and one for the lowest.

If the heated seats are on high for anextended time, their level mayautomatically be lowered.

Second Row SeatsThe second row seats can be foldedfor additional cargo space or foldedand tumbled for easy entry and exit tothe third row seat.




To recline the seat backrest:

1. Lift the lever on the outboardside of the seat.

2. Move the backrest to the desiredposition, and then release thelever to lock the backrest inplace.

3. Push and pull on the backrest tomake sure it is locked.

To return the seat backrest to theupright position:

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

1. Lift the lever fully while applyingpressure to the backrest, and thebackrest will return to theupright position. If the lever islifted without applying pressure,the seat will release to a foldedposition.

2. Push and pull on the backrest tomake sure it is locked.

Manual Fold and Tumble Feature

{ Warning

Do not leave the second row seat ina tumbled position while thevehicle is in motion. A tumbled seatis not locked. It can move when thevehicle is in motion. People in thevehicle could be injured in a suddenstop or crash. Be sure to return theseat to the passenger seatingposition before driving the vehicle.Push and pull on the seat to makesure it is locked into place.

Caution

Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may causedamage to the seat or the safetybelts. Always unbuckle the safetybelts and return them to theirnormal stowed position beforefolding a rear seat.



Folding and Tumbling the Seat

To fold and tumble the seat:

1. Make sure that there is nothingunder, in front of, or on the seat.

2. Lift the lever on the outboardside of the seat to release theseatback.

The seatback will fold forward tocreate a flat load floor.

If the seatback cannot fold flat,try moving the front seat forwardand/or put the front seatback inthe upright position.

3. Lift the lever again to release therear of the seat from the floor.The seat will tumble forward.

Folding and Tumbling the Seat fromthe Third Row Seat

{ Warning

Using the third row seating positionwhile the second row is folded,or folded and tumbled, could causeinjury in a sudden stop or crash. Besure to return the seat to thepassenger seating position. Pushand pull on the seat to make sure itis locked into place.



To fold and tumble the seat from thethird row seat:


2. Pull the strap on the bottom rearof the second row seat to releasethe backrest. The seatback willfold forward.

3. Pull the strap again to releasethe rear of the seat from thefloor. The seat will tumbleforward.

Automatic Fold and TumbleFeature

{ Warning

Do not leave the second row seat ina tumbled position while thevehicle is in motion. A tumbled seatis not locked. It can move when thevehicle is in motion. People in thevehicle could be injured in a sudden

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

stop or crash. Be sure to return theseat to the passenger seatingposition before driving the vehicle.Push and pull on the seat to makesure it is locked into place.

{ Warning

Automatically folding and tumblingthe seat when someone is sitting inthe seat, could cause injury to theperson sitting there. Always makesure there is no one sitting in theseat before pressing the automaticseat release switch.

Caution

Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may causedamage to the seat or the safetybelts. Always unbuckle the safety

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

belts and return them to theirnormal stowed position beforefolding a rear seat.

The transmission must be in P (Park)for this feature to work.

Folding and Tumbling the Seat

To fold and tumble the seat:


Driver Side Rear Panel Switch

2. Press the automatic seat releaseswitch on the panel behind therear doors. The backrestautomatically folds flat.

3. Press the switch again to releasethe rear of the seat from thefloor. The seat will tumbleforward.

Folding and Tumbling the SecondRow Seat from the Cargo Area

1. Second Row Power Seat Foldand Tumble Switches

2. Third Row Power Seat Foldand Raise Switches

To fold and tumble the seat from thecargo area:


2. Press the switch (1) on the sidetrim of the cargo area to fold thesecond row backrest.

The left switch folds the leftbackrest, and the right switchfolds the right backrest.

3. Press the switch again to releasethe rear of the seat from thefloor. The seat will tumbleforward.

The switches (2) can be used to foldthe third row backrests from the cargoarea. See Third Row Seats 0 69.

Returning the Seat to the SittingPosition

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To return the seat to the sittingposition from the tumbled position:

1. Pull the seat down until itlatches to the floor. The seatbackcannot be raised if the seat is notlatched to the floor.

2. Lift the seatback and push itrearward. Push and pull on thebackrest to make sure it islocked.

3. For the 60/40 split-bench seat,make sure the safety belt in thecentre seating position is notcaught between the two seatsand is not twisted.

Third Row Seats

Folding the Seat Backrest

Caution

Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may causedamage to the seat or the safetybelts. Always unbuckle the safetybelts and return them to theirnormal stowed position beforefolding a rear seat.

The transmission must be in P (Park)for this feature to work.

The third row backrests can be foldedto increase cargo space.



To fold the seatback:

1. Open the tailgate to access thecontrols for the third row seat.


3. Fully lower the head restraints.See Head Restraints 0 55. Put thesecond row backrest in theupright position. See Second RowSeats 0 64.



4. Disconnect the rear seat beltmini-latch, using a key in theslot on the mini-buckle, and let

the belt retract into theheadliner. Stow the mini-latch inthe holder in the headliner.

5. Press and hold the switch (2) onthe side trim of the cargo area tofold the third row backrest.

The left switch folds the leftbackrest, and the right switchfolds the right backrest.

6. Repeat the steps for the otherseatback, if desired.

The switches (1) can be used to foldor fold and tumble the second rowseats from the cargo area. See SecondRow Seats 0 64.

Returning the Third RowBackrest to the Upright Position



To return the third row backrest tothe upright position:

1. Open the tailgate to access thecontrols for the seat.

2. Press and hold the switch (2) onthe side trim of the cargo area toraise the third row backrest.



The left switch raises the leftbackrest, and the right switchraises the right backrest.

{ Warning

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

3. Reconnect the centre seat beltmini-latch to the mini-buckle. Donot let it twist.

4. Pull on the seat belt to be surethe mini-latch is secure.

5. Repeat the steps for the otherseatback, if desired.

Seat BeltsThis section of the manual describeshow to use safety belts properly.It also describes some things not todo with safety belts.

{ Warning

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be worn properly.In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearing safetybelts, injuries can be much worsethan if you are wearing safety belts.You can be seriously injured orkilled by hitting things inside thevehicle harder or by being ejectedfrom the vehicle. In addition,anyone who is not buckled up canstrike other passengers in thevehicle.

It is extremely dangerous to travelin a cargo area, inside or outside ofa vehicle. In a collision, passengersriding in these areas are more likelyto be seriously injured or killed. Donot allow passengers to ride in any

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

area of the vehicle that is notequipped with seats and safetybelts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders 0 136.

Why Safety Belts Work



When riding in a vehicle, you travel asfast as the vehicle does. If the vehiclestops suddenly, you keep going untilsomething stops you. It could be thewindscreen, the instrument panel,or the safety belts!

When you wear a safety belt, you andthe vehicle slow down together. Thereis more time to stop because you stopover a longer distance and, when wornproperly, your strongest bones takethe forces from the safety belts. Thatis why wearing safety belts makessuch good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be - whether you arewearing a safety belt or not. Yourchances of being conscious duringand after a crash, so you canunbuckle and get out, are muchgreater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systemsonly; so they work with safetybelts - not instead of them.Whether or not an airbag isprovided, all occupants still haveto buckle up to get the mostprotection.

Also, in nearly all regions, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout seat belts and children, andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see Older Children0 91 or Infants and Young Children0 93. Follow those rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who are wearingsafety belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct buckle foryour seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strong



pelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could cause seriousor even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.The shoulder belt locks if there isa sudden stop or crash.

{ Warning

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearing yoursafety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to become looseor twisted.

. Never wear the shoulder beltunder both arms or behindyour back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over an armrest.

Three-Point BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

If you are using a rear seating positionwith a detachable safety belt, and theseat belt is not attached, see ThirdRow Seats 0 69 for instructions onreconnecting the seat belt to themini-buckle.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see "Seats"in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of thefront passenger belt is pulled outall the way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.



Engaging the child restraintlocking feature in the frontoutboard seating position mayaffect the passenger sensingsystem. See Passenger SensingSystem 0 85.

For front seating positions, if thewebbing locks in the latch platebefore it reaches the buckle, tiltthe latch plate flat to unlock.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks. If the latchplate will not go fully into thebuckle, check if the correctbuckle is being used.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”

in this section for instructions onuse and important safetyinformation.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

For third row seats, it may benecessary to pull stitching on theseat belt through the latch plateto fully tighten the lap belt onsmaller occupants.



To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt should returnto its stowed position.

For third row seats, slide the latchplate up the safety webbing when theseat belt is not in use. The latch plateshould rest on the stitching on theseat belt.

Always stow the seat belt slowly. If theseat belt webbing returns quickly tothe stowed position, the retractor maylock and cannot be pulled out. If thishappens, pull the seat belt straight outfirmly to unlock the webbing, andthen release it. If the webbing is stilllocked in the retractor, see yourretailer.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If a dooris slammed against a safety belt,damage can occur to both the beltand the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder belt heightadjuster for the driver and frontoutboard passenger positions.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting, theneck. Improper shoulder belt heightadjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in acrash. See How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly 0 72.

Push down on the release button tomove the height adjuster to thedesired position.

Move the adjuster up by pushing upon the shoulder belt guide.

After the adjuster is set to the desiredposition, try to move it down withoutpushing the release button to makesure it has locked into position.

Automatic Seat Belt TighteningSystem

The vehicle may have the AutomaticSeat Belt Tightening System.



The system activates duringemergency braking and/or suddendriving manoeuvres and releases whendriving conditions return to normal.

The system will not activate if theTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl system is not functioningproperly. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 226.If there is a problem with theAutomatic Seat Belt TighteningSystem, a message displays on theDriver Information Centre (DIC). SeeSafety Belt Messages 0 158. Other seatbelt functions are not affected by theAutomatic Seat Belt TighteningSystem.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, they arepart of the safety belt assembly. Theycan help tighten the safety beltsduring the early stages of a moderateto severe frontal, near frontal, or rearcrash if the threshold conditions forpretensioner activation are met. Safety

belt pretensioners can also helptighten the safety belts in a side crashor a roll-over event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash, thepretensioners and probably otherparts of the vehicle's safety beltsystem will need to be replaced. SeeReplacing Safety Belt System Parts aftera Crash 0 79.

Do not sit on the outboard safety beltwhile entering or exiting the vehicle orat any time while sitting in the seat.Sitting on the safety belt can damagethe webbing and hardware.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides

{ Warning

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulder beltshould go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take beltrestraining forces.

Rear safety belt comfort guides mayprovide added safety belt comfort forolder children who have outgrownbooster seats and for some adults.When installed on a shoulder belt, thecomfort guide positions the shoulderbelt away from the neck and head.

Second Row Outboard SeatingPositions

The vehicle has comfort guides for thesecond row outboard seatingpositions. The comfort guides arestored on a clip on the interior trimnext to the outboard backrest.

To install:



1. Remove the guide from itsstorage clip on the interior trimnext to the outboard backrest.

2. Place the guide over the belt, andinsert the two edges of the beltinto the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be behind thebelt with the plastic guide on thefront.

4. Buckle, position, and release thesafety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edges togetherso that the safety belt can be removedfrom the guide. Slide the guide ontoits storage clip.



Third Row Seating Positions

Comfort guides may be availablethrough your retailer for third rowseating positions. If available,instructions are included with theguides.

Seat-Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely to beseriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lap portionshould be worn as low as possible,below the rounding, throughout thepregnancy.

The best way to protect the foetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the foetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safety beltseffective is wearing them properly.

Safety System CheckCheck that the seat belt reminder, seatbelts, buckles, latch plates, andretractors, are all working properly.Look for any other loose or damagedseat belt system parts that might keepa seat belt system from performingproperly. See your dealer to have itrepaired. Torn or frayed safety beltsmay not protect you in a crash. Theycan rip apart under impact forces. If abelt is torn or frayed, have it replacedimmediately.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders 0 136.

Keep safety belts clean and dry. SeeSeat Belt Care 0 78.

Seat Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye seat beltwebbing. It may severely weakenthe webbing. In a crash, they mightnot be able to provide adequateprotection. Clean and rinse seat beltwebbing only with mild soap andlukewarm water. Allow the webbingto dry.

Safety belts should be properly caredfor and maintained.

Safety belt hardware should be keptdry and free of dust or debris. Exteriorhard surfaces and safety belt webbingmay be lightly cleaned with mild soapand water as necessary. Ensure thereis not excessive dust or debris in themechanism. If dust or debris exists inthe system please see the dealer. Partsmay need to be replaced to ensureproper functionality of the system.



Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the safety beltsystem in the vehicle. A damagedsafety belt system may not properlyprotect the person using it,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help make surethe safety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary. Butthe safety belt assemblies that wereused during any crash may have beenstressed or damaged. See your dealerto have the safety belt assembliesinspected or replaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at the timeof the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicle orwhile you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 136.

{ Warning

Safety procedures must be followedat all times when disposing of thevehicle or vehicle parts. Disposalshould be performed only by anauthorised service centre, to helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Airbag System

Air-Bag SystemThe vehicle has the following airbags:

. A frontal airbag for the driver.

. A frontal airbag for the frontoutboard passenger.

. A front centre airbag for the driverand front outboard passenger.

. A seat-mounted side impact airbagfor the driver.

. A seat-mounted side impact airbagfor the front outboard passenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand for the second and third rowpassengers seated directly behindthe driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thesecond and third row passengersseated directly behind the frontoutboard passenger.

All vehicle airbags have the wordAIRBAG on the trim or on an attachedlabel near the deployment opening.



For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAGis on the centre of the steering wheelfor the driver and on the instrumentpanel for the front outboardpassenger.

For the front centre airbag, the wordAIRBAG is on the inboard side of thedriver backrest.

For seat-mounted side impact airbags,the word AIRBAG is on the side of theseatback closest to the door.

For roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAGis on the ceiling or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbags arealso designed to help reduce the riskof injury from the force of an inflatingbag, all airbags must inflate veryquickly to do their job.

Here are the most important things toknow about the airbag system:

{ Warning

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt, even withairbags. Airbags are designed towork with safety belts, not replacethem. Also, airbags are not designedto inflate in every crash. In somecrashes safety belts are the onlyrestraint. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? 0 82.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce your chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to thesafety belts. Everyone in the vehicleshould wear a safety belt properly,whether or not there is an airbagfor that person.

{ Warning

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink of aneye, anyone who is up against,or very close to any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Do not sit unnecessarilyclose to any airbag, as you would beif sitting on the edge of the seat orleaning forward. Safety belts helpkeep you in position before andduring a crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle. The seat belts and thefront outboard passenger airbagsare most effective when you aresitting well back and upright in theseat with both feet on the floor.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the front centrearmrest or console in vehicles witha front centre airbag.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Always secure childrenproperly in the vehicle. To readhow, see Older Children 0 91 orInfants and Young Children 0 93.

There is an airbag readiness light onthe instrument cluster, which showsthe airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 136.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in thecentre of the steering wheel.

The front outboard passenger frontalairbag is in the passenger sideinstrument panel.



The front centre airbag is in theinboard side of the driver backrest.

Driver Side Shown, Passenger SideSimilar

The driver and front outboardpassenger seat-mounted side impactairbags are in the sides of theseatbacks closest to the door.

Driver Side Shown, Passenger SideSimilar

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,front outboard passenger, and secondand third row outboard passengers arein the ceiling above the side windows.

{ Warning

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, the airbagmight not inflate properly or itmight force the object into thatperson causing severe injury oreven death. The path of an inflatingairbag must be kept clear. Do not

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

put anything between an occupantand an airbag, and do not attach orput anything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any other airbagcovering.

Do not use seat or consoleaccessories that block the inflationpath of a seat-mounted side impactairbag or the front centre airbag.

Never secure anything to the roof ofa vehicle with roof-rail airbags byrouting a rope or tie-down throughany door or window opening. If youdo, the path of an inflating roof-railairbag will be blocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?This vehicle is equipped with airbags.See Air-Bag System 0 79. Airbags aredesigned to inflate if the impactexceeds the specific airbag system'sdeployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds are used to predict howsevere a crash is likely to be in time



for the airbags to inflate and helprestrain the occupants. The vehiclehas electronic sensors that help theairbag system determine the severityof the impact. Deployment thresholdscan vary with specific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are designed to inflatein moderate to severe frontal or nearfrontal crashes to help reduce thepotential for severe injuries, mainly tothe driver's or front outboardpassenger's head and chest.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is travelling.It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, andwhether the object is fixed or moving,rigid or deformable, narrow or wide.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle has advancedtechnology frontal airbags. Advancedtechnology frontal airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.

The vehicle also has a seat positionsensor that enables the sensingsystem to monitor the position of thedriver seat. The seat position sensorprovides information that is used toadjust the deployment of the driverfrontal airbag.

The front centre airbag is designed toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending upon the locationof the impact, when either side of thevehicle is struck. In addition, the frontcentre airbag is designed to inflatewhen the sensing system predicts thatthe vehicle is about to roll over on itsside. The front centre airbag is notdesigned to inflate in frontal impacts,near frontal impacts, or rear impacts.

Seat-mounted side impact airbags aredesigned to inflate in moderate tosevere side crashes depending on thelocation of the impact. Seat-mountedside impact airbags are not designedto inflate in frontal impacts, nearfrontal impacts, rollovers, or rear

impacts. A seat-mounted side impactairbag is designed to inflate on theside of the vehicle that is struck.

Roof-rail airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending on the location ofthe impact. In addition, these roof-railairbags are designed to inflate duringa rollover or in a severe frontalimpact. Roof-rail airbags are notdesigned to inflate in rear impacts.Both roof-rail airbags will inflate wheneither side of the vehicle is struck,if the sensing system predicts that thevehicle is about to roll over on itsside, or in a severe frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of the vehicledamage or the repair costs.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break out of



the cover. The inflator, the airbag, andrelated hardware are all part of theairbag module.

For airbag locations, see Where Are theAirbags? 0 81.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal or nearfrontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contact theinside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts bydistributing the force of the impactmore evenly over the occupant's body.

Roll-over capable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help contain the head andchest of occupants in the outboardseating positions in the first, second,and third rows. The rollover capableroof-rail airbags are designed to helpreduce the risk of full or partial

ejection in rollover events, althoughno system can prevent all suchejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarily becausethe occupant's motion is not towardthose airbags. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? 0 82.

Airbags should never be regarded asanything more than a supplement tosafety belts.

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates?After frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, so quicklythat some people may not even realizean airbag inflated. The front centreairbag and roof-rail airbags may stillbe at least partially inflated for sometime after they inflate. Somecomponents of the airbag module maybe hot for several minutes. Forlocation of the airbags, see Where Arethe Airbags? 0 81.

The parts of the airbag that come intocontact with you may be warm, butnot too hot to touch. There may besome smoke and dust coming fromthe vents in the deflated airbags.Airbag inflation does not prevent thedriver from seeing out of thewindscreen or being able to steer thevehicle, nor does it prevent peoplefrom leaving the vehicle.

{ Warning

When an airbag inflates, there maybe dust in the air. This dust couldcause breathing problems forpeople with a history of asthma orother breathing trouble. To avoidthis, everyone should leave thevehicle as soon as it is safe to doso. If you have breathing problemsbut cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then getfresh air by opening a window or adoor. If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.



The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps and hazardwarning lights, and shut off the fuelsystem after the airbags inflate. Thefeature may also activate, withoutairbag inflation, after an event thatexceeds a predetermined threshold.You can lock the doors, turn off theinterior lights and turn off the hazardwarning flashers by using the controlsfor those features.

{ Warning

A crash severe enough to inflate theairbags may have also damagedimportant functions in the vehicle,such as the fuel system, brake andsteering systems, etc. Even if thevehicle appears to be drivable aftera moderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that could makeit difficult to safely operate thevehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windscreens arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windscreen breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.

. Airbags are designed to inflateonly once. After an airbag inflates,you will need some new parts forthe airbag system. If you do notget them, the airbag system willnot be there to help protect you inanother crash. A new system willinclude airbag modules andpossibly other parts. The servicemanual for the vehicle covers theneed to replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after a crash.See Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy 0 358.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger Sensing SystemThe vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem for the front outboardpassenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator will light onthe overhead console when the vehicleis started.

The symbols for on and off will bevisible during the system check. Whenthe system check is complete, eitherthe symbol for on or off will be visible.See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator0 137.

The passenger sensing system turnsoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag under certainconditions. No other airbag is affectedby the passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system workswith sensors that are part of the frontoutboard passenger seat and safety



belt. The sensors are designed todetect the presence of aproperly-seated occupant anddetermine if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag should beallowed to inflate or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured in arear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag inflates.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the passenger frontal airbaginflates. This is because the back ofthe rear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflating airbag.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

A child in a forward-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the passenger frontal airbaginflates and the passenger seat is ina forward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the passengerfrontal airbag, no system is fail-safe.No one can guarantee that anairbag will not deploy under someunusual circumstance, even thoughthe airbag is turned off.

Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If securing aforward-facing child restraint in thefront outboard passenger seat,always move the seat as far back asit will go. It is better to secure childrestraints in the rear seat. Considerusing another vehicle to transportthe child when a rear seat is notavailable.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag if:

. The front outboard passenger seatis unoccupied.

. The system determines an infantis present in a child restraint.

. A front outboard passenger takeshis/her weight off of the seat for aperiod of time.

. There is a critical problem withthe airbag system or the passengersensing system.

When the passenger sensing systemhas turned off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag, the offindicator will light and stay lit as areminder that the airbag is off. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator0 137.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sitting properlyin the front outboard passenger seat.



When the passenger sensing systemhas allowed the airbag to be enabled,the on indicator will light and stay litas a reminder that the airbag is active.

For some children, including childrenin child restraints, and for very smalladults, the passenger sensing systemmay or may not turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag,depending upon the person's seatingposture and body build. Everyone inthe vehicle who has outgrown childrestraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is anairbag for that person.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrong withthe airbag system. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 136 formore information, includingimportant safety information.

If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag ifthe system determines that an infantis present in a child restraint. If achild restraint has been installed andthe on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (With theSeat Belt in the Front Seat) 0 114or Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the Rear Seat)0 113.

Make sure the seat belt retractoris locked by pulling the shoulderbelt all the way out of the

retractor when installing thechild restraint, even if the childrestraint is equipped with a seatbelt lock-off. When the retractorlock is set, the belt can betightened but not pulled out ofthe retractor.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is stilllit, turn the vehicle off. Thenslightly recline the vehicleseatback and adjust the seatcushion, if adjustable, to makesure that the vehicle seatback isnot pushing the child restraintinto the seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under thevehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraints0 55.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing system may ormay not turn off the airbag for a childin a child restraint depending uponthe child's size. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat. Never



put a rear-facing child restraint in thefront seat, even if the on indicator isnot lit.

If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Sized Occupant

If a person of adult size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat, butthe off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat or that the childrestraint locking feature is engaged.If this happens, use the followingsteps to allow the system to detectthat person and enable the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centred on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. If the shoulder portion of thebelt is pulled out all the way, thechild restraint locking featurewill be engaged. This mayunintentionally cause thepassenger sensing system to turnthe airbag off for someadult-sized occupants. If thishappens, unbuckle the belt, letthe belt go back all the way, andthen buckle the belt againwithout pulling the belt out allthe way.

6. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this positionfor two to three minutes afterthe on indicator is lit.

{ Warning

If the front outboard passengerairbag is turned off for anadult-sized occupant, the airbag willnot be able to inflate and helpprotect that person in a crash,resulting in an increased risk ofserious injury or even death. Anadult-sized occupant should notride in the front outboard passengerseat, if the passenger airbag offindicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep the passengerin position on the seat during vehiclemanoeuvres and braking, which helpsthe passenger sensing systemmaintain the passenger airbag status.See “Safety Belts” and “ChildRestraints” in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such as seat



covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing system operates.We recommend that you not use seatcovers or other aftermarket equipmentexcept when approved by GM for yourspecific vehicle. See Adding Equipmentto the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 89 formore information about modificationsthat can affect how the systemoperates.

The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase, handbag,grocery bag, laptop, or other electronicdevice, is put on an unoccupied seat.If this is not desired, remove theobject from the seat.

{ Warning

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicle shouldbe serviced. There are parts of theairbag system in several places aroundthe vehicle. Your dealer and theservice manual have informationabout servicing the vehicle and theairbag system.

{ Warning

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and the batteryis disconnected, an airbag can stillinflate during improper service. Youcan be injured if you are close to anairbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They areprobably part of the airbag system.Be sure to follow proper serviceprocedures, and make sure theperson performing work for you isqualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end, or side sheet metalmay keep the airbag system fromworking properly.

The operation of the airbag systemcan also be affected by changing anyparts of the front seats, seat belts,airbag sensing and diagnostic module,steering wheel, instrument panel, anyof the airbag modules, ceiling or pillargarnish trim, overhead console, frontsensors, side impact sensors, airbagwiring, or front centre console.

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the location ofthe airbag sensors, sensing anddiagnostic module, and airbag wiring.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system whichincludes sensors that are a part of thepassenger's seat. The passengersensing system may not operateproperly if the original seat trim isreplaced with non-GM covers,upholstery or trim, or with GM covers,



upholstery or trim designed for adifferent vehicle. Any object, such asan aftermarket seat heater or acomfort enhancing pad or device,installed under or on top of the seatfabric, could also interfere with theoperation of the passenger sensingsystem. This could either preventproper deployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properly turningoff the passenger airbag(s). SeePassenger Sensing System 0 85.

If the vehicle has rollover roof-railairbags, see Different Size Tyres andWheels 0 315 for additional importantinformation.

If you have to modify your vehiclebecause you have a disability and youhave questions about whether themodifications will affect the vehicle'sairbag system, or if you havequestions about whether the airbagsystem will be affected if the vehicle ismodified for any other reason, seeyour dealer.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 136.

Caution

If an airbag covering is damaged,opened, or broken, the airbag maynot work properly. Do not open orbreak the airbag coverings. If thereare any opened or broken airbagcoverings, have the airbag coveringand/or airbag module replaced. Forthe location of the airbags, seeWhere Are the Airbags? 0 81. Seeyour dealer for service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle. A damagedairbag system may not properlyprotect you and your passenger(s)in a crash, resulting in seriousinjury or even death. To help makesure the airbag systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. See yourdealer for service.



If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 136.

{ Warning

Safety procedures must be followedat all times when disposing of thevehicle or vehicle parts. Disposalshould be performed only by anauthorised service centre, to helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear the vehicle'ssafety belts.

The manufacturer instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:

. Sit all the way back on the seat.Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no, returnto the booster seat.

. Fasten the lap-shoulder belt. Doesthe shoulder belt rest on theshoulder? If yes, continue. If no,try using the rear safety beltcomfort guide, if available. See“Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides”under Three-Point Belt 0 73. If acomfort guide is not available, or ifthe shoulder belt still does not reston the shoulder, then return to thebooster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low and snugon the hips, touching the thighs?If yes, continue. If no, return tothe booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no, returnto the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way to wearsafety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulder belt



can provide. The shoulder beltshould not cross the face or neck.The lap belt should fit snuglybelow the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. This applies beltforce to the child's pelvic bones ina crash. It should never be wornover the abdomen, which couldcause severe or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Three-Point Belt 0 73.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in a rear seating position.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can be thrownout of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

{ Warning

Never allow more than one child towear the same safety belt. Thesafety belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, they

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

can be crushed together andseriously injured. A seat belt mustbe used by only one person ata time.

{ Warning

Never allow a child to wear the seatbelt with the shoulder belt behindtheir back. A child can be seriouslyinjured by not wearing thelap-shoulder belt properly. In a

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

crash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt. Thechild could move too far forwardincreasing the chance of head andneck injury. The child might alsoslide under the lap belt. The beltforce would then be applied righton the abdomen. That could causeserious or fatal injuries. Theshoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest.



Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither the distancetravelled nor the age and size of thetraveller changes the need, foreveryone, to use safety restraints.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor, butit cannot do this if it is wrappedaround a child's neck. If theshoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child's neck, theonly way to loosen the belt is tocut it.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Never leave children unattended ina vehicle and never allow childrento play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young childrenride in vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ Warning

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant or child should besecured in an appropriate restraint.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front outboard seat.Secure a rear-facing child restraint

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

in a rear seat. It is also better tosecure a forward-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. If you mustsecure a forward-facing childrestraint in the front outboard seat,always move the front passengerseat as far back as it will go.

Child restraints are devices used torestrain, seat, or position children inthe vehicle and are sometimes calledchild seats or car seats.

There are three basic types of childrestraints:

. Forward-facing child restraints

. Rearward-facing child restraints

. Belt-positioning booster seats

The proper child restraint for yourchild depends on their size, weight,and age, and also on whether thechild restraint is compatible with thevehicle in which it will be used.

For each type of child restraint, thereare many different models available.When purchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used in amotor vehicle. The restraintmanufacturer's instructions that comewith the restraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, there aremany kinds of restraints available forchildren with special needs.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of neck and headinjury in a crash, infants andtoddlers should be secured in a

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

rear-facing child restraint until agetwo, or until they reach themaximum height and weight limitsof their child restraint.

{ Warning

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularseat-belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should. Instead,it may settle around the child'sabdomen. In a crash, the belt wouldapply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure.This alone could cause serious orfatal injuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children should alwaysbe secured in appropriate childrestraints.



Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing child restraint providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts to keepthe infant positioned in the restraint.

Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child restraintprovides restraint for the child's bodywith the harness.

Booster Seats

A belt-positioning booster seat is usedfor children who have outgrown theirforward-facing child restraint.Boosters are designed to improve thefit of the vehicle's seat belt systemuntil the child is large enough for thevehicle seat belts to fit properlywithout a booster seat. See the seatbelt fit test in Older Children 0 91.



Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orISOFIX system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be secured inthe vehicle. Child restraint systemsmust be secured in vehicle seats bylap belts or the lap belt portion of alap-shoulder belt, or by the ISOFIXsystem. See ISOFIX Child RestraintSystems 0 112 for more information.Children can be endangered in a crashif the child restraint is not properlysecured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructions thatcome with the restraint which may beon the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The childrestraint instructions are important,so if they are not available, obtain areplacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured childrestraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle - even when no child isin it.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if it is not properlysecured in the child restraint.Secure the child properly followingthe instructions that came withthat child restraint.

Where to Put the RestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in an appropriatechild restraint secured in a rearseating position.

Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured in arear seating position.

The vehicle is equipped with a frontcentre airbag in the inboard side ofthe driver seat. Even with a frontcentre airbag, a child restraint can beinstalled in any second row seatingposition.

{ Danger

When using a child restraint systemon the front passenger seat, theairbag systems for the frontpassenger seat must be deactivated;if not, the triggering of the airbagsposes a risk of fatal injury to thechild.

(Continued)



Danger (Continued)

This is especially the case ifrear-facing child restraint systemsare used on the frontpassenger seat.

EN: NEVER use a rearward-facingchild restraint on a seat protected byan ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it;DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to theCHILD can occur.

FR: NE JAMAIS utiliser un sièged'enfant orienté vers l'arrière sur unsiège protégé par un COUSSINGONFLABLE ACTIF placé devant lui,sous peine d'infliger des BLESSURESGRAVES, voire MORTELLES àl'ENFANT.

DE: Nach hinten gerichteteKindersitze NIEMALS auf einem Sitzverwenden, der durch einen davorbefindlichen AKTIVEN AIRBAGgeschützt ist, da dies den TOD oderSCHWERE VERLETZUNGEN DESKINDES zur Folge haben kann.

ES: NUNCA utilice un sistema deretención infantil orientado haciaatrás en un asiento protegido por unAIRBAG FRONTAL ACTIVO. Peligro deMUERTE o LESIONES GRAVES parael NIÑO.

SV: Använd ALDRIG en bakåtvändbarnstol på ett säte som skyddas meden framförvarande AKTIV AIRBAG.DÖDSFALL eller ALLVARLIGASKADOR kan drabba BARNET.

IT: Non usare mai un sistema disicurezza per bambini rivoltoall'indietro su un sedile protetto daAIRBAG ATTIVO di fronte ad esso:pericolo di MORTE o LESIONI GRAVIper il BAMBINO!

NL: Gebruik NOOIT een achterwaartsgericht kinderzitje op een stoel meteen ACTIEVE AIRBAG ervoor, omDODELIJK of ERNSTIG LETSEL vanhet KIND te voorkomen.

DA: Brug ALDRIG en bagudvendtautostol på et forsæde med AKTIVAIRBAG, BARNET kan komme iLIVSFARE eller komme ALVORLIGTTIL SKADE.

CS: NIKDY nepoužívejte dětskýzádržný systém instalovaný protisměru jízdy na sedadle, které jechráněno před sedadlem AKTIVNÍMAIRBAGEM. Mohlo by dojít kVÁŽNÉMU PORANĚNÍ nebo ÚMRTÍDÍTĚTE.

RU: ЗАПРЕЩАЕТСЯ устанавливатьдетское удерживающее устройстволицом назад на сиденьеавтомобиля, оборудованномфронтальной подушкойбезопасности, если ПОДУШКА НЕОТКЛЮЧЕНА! Это может привестик СМЕРТИ или СЕРЬЕЗНЫМТРАВМАМ РЕБЕНКА.

FI: ÄLÄ KOSKAAN sijoita taaksepäinsuunnattua lasten turvaistuintaistuimelle, jonka edessä onAKTIIVINEN TURVATYYNY, LAPSIVOI KUOLLA tai VAMMAUTUAVAKAVASTI.



NO: Bakovervendt barnesikringsutstyrmå ALDRI brukes på et sete medAKTIV KOLLISJONSPUTE foran, da detkan føre til at BARNET utsettes forLIVSFARE og fare for ALVORLIGESKADER.

PT: NUNCA use um sistema deretenção para crianças voltado paratrás num banco protegido com umAIRBAG ACTIVO na frente do mesmo,poderá ocorrer a PERDA DE VIDA ouFERIMENTOS GRAVES na CRIANÇA.

EL: ΠΟΤΕ μη χρησιμοποιείτε παιδικόκάθισμα ασφαλείας με φορά προς ταπίσω σε κάθισμα που προστατεύεταιαπό μετωπικό ΕΝΕΡΓΟ ΑΕΡΟΣΑΚΟ,διότι το παιδί μπορεί να υποστείΘΑΝΑΣΙΜΟ ή ΣΟΒΑΡΟΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟ.

PL: NIE WOLNO montować fotelikadziecięcego zwróconego tyłem dokierunku jazdy na fotelu, przedktórym znajduje się WŁĄCZONAPODUSZKA POWIETRZNA.Niezastosowanie się do tego zaleceniamoże być przyczyną ŚMIERCI lubPOWAŻNYCH OBRAŻEŃ u DZIECKA.

TR: Arkaya bakan bir çocuk emniyetsistemini KESİNLİKLE önünde birAKTİF HAVA YASTIĞI ile korunmaktaolan bir koltukta kullanmayınız.ÇOCUK ÖLEBİLİR veya AĞIR ŞEKİLDEYARALANABİLİR.

UK: НІКОЛИ не використовуйтесистему безпеки для дітей, щовстановлюється обличчям назад, насидінні з УВІМКНЕНОЮПОДУШКОЮ БЕЗПЕКИ, інакше цеможе призвести до СМЕРТІ чиСЕРЙОЗНОГО ТРАВМУВАННЯДИТИНИ.

HU: SOHA ne használjon hátrafelénéző biztonsági gyerekülést előlrőlAKTÍV LÉGZSÁKKAL védett ülésen,mert a GYERMEK HALÁLÁT vagyKOMOLY SÉRÜLÉSÉT okozhatja.

HR: NIKADA nemojte koristiti sustavzadržavanja za djecu okrenut premanatrag na sjedalu s AKTIVNIMZRAČNIM JASTUKOM ispred njega, tobi moglo dovesti do SMRTI iliOZBILJNJIH OZLJEDA za DIJETE.

SL: NIKOLI ne nameščajte otroškegavarnostnega sedeža, obrnjenega vnasprotni smeri vožnje, na sedež zAKTIVNO ČELNO ZRAČNO BLAZINO,saj pri tem obstaja nevarnost RESNIHali SMRTNIH POŠKODB za OTROKA.

SR: NIKADA ne koristiti bezbednosnisistem za decu u kome su decaokrenuta unazad na sedištu saAKTIVNIM VAZDUŠNIM JASTUKOMispred sedišta zato što DETE može daNASTRADA ili da se TEŠKO POVREDI.

MK: НИКОГАШ не користете детскоседиште свртено наназад наседиште заштитено со АКТИВНОВОЗДУШНО ПЕРНИЧЕ пред него,затоа што детето може ДА ЗАГИНЕили да биде ТЕШКО ПОВРЕДЕНО.

BG: НИКОГА не използвайте детскаседалка, гледаща назад, върхуседалка, която е защитена чрезАКТИВНА ВЪЗДУШНАВЪЗГЛАВНИЦА пред нея - може дасе стигне до СМЪРТ или СЕРИОЗНОНАРАНЯВАНЕ на ДЕТЕТО.



RO: Nu utilizaţi NICIODATĂ un scaunpentru copil îndreptat spre partea dinspate a maşinii pe un scaun protejatde un AIRBAG ACTIV în faţa sa; acestlucru poate duce la DECESUL sauVĂTĂMAREA GRAVĂ a COPILULUI.

SK: NIKDY nepoužívajte detskúsedačku otočenú vzad na sedadlechránenom AKTÍVNYM AIRBAGOM,pretože môže dôjsť k SMRTI aleboVÁŽNYM ZRANENIAM DIEŤAŤA.

LT: JOKIU BŪDU nemontuokite atgalatgręžtos vaiko tvirtinimo sistemossėdynėje, prieš kurią įrengta AKTYVIORO PAGALVĖ, nes VAIKAS GALIŽŪTI arba RIMTAI SUSIŽALOTI.

LV: NEKĀDĀ GADĪJUMĀneizmantojiet uz aizmuguri vērstubērnu sēdeklīti sēdvietā, kas tiekaizsargāta ar tās priekšā uzstādītuAKTĪVU DROŠĪBAS SPILVENU, jopretējā gadījumā BĒRNS var gūtSMAGAS TRAUMAS vai IET BOJĀ.

ET: ÄRGE kasutage tahapoolesuunatud lapseturvaistet istmel, milleees on AKTIIVSE TURVAPADJAGAkaitstud iste, sest see võib põhjustadaLAPSE SURMA või TÕSISEVIGASTUSE.

MT: QATT tuża trażżin għat-tfal lijħares lejn in-naħa ta' wara fuq sitprotett b'AIRBAG ATTIV quddiemu;dan jista' jikkawż l-MEWT jew ĠIEĦSERJI lit-TFAL.

GA: Ná húsáid srian sábháilteachtalinbh cúil RIAMH ar shuíochán abhfuil mála aeir ag feidhmiú os achomhair.Tá baol BÁIS nó GORTÚDONA don PHÁISTE ag baint leis.

When securing a child restraint withthe seat belts in a rear seat position,study the instructions that came withthe child restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seats varyconsiderably in size, and some may fitin certain seating positions betterthan others.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be able toaccess adjacent seat belts or ISOFIXanchors for additional passengers orchild restraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of theseat belt.

Wherever a child restraint is installed,be sure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint systemand secure the child restraint systemproperly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured childrestraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle - even when no child isin it.



ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability (Short Wheelbase Vehicles)

Use the following table to determine which seats are suitable for the ISOFIX child restraint systems in vehicles equippedwith a second row bench seat.

Mass Group Class Size Fixture

Vehicle ISOFIX Positions

FrontPassenger

Second Row Bench Seat Third RowBench Seat

Left Outboard Centre RightOutboard

All SeatingPositions

Carrycot F ISO/L1 X IUF X X X

G ISO/L2 X X X IUF X

0(up to 10 kg)

E ISO/R1 X IUF IUF IUF X

0+(up to 13 kg)


D ISO/R2 X IUF IUF IUF X

C ISO/R3 X IUF IUF IUF* X





FrontPassenger




I(9 to 18 kg)



B ISO/F2 X IUF IUF IUF X

B1 ISO/F2X X IUF IUF IUF X

A ISO/F3 X IUF IUF IUF X

IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in this mass group.

X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group and/or this size class.

*Track adjusted to 17 mm forward of the mid-track position.



ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability (Short Wheelbase Vehicles)

Use the following table to determine which seats are suitable for the ISOFIX child restraint systems in vehicles equippedwith second row bucket seats.



Front Passenger

Second Row Bucket Seats Third RowBench Seat

Left Outboard Right Outboard All SeatingPositions

Carrycot F ISO/L1 X X X X

G ISO/L2 X X X X

0(up to 10 kg)

E ISO/R1 X IUF IUF X

0+(up to 13 kg)


D ISO/R2 X IUF IUF X

C ISO/R3 X IUF* IUF* X





Front Passenger



I(9 to 18 kg)


C ISO/R3 X IUF IUF X

B ISO/F2 X IUF IUF X

B1 ISO/F2X X IUF IUF X

A ISO/F3 X IUF IUF X



*Track adjusted to 4 mm forward of the mid-track position.

Child Restraint System Size Classesand Fixtures

A - ISO/F3 : Full-heightforward-facing toddler child restraintsystem.

B - ISO/F2 : Reduced-heightforward-facing toddler child restraintsystem.

B1 - ISO/F2X : Reduced-heightforward-facing toddler child restraintsystem.

C - ISO/R3 : Full-size rear-facingtoddler child restraint system.

D - ISO/R2 : Reduced-size rear-facingtoddler child restraint system.

E - ISO/R1 : Rear-facing infant childrestraint system.

F - ISO/L1 : Left side-facing positioncarrycot.

G - ISO/L2 : Right side-facing positioncarrycot.



ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability (Long Wheelbase Vehicles)

Use the following table to determine which seats are suitable for the ISOFIX child restraint systems in vehicles equippedwith a second row bench seat.



FrontPassenger




Carrycot F ISO/L1 X IUF X X X

G ISO/L2 X X X IUF X

0(up to 10 kg)


0+(up to 13 kg)








FrontPassenger




I(9 to 18 kg)



B ISO/F2 X IUF IUF IUF X

B1 ISO/F2X X IUF IUF IUF X

A ISO/F3 X IUF IUF IUF X



*Tracks adjusted to 11 mm forward of the mid-track position.



ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability (Long Wheelbase Vehicles)

Use the following table to determine which seats are suitable for the ISOFIX child restraint systems in vehicles equippedwith second row bucket seats.



Front Passenger



Carrycot F ISO/L1 X X X X

G ISO/L2 X X X X

0(up to 10 kg)


0+(up to 13 kg)



C ISO/R3 X IUF* IUF* X





Front Passenger



I(9 to 18 kg)


C ISO/R3 X IUF IUF X

B ISO/F2 X IUF IUF X

B1 ISO/F2X X IUF IUF X

A ISO/F3 X IUF IUF X



*Tracks adjusted to 5 mm forward of the mid-track position.

Child Restraint System Size Classesand Fixtures

A - ISO/F3 : Full-heightforward-facing toddler child restraintsystem.

B - ISO/F2 : Reduced-heightforward-facing toddler child restraintsystem.

B1 - ISO/F2X : Reduced-heightforward-facing toddler child restraintsystem.

C - ISO/R3 : Full-size rear-facingtoddler child restraint system.

D - ISO/R2 : Reduced-size rear-facingtoddler child restraint system.

E - ISO/R1 : Rear-facing infant childrestraint system.

F - ISO/L1 : Left side-facing positioncarrycot.

G - ISO/L2 : Right side-facing positioncarrycot.



Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability (Short Wheelbase Vehicles)

Use the following table to determine which seats are suitable for the carriage of child restraint systems in vehicles equippedwith a second row bench seat.

Mass Group

Seating Position

FrontPassenger

Second Row Bench Seat Third Row Bench Seat

LeftOutboard

Centre RightOutboard

LeftOutboard


0(up to 10 kg)

X U U U X* X* X*

0+(up to 13 kg)

X U U U X* X* X*

I(9 to 18 kg)

X U U U X* X* X*

II(15 to 25 kg)

X U U U X* X* X*

III(22 to 36 kg)

X U U U X* X* X*

U: Suitable for “Universal” category child restraints approved for use in this mass group.

X: Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group.

*Fixture installed in third row occupant does not allow for second row seats to lock into position; therefore, outboardoccupants evaluated as not suitable.



Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability (Short Wheelbase Vehicles)

Use the following table to determine which seats are suitable for the carriage of child restraint systems in vehicles equippedwith second row bucket seats.

Mass Group

Seating Position

FrontPassenger

Second Row Bucket Seats Third Row Bench Seat

Left Outboard RightOutboard


0(up to 10 kg)

X U U X* U X*

0+(up to 13 kg)

X U U X* U X*

I(9 to 18 kg)

X U U X* U X*

II(15 to 25 kg)

X U U X* U X*

III(22 to 36 kg)

X U U X* U X*



*Fixture installed in third row occupant does not allow for second row seats to lock into position; therefore, outboardoccupants evaluated as not suitable.



Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability (Long Wheelbase Vehicles)

Use the following table to determine which seats are suitable for the carriage of child restraint systems in vehicles equippedwith a second row bench seat.

Mass Group

Seating Position

FrontPassenger

Second Row Bench Seat Third Row Bench Seat

LeftOutboard


LeftOutboard


0(up to 10 kg)

X U U U X* X* X*

0+(up to 13 kg)

X U U U X* X* X*

I(9 to 18 kg)

X U U U X* X* X*

II(15 to 25 kg)

X U U U X* X* X*

III(22 to 36 kg)

X U U U X* X* X*



*Fixture installed in third row outboard occupants does not allow for second row seats to lock into position; thereforeevaluated as not suitable.



Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability (Long Wheelbase Vehicles)

Use the following table to determine which seats are suitable for the carriage of child restraint systems in vehicles equippedwith second row bucket seats.

Mass Group

Seating Position

FrontPassenger

Second Row Bucket Seats Third Row Bench Seat

Left Outboard RightOutboard


0(up to 10 kg)

X U U X* X** X*

0+(up to 13 kg)

X U U X* X** X*

I(9 to 18 kg)

X U U X* X** X*

II(15 to 25 kg)

X U U X* X** X*

III(22 to 36 kg)

X U U X* X** X*



*Fixture installed in third row outboard occupants does not allow for second row seats to lock into position; thereforeevaluated as not suitable.

**Fixture installed in third row centre occupant does not allow for second row seats to lock into position, but shoulderbelt fitment is not acceptable; therefore evaluated as not suitable.



ISOFIX Child RestraintSystems

Second Row - 60/40

Second Row - Bucket

Fasten vehicle-approved ISOFIX childrestraint systems to the ISOFIXmounting brackets.

ISOFIX mounting brackets are markedby a j on the seatback.

Specific vehicle ISOFIX restraintsystem positions are marked in the”ISOFIX Child Restraint SystemsInstallation Suitability” table. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 96.

Top Tether Fastening Eyes

Second Row Seat - Bucket

The top tether anchors are at thebottom rear of the seat cushion foreach seating position in the secondrow. Be sure to use an anchor on thesame side of the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraint willbe placed.



Second Row Seat - 60/40

The top tether anchors are at thebottom rear of the seat cushion foreach seating position in the secondrow. Be sure to use an anchor on thesame side of the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraint willbe placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchor ifa national or local law requires thatthe top tether be attached, or if theinstructions that come with the childrestraint say that the top tether mustbe attached.

Top tether fastening eyes are markedwith aI for a child seat.

ISOFIX child restraint systems ofuniversal category positions aremarked in the “ISOFIX Child RestraintSystems Installation Suitability” tableby IUF. See Where to Put the Restraint0 96.

Securing Child Restraints(With the Seat Belt in theRear Seat)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it is compatiblewith this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the ISOFIXsystem, see ISOFIX Child RestraintSystems 0 112 for how and where toinstall the child restraint usingISOFIX. If a child restraint is securedin the vehicle using a safety belt andit uses a top tether, see ISOFIX ChildRestraint Systems 0 112 for top tetheranchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchor ifa national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored, or if the

instructions that come with the childrestraint say that the top strap mustbe anchored.

If the child restraint or vehicle seatposition does not have the ISOFIXsystem, you will be using the seat beltto secure the child restraint. Be sureto follow the instructions that camewith the child restraint.

If more than one child restraint needsto be installed in the rear seat, be sureto read Where to Put the Restraint 0 96.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.



2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

If the latch plate will not go fullyinto the buckle, check to see ifthe correct buckle is being used.

Position the release button onthe buckle, away from the childrestraint system, so that the seatbelt could be quickly unfastenedif necessary.

4. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of thebelt and feed the shoulder beltback into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful to useyour knee to push down on thechild restraint as you tightenthe belt.

5. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructions

regarding the use of the toptether. Refer to the instructionsthat came with the childrestraint and see ISOFIX ChildRestraint Systems 0 112.

6. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Push andpull the child restraint indifferent directions to be sure itis secure.

To remove the child restraint,unfasten the vehicle safety belt and letit return to the stowed position. If thetop tether is attached to a top tetheranchor, disconnect it.

Securing Child Restraints(With the Seat Belt in theFront Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat isa safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 96.



In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions. SeePassenger Sensing System 0 85 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicator 0 137for more information, includingimportant safety information.

{ Warning

NEVER use a rearward-facing childrestraint on a seat protected by anACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it;DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to theCHILD can occur.

{ Danger

When using a child restraint systemon the front passenger seat, theairbag systems for the frontpassenger seat must be deactivated;if not, the triggering of the airbagsposes a risk of fatal injury to thechild.

(Continued)

Danger (Continued)

This is especially the case ifrear-facing child restraint systemsare used on the frontpassenger seat.

If the child restraint uses a top tether,see ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems0 112 for top tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchor ifa national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored, or if theinstructions that come with the childrestraint say that the top strap mustbe anchored.

When using the lap-shoulder belt tosecure the child restraint in thisposition, follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint and thefollowing instructions:

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.Move the seat upward or thebackrest to an upright position,if needed, to get a tightinstallation of the child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag, the off indicator on thepassenger airbag status indicatorshould light and stay lit whenyou start the vehicle. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator0 137.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.



Tilt the latch plate to adjust thebelt, if needed.

4. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Position the release button onthe buckle, away from the childrestraint system, so that the seatbelt could be quickly unfastenedif necessary.

5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of thebelt, and feed the shoulder beltback into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful to useyour knee to push down on thechild restraint as you tightenthe belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.



7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Push andpull the child restraint indifferent directions to be sure itis secure.

If the airbag is off, the off indicator inthe passenger airbag status indicatorwill come on and stay on when thevehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator Is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem 0 85.

To remove the child restraint,unfasten the vehicle safety belt and letit return to the stowed position.


118 STORAGE

Storage

Storage CompartmentsStorage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . 118Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . . . . 118Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Centre Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . 120

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Roof Rack SystemRoof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Storage Compartments

{ Warning

Do not store heavy or sharp objectsin storage compartments. In acrash, these objects may cause thecover to open and could result ininjury.

Instrument Panel Storage

Touch the bottom of the climatecontrol system panel until the doorautomatically starts to open. Thestorage area may contain a USB port.See the infotainment manual.

Keep the storage area door closedwhile driving.

Touch the bottom of the climatecontrol system again until the doorautomatically starts to close.

Glove Box

To open, press the button. Close theglove box manually.


STORAGE 119

Cupholders

To access the cupholders, press thecover and release.

There is storage in front of thecupholders. Push forward on thehandle to open.

Sunglasses Storage

If equipped, sunglasses storage is onthe overhead console. Press the fixedbutton on the cover and release toaccess. There may be a child-viewmirror located within the sunglassesbin. Release the bin and then push uphalfway to secure in position.

Armrest StorageFor vehicles with a rear seat armrest,pull the loop at the top of the armrestdown to access the cupholders.

Rear Storage

There is storage in the floor of therear cargo area. Lift the handle toaccess. There is a removable divider tohelp organize.


120 STORAGE

Centre Console Storage

Pull the handle and lift to access.There are auxiliary jacks, USB ports,an accessory power socket, a totecompartment and a device holderinside.

On the rear of the console there areauxiliary jacks, a power socket and astorage area.

See Power Sockets 0 127 and theinfotainment manual.

If equipped, press to turn on thecooled compartment inside the centreconsole storage.

The cooled compartment will helpkeep cold liquids cold, but is notintended to chill warm liquids. Do notuse for items that need to berefrigerated.

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo Tie-Downs

There are four cargo tie-downs in therear cargo area. These can be used tostrap cargo down and keep it frommoving inside the vehicle.

Convenience NetUse the convenience net, located inthe rear, to store small loads as farforward as possible. The net shouldnot be used to store heavy loads.


STORAGE 121

Roof Rack System

{ Warning

If something is carried on top of thevehicle that is longer or wider thanthe roof rack - like panelling,plywood, or a mattress - the windcan catch it while the vehicle isbeing driven. The item being carriedcould be violently torn off, and thiscould cause a collision and damagethe vehicle. Never carry somethinglonger or wider than the roof rackon top of the vehicle unless using aGM certified accessory carrier.

If equipped, the roof rack can be usedto load items. For roof racks that donot have crossrails included, GMCertified crossrails can be purchasedas an accessory. See your dealer foradditional information.

Caution

Loading cargo on the roof rack thatweighs more than 100 kg (220 lb)or hangs over the rear or sides ofthe vehicle may damage the vehicle.Load cargo so that it rests evenlybetween the crossrails, making sureto fasten cargo securely.

To prevent damage or loss of cargowhen driving, check to make surecrossrails and cargo are securelyfastened. Loading cargo on the roofrack will make the vehicle's centre ofgravity higher. Avoid high speeds,sudden starts, sharp turns, suddenbraking, or abrupt manoeuvres,otherwise loss of control may result.If driving for a long distance, on roughroads, or at high speeds, occasionallystop the vehicle to make sure thecargo remains in its place.

Do not exceed the maximum vehiclecapacity when loading the vehicle. Formore information on vehicle capacityand loading, see Vehicle Load Limits0 202.

A Centre High-Mounted Brake lamp(CHMSL) is located above the rearwindow glass. Make sure items loadedon the roof of the vehicle do not blockor damage the CHMSL.


122 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . . . 123Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . 123Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . 123Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Windscreen Wiper/Washer . . . . . . 124Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . 125Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Power Sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Wireless Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Mileometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Rev Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . 136Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . 137Malfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light) . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Brake System Warning Light . . . . 139Electric Parking Brake Light . . . . . 140Service Electric Parking BrakeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Gear Shifting Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Sport Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Winter Driving Mode Light . . . . . . 142Lane Keep Assist (LKA) Light . . . 142Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . . . 142Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142StabiliTrak OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Tyre Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . 144Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 145Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCentre (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . . . . . 149

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Brake System Messages . . . . . . . . . . 152Cruise Control Messages . . . . . . . . . 153Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Engine Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . 155Fuel System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 155Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . . . . 155Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Airbag System Messages . . . . . . . . . 158Safety Belt Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Service Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . 159Steering System Messages . . . . . . . 159Starting the Vehicle Messages . . . 159


INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 123

Tyre Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Transmission Messages . . . . . . . . . . 160Vehicle Reminder Messages . . . . . 161Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . 161Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . . . . . 161Window Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Vehicle PersonalisationVehicle Personalisation . . . . . . . . . . 162

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . . . . . . 169Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Controls

Steering Wheel Adjustment

To adjust the power tilt andtelescoping steering wheel:

Press the control to move the steeringwheel up and down or forward andrearward.

Do not adjust the steering wheel whiledriving.

Steering Wheel ControlsThe infotainment system can beoperated by using the steering wheelcontrols. See "Steering WheelControls" in the infotainment manual.

Heated Steering Wheel

( : Press to turn the heated steeringwheel on or off. An indicator next tothe button is lit when the feature isturned on.

The steering wheel takes aboutthree minutes to start heating.

Horn

To sound the horn, pressa on thesteering wheel.



Windscreen Wiper/Washer

The windscreen wiper control is onthe indicator lever.

The windscreen wipers are controlledby turning the band withz FRONTon it.

1 : Fast wipes.

w : Slow wipes.

3 INT : If Rainsense is turned off,turn thez FRONT band up formore frequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes. If Rainsense is turnedon, see Rainsense™ later in thissection.

OFF : Turns the windscreenwipers off.

8 : For a single wipe, turn to8,then release. For several wipes, holdthe band on8 longer.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If frozen tothe windscreen, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged wiper bladesshould be replaced. See Wiper BladeReplacement 0 290.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor. An internal circuitbreaker to the motor will stop themotor until it cools down.

Wiper Parking

If the ignition is put in OFF while thewipers are onw,1, or3 INT,they will immediately stop.

Ifz FRONT is then moved to OFFbefore the driver door is opened orwithin 10 minutes, the wipers willrestart and move to the base of thewindscreen.

If the ignition is put in OFF while thewipers are performing wipes due towindscreen washing or Rainsense, thewipers continue to run until theyreach the base of the windscreen.

Rainsense™

With Rainsense, a sensor near the topcentre of the windscreen detects theamount of water on the windscreenand controls the frequency of thewindscreen wiper.

Keep this area of the windscreen clearof debris to allow for best systemperformance.

3 INT : Turn thez FRONT bandon the wiper lever to adjust thesensitivity when Rainsense isturned on.

. Turn the band up for moresensitivity to moisture.

. Turn the band down to lower INTsetting for less sensitivity tomoisture.

Move the band out of the3 INTposition to deactivate Rainsense.



z AUTO : Press to turn Rainsenseon or off. When turned onandz FRONT is in one of theRainsense wipe sensitivity positionsthe wipers can be adjusted for more orless sensitivity to moisture. Whenturned off, the wipers operate astimed intermittent wipers and can beadjusted for more or less frequentwipes.

Ifz AUTO is turned on when theignition is turned on, or if the ignitionis in ON/RUN and thez FRONTband is in one of the sensitivitysettings whenz AUTO is turned onor off, a message may displayindicating if Rainsense was turned onor off.

If the ignition is in ON/RUNandz FRONT is not in one of the

sensitivity settings whenz AUTO is

turned on, a message may displayindicating that the wiper band mustbe in one of the sensitivity settings forRainsense to operate.

Wiper Arm Assembly Protection

When using an automatic car wash,move the windscreen wiper lever toOFF. This disables the automaticRainsense windscreen wipers.

With Rainsense, if the transmission isin N (Neutral) and the vehicle speed isvery slow, the wipers willautomatically stop at the base of thewindscreen.

The wiper operations return to normalwhen the transmission is no longer inN (Neutral) or the vehicle speed hasincreased.

Windscreen Washer

{ Warning

In freezing weather, do not use thewasher until the windscreen iswarmed. Otherwise the washer fluidcan form ice on the windscreen,blocking your vision.

L m : Push the paddle marked withthe windscreen washer symbol at thetop of the indicator lever to spraywasher fluid and activate the wipers.The wipers will continue until thepaddle is released or the maximumwash time is reached. When thepaddle is released, additional wipesmay occur depending on how long thewindscreen washer had beenactivated. See Washer Fluid 0 283 forinformation on filling the windscreenwasher fluid reservoir.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

The rear wiper control is on theindicator lever.

To turn the rear wiper on, slide thestalk to a wiper position.

OFF : Turns the wiper off.



INT : Turns on the rear wiper with adelay between wipes.

ON : Turns on the rear wiper.

= REAR : Press this button on theend of the stalk to spray washer fluidon the rear window. The wipers willclear the rear window and either stopor return to your preset speed. Formore washer cycles, press and holdthe button.

The rear window wiper/washer willnot operate if the tailgate or liftglassis open or ajar. If the tailgate orliftglass is opened while the rear wiperis on, the wiper returns to the parkedposition and stops.

Rear Camera Mirror Washer :If equipped, press= REAR on the endof the lever to spray washer fluid onthe rear camera mirror. See RearCamera Mirror 0 48.

Rear Wiper Arm AssemblyProtection

When using an automatic car wash,move the rear wiper control to OFF todisable the rear wiper. In somevehicles, if the transmission is inN (Neutral) and the vehicle speed isvery slow, the rear wiper willautomatically park under the rearspoiler.

The wiper operations return to normalwhen the transmission is no longer inN (Neutral) or the vehicle speed hasincreased.

Reverse Gear Wipes

If the rear wiper control is off, the rearwiper will automatically operatecontinuously when the gear lever is inR (Reverse), and the front windscreenwiper is performing low or high speedwipes. If the rear wiper control is off,the gear lever is in R (Reverse), andthe front windscreen wiper isperforming interval wipes, then therear wiper automatically performsinterval wipes.

This feature can be turned on or off.See Vehicle Personalisation 0 162.

The windscreen washer reservoir isused for the windscreen and the rearwindow. Check the fluid level in thereservoir if either washer is notworking. See Washer Fluid 0 283.

ClockThe infotainment system controls areused to access the time and datesettings through the menu system.See "Home Page" in the infotainmentmanual for information about how touse the menu system.

Setting the Clock

Time

To set the time:

1. From the Home Page, touchSETTINGS, then touch Timeand Date.

2. Touch Set Time, then touch + or− to increase or decrease hoursor minutes, and change AMor PM.

3. Touch 12-24 Hr for a 12 or24 hour clock.



4. Touch [ Back to go back to theprevious menu.

Date

To set the date:


2. Touch Set Date, then touch + or− to increase or decrease month,day, or year.


Auto Set

When on, the time and date willautomatically update.

To set auto set:


2. Touch Set Time or Set Date.

3. Touch Auto Set, then selectOn-Cell Network or Off-Manualto manually set the timeand date.


If auto set is on, the time displayed onthe clock may not update immediatelywhen driving into a new time zone.

In some regions, auto set may requirean active OnStar subscription,if available.

Clock Display

When on, the digital clock will displayon the infotainment screen.

To set the clock display:


2. Touch Clock Display, then selectOff or On.


Power Sockets

Power Socket 12 Volt DirectCurrent

Accessory power outlets can be usedto plug in electrical equipment, suchas a cell phone or MP3 player.

The vehicle has five accessory powersockets:

. One near the cupholders on thecentre console.

. One inside the centre console.

. One on the rear of the centreconsole.

. One in the third row seat on thedriver side.

. One in the rear cargo area on thepassenger side.

Lift the cover to access and replacewhen not in use.

The accessory power sockets arepowered as follows:

. The power socket near thecupholders on the centre consoleis powered in Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) mode. This socket



can be configured to operate usingRAP or battery power. If the powersocket is used while in the batterypower mode, this could causeinterference between the RKEtransmitter and the vehicle, andthe vehicle may not start. SeeIgnition Positions 0 207.

. The power sockets inside thecentre console and on the rear ofthe centre console are poweredwhen the ignition is in ON/RUN/START or ACC/ACCESSORY,or until the driver door is openedwithin 10 minutes of turning offthe vehicle. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 210.

. The power sockets in the third rowseat and in the rear cargo area arepowered at all times.

{ Warning

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Do not leave electricalequipment plugged in when thevehicle is not in use because thevehicle could catch fire and causeinjury or death.

Caution

Leaving electrical equipmentplugged in for an extended periodof time while the vehicle is off willdrain the battery. Always unplugelectrical equipment when not inuse and do not plug in equipmentthat exceeds the maximum 15 amprating.

Certain power accessory plugs maynot be compatible with the accessorypower socket and could overloadvehicle or adapter fuses. If a problemis experienced, see your dealer.

When adding electrical equipment,ensure that you follow the properinstallation instructions included withthe equipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment 0 267.

Caution

Hanging heavy equipment from thepower outlet can cause damage notcovered by the vehicle warranty.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

The power outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, such asmobile phone charge cords.

Power Socket 220V/230V VoltAlternating Current

For vehicles with 220V/230V socket,use only accessories rated for220V/230V.

This power socket can be used to plugin electrical equipment that uses amaximum limit of 150 watts.

The 220V/230V power socket is on therear of the centre console.

An indicator light on the outlet turnson to show it is in use. The lightcomes on when the ignition is in ON/RUN/START, equipment requiring lessthan 150 watts is plugged into thesocket, and no system fault isdetected.

The indicator light does not come onwhen the ignition is in LOCK/OFF or ifthe equipment is not fully seated intothe outlet.



If equipment is connected using morethan 150 watts or a system fault isdetected, a protection circuit shuts offthe power supply and the indicatorlight turns off. To reset the circuit,unplug the item and plug it back in orturn the ignition off and then back toON/RUN. The power restarts whenequipment using 150 watts or less isplugged into the socket and a systemfault is not detected.

The power socket is not designed forthe following, and may not workproperly if they are plugged in:

. Equipment with high initial peakwattage, such ascompressor-driven refrigeratorsand electric power tools.

. Other equipment requiring anextremely stable power supply,such as microcomputer-controlledelectric blankets and touch sensorlamps.

. Medical equipment.

Wireless ChargingThe vehicle may have wirelesscharging on top of the centre console.See Centre Console Storage 0 120. Thesystem wirelessly charges one PMA orQi compatible mobile device. To checkfor phone or other devicecompatibility, see your retailer fordetails.

{ Warning

Wireless charging can affect theoperation of an implantedpacemaker or other medical devices.If you have one, it is recommendedto consult with your doctor beforeusing the wireless charging system.

The vehicle must be on, in ACC/ACCESSORY, or Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) must be active. Thewireless charging feature may notcorrectly indicate charging when thevehicle is in RAP. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) 0 210.

The operating temperature is −20 °C(−4 °F) to 60 °C (140 °F) for thecharging system and 0 °C (32 °F) to35 °C (95 °F) for the phone.

{ Warning

Remove all objects from thecharging pad before charging yourmobile device. Objects, such ascoins, keys, rings, paper clips,or cards, between the phone andcharging pad will become very hot.On the rare occasion that thecharging system does not detect anobject, and the object gets wedgedbetween the phone and charger,remove the phone and allow theobject to cool before removing itfrom the charging pad, to preventburns.



To charge a mobile device:

1. Remove all objects from thecharging pad. The system maynot charge if there are anyobjects between the phone andcharging pad.

2. Place the mobile device face upon the@ symbol on thecharging pad.

3. The} will display on the V onthe infotainment screen. Thisindicates that the mobile deviceis properly positioned andcharging. If a phone is placedon the charging pad and} doesnot display, remove the phone

from the pad, turn 180 degreesand wait three seconds beforeplacing/aligning the phone onthe pad again.

Cigarette LighterIf equipped with a cigarette lighter, itis located in the centre console nearthe cupholders. Press on the accessdoor to open it and use the lighter.

To use the cigarette lighter, push it inall the way, and let go. When it isready, it will pop back out by itself.

Caution

Holding a cigarette lighter in whileit is heating does not let the lighterback away from the heatingelement when it is hot. Damagefrom overheating can occur to thelighter or heating element, or a fusecould be blown. Do not hold acigarette lighter in while it isheating.

AshtraysIf equipped, the ashtray is in thecentre console cupholder.

Caution

If papers, pins, or other flammableitems are put in the ashtray, hotcigarettes or other smokingmaterials could ignite them andpossibly damage the vehicle. Neverput flammable items in the ashtray.

To remove the ashtray, pull it fromthe cupholder. Push it back down tobe sure it is secure.



Warning Lights, Gauges,and IndicatorsWarning lights and gauges can signalthat something is wrong before itbecomes serious enough to cause anexpensive repair or replacement.Paying attention to the warning lightsand gauges could prevent injury.

Some warning lights come on brieflywhen the engine is started to indicatethey are working. When one of thewarning lights comes on and stays onwhile driving, or when one of thegauges shows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Waiting to do repairs can becostly and even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

Balanced Configuration



Reconfigurable InstrumentCluster

The cluster display layout can bechanged.


The Balanced configuration has threeinteractive display zones: one in thecentre of each of the gauges.

Enhanced Configuration

The Enhanced configuration has threeinteractive display zones.

Use the five-way control on the rightside of the steering wheel to movebetween the different display zonesand scroll through the differentdisplays.

To change the cluster configuration:

1. Find the Options page in one ofthe interactive display zones onthe cluster.

2. Press SEL to enter theOptions menu.

3. Scroll down to highlight DisplayLayout. Then press SEL toselect it.

4. Each layout in the menu isrepresented by a small previewimage of the display layout.Scroll up or down and highlightthe selection. Press SEL to selectthe desired cluster configuration.

5. Exit the Display Layout menu bypressing S.

Cluster Application Displays

The cluster can display informationregarding Navigation, Audio, andPhone.

Navigation

If there is no active route, a compasswill be displayed. If there is an activeroute, press SEL to end route guidanceor turn the voice prompts on or off.

Audio

While the Audio application page isdisplayed, press SEL to enter theAudio menu. In the Audio menu,search for music, select fromfavourites, or change the audio source.

Phone

While the Phone application page isdisplayed, press SEL to enter thePhone menu. In the Phone menu,if there is no active phone call, viewrecent calls, select from favourites,or scroll through contacts. If there isan active call, mute the phone orswitch to handset operation.

Cluster Options Menu

To enter the cluster Options menu:

1. Use the five-way control on theright side of the steering wheelto find the Options page in oneof the interactive display zoneson the cluster.



2. Press SEL on the centre of thefive-way control to enter theOptions menu.

Units : Press SEL while Units ishighlighted to enter the Unit menu.Choose US or metric units by pressingSEL while the desired item ishighlighted. A checkmark will bedisplayed next to the selected item.

Info Pages : Press SEL while InfoPages is highlighted to select theitems to be displayed in the DIC infodisplays. See Driver Information Centre(DIC) 0 146.

Head-up Display (HUD) Rotation :This feature allows for adjusting theangle of the HUD image. Press SEL onthe steering wheel controls whileHead-up Display Rotation ishighlighted to enter Adjust Mode.Pressy orz to adjust the angle of

the HUD display. Press S or T tohighlight OK, then press SEL to savethe setting. Cancel can also beselected to cancel the setting. Thevehicle must be in P (Park).

Fav Button Options : Press SEL whileFav Button Options is highlighted toselect between FAV Primary and SEEKPrimary. This selection allows forconfiguration of the C andBsteering wheel controls. When FAVPrimary is selected, pressing C andB will go to the next or previousfavourite and pressing and holding CandB will seek. When SEEK Primary

is selected, pressing C andB will

seek and pressing and holding C andB will go to the next or previousfavourite.

Display Layout : Press SEL whileDisplay Layout is highlighted tochange the configuration of thecluster. See “ReconfigurableInstrument Cluster” earlier in thissection.

Open Source Software : Press SELwhile Open Source Software ishighlighted to display open sourcesoftware information.

SpeedometerThe speedometer shows the vehicle'sspeed in either kilometres per hour(km/h) or miles per hour (mph).

MileometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometres or miles.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven since the tripodometer was last reset.

The trip odometer is accessed andreset through the Driver InformationCentre (DIC). See Driver InformationCentre (DIC) 0 146.

Rev CounterThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions per minute (rpm).



Fuel Gauge


When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge indicates about how much fuelis left in the tank.

There is an arrow near the fuel gaugepointing to the side of the vehicle thefuel door is on.

When the indicator nears empty, thelow fuel light comes on. There still isa little fuel left, but the vehicle shouldbe refuelled soon.

Here are four things that some ownersask about. None of these show aproblem with the fuel gauge:

. At the service station, the fuelpump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuel tofill up than the gauge indicated.For example, the gauge may haveindicated the tank was half full,but it actually took a little more orless than half the tank's capacityto fill the tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge takes a few seconds tostabilise after the ignition isturned on and goes back to emptywhen the ignition is turned off.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge


This gauge measures the temperatureof the vehicle's engine.

While driving under normal operatingconditions, if the needle moves intothe red area, the engine is too hot.Pull off the road, stop the vehicle, andturn off the engine as soon aspossible.



Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety belt reminderlight on the instrument cluster.

When the vehicle is started, this lightflashes and a chime may come on toremind the driver to fasten theirsafety belt. Then the light stays onsolid until the belt is buckled. Thiscycle may continue several times ifthe driver remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle is moving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.

Passenger Seat Belt ReminderLight

There is a passenger safety beltreminder light near the passengerairbag status indicator. See PassengerSensing System 0 85.

When the vehicle is started, this lightflashes and a chime may come on toremind passengers to fasten theirsafety belt. Then the light stays onsolid until the belt is buckled. Thiscycle continues several times if thepassenger remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle is moving.

If the passenger safety belt is fastened,neither the chime nor the lightcomes on.

The front passenger safety beltreminder light and chime may turn onif an object is put on the seat such asa briefcase, handbag, grocery bag,laptop, or other electronic device. To

turn off the reminder light and/orchime, remove the object from theseat or buckle the safety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), the passengersensing system, the pretensioners, theairbag modules, the wiring, and thecrash sensing and diagnostic module.For more information on the airbagsystem, see Air-Bag System 0 79.

The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when the vehicle isstarted. If the light does not come onthen, have it fixed immediately.



{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags in thevehicle might not inflate in a crash,or they could even inflate without acrash. To help avoid injury, havethe vehicle serviced right away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, a Driver Information Centre(DIC) message may also come on. SeeAirbag System Messages 0 158.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem. See Passenger Sensing System0 85 for important safety information.The passenger airbag status indicatoris in the overhead console.

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicator willlight the symbol for on and off forseveral seconds as a system check.Then, after several more seconds, thestatus indicator will light either the onor off symbol to let you know thestatus of the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag.

If the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, itmeans that the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag is allowed toinflate.

If the off symbol is lit on the airbagstatus indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system has turnedoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be a

problem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. See yourretailer for service.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrong withthe airbag system. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 136 formore information, includingimportant safety information.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turned on,but the engine is not running, as a



check to show the light is working.It should go out when the engine isstarted.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there may be a problemwith the electrical charging system.Have it checked by your dealer.Driving while this light is on coulddrain the battery.

When this light comes on, or isflashing, the Driver InformationCentre (DIC) also displays a message.

See Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages 0 152.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radio andair conditioner.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light)This light is part of the vehicle'semission control on-board diagnosticsystem. If this light is on while theengine is running, a malfunction hasbeen detected and the vehicle mayrequire service. The light should come

on to show that it is working whenthe ignition is in Service Mode. SeeIgnition Positions 0 207.

Malfunctions are often indicated bythe system before any problem isnoticeable. Being aware of the lightand seeking service promptly when itcomes on may prevent damage.

Caution

If the vehicle is driven continuallywith this light on, the emissioncontrol system may not work aswell, the fuel economy may belower, and the vehicle may not runsmoothly. This could lead to costlyrepairs that might not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Caution

Modifications to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake,or fuel system, or the use ofreplacement tyres that do not meetthe original tyre specifications, cancause this light to come on. Thiscould lead to costly repairs notcovered by the vehicle warranty.This could also affect the vehicle'sability to pass an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications 0 269.

If the light is flashing : Amalfunction has been detected thatcould damage the emission controlsystem and increase vehicleemissions. Diagnosis and service maybe required.

To help prevent damage, reducevehicle speed and avoid hardaccelerations and uphill gradients.If towing a trailer, reduce the amountof cargo being hauled as soon aspossible.



If the light continues to flash, find asafe place to park. Turn the vehicle offand wait at least 10 seconds beforerestarting the engine. If the light isstill flashing, follow the previousguidelines and see your retailer forservice as soon as possible.

If the light is on continuously : Amalfunction has been detected.Diagnosis and service may berequired.

Check the following:

. If fuel has been added to thevehicle using the capless fuelfunnel adapter, make sure that ithas been removed. See “Filling theTank with a Portable Gas Can”under Filling the Tank 0 254. Thediagnostic system can detect if theadapter has been left installed inthe vehicle, allowing fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with theadapter removed may turn off thelight.

. Poor fuel quality can causeinefficient engine operation andpoor driveability, which may goaway once the engine is warmed

up. If this occurs, change the fuelbrand. It may require at least onefull tank of the proper fuel to turnthe light off. See Fuel 0 253.

If the light remains on, see yourretailer.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

If the vehicle requires an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test, the testequipment will likely connect to thevehicle's Data Link Connector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steering wheel.Connecting devices that are not usedto perform an Emissions Inspection/Maintenance test or to service thevehicle may affect vehicle operation.See Add-On Electrical Equipment 0 267.See your dealer if assistance is needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:

. The light is on when the engine isrunning.

. The light does not come on whenthe ignition is in Service Mode.

. Critical emission control systemshave not been completelydiagnosed. If this happens, thevehicle would not be ready forinspection and might requireseveral days of routine drivingbefore the system is ready forinspection. This can happen if the12-volt battery has recently beenreplaced or run down, or if thevehicle has been recently serviced.

See your retailer if the vehicle will notpass or cannot be made ready forthe test.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consists oftwo hydraulic circuits. If one circuit isnot working, the remaining circuit can



still work to stop the vehicle. Fornormal braking performance, bothcircuits need to be working.

If the warning light comes on, there isa brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected immediately.

This light should come on brieflywhen the engine is started. If it doesnot come on then, have it fixed so itwill be ready to warn you if there is aproblem.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light also comes onwhen the parking brake is applied.The light stays on if the handbrakedoes not fully release. If it stays onafter the handbrake is fully released, itmeans the vehicle has a brakeproblem.

If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop carefully.The pedal might be harder to push,

or the pedal can go closer to the floor.It may take longer to stop. If the lightis still on, have the vehicle towed forservice. See Towing the Vehicle 0 330.

{ Warning

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on. Drivingwith the brake system warning lighton can lead to a crash. If the light isstill on after the vehicle has beenpulled off the road and carefullystopped, have the vehicle towed forservice.

Electric Parking BrakeLight

The parking brake status light comeson when the parking brake is applied.If the light continues flashing after

the parking brake is released, or whiledriving, there is a problem with theelectric parking brake system oranother system. A message may alsodisplay in the Driver InformationCentre (DIC). See Brake SystemMessages 0 152.

If the light does not come on,or remains flashing, see your dealer.

Service Electric ParkingBrake Light

If this light comes on and stays on,there is a problem with a system onthe vehicle that is causing the parkingbrake system to work at a reducedlevel. The vehicle can still be driven,but should be taken to a dealer assoon as possible. See Electric ParkingBrake 0 224. If a message displays inthe Driver Information Centre (DIC),see Brake System Messages 0 152.



Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

If the light comes on while driving,stop as soon as it is safely possibleand turn off the vehicle. Then startthe engine again to reset the system.If the ABS light stays on, or comes onagain while driving, the vehicle needsservice. A chime may also sound whenthe light comes on steady.

If the ABS light is the only light on,the vehicle has regular brakes, but theanti-lock brakes are not functioning.

If both the ABS and the brake systemwarning light are on, the vehicle'santi-lock brakes are not functioning

and there is a problem with theregular brakes. See your retailer forservice.

See Brake System Warning Light 0 139and Brake System Messages 0 152.

Gear Shifting Light

This light comes on when a gear shiftis recommended for best fueleconomy. When the arrow is pointedup, an upshift is recommended. Whenthe arrow is pointed down, adownshift is recommended. Thenumber displayed with the arrowindicates the recommended gear.

Sport Mode Light

This light comes on when Sport modeis selected. See Magnetic Ride Control0 229.

Tow/Haul Mode Light

For vehicles with the Tow/Haul Modefeature, this light comes on when theTow/Haul Mode has been activated.

See Tow/Haul Mode 0 218.



Winter Driving Mode Light

This light comes on when Snow/Icemode is selected. See Magnetic RideControl 0 229.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA)Light

This light is green if LKA is availableto assist.

LKA may assist by gently turning thesteering wheel if the vehicleapproaches a detected lane markingwithout using the indicator in thatdirection. The LKA light will turnamber.

This light is amber and flashes as aLane Departure Warning (LDW) alert,to indicate that the lane marking hasbeen crossed.

See Lane Keep Assist (LKA) 0 251.

Vehicle Ahead Indicator

If equipped, this indicator will displaygreen when a vehicle is detectedahead and amber when you arefollowing a vehicle ahead much tooclosely.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 245.

Traction Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thenturns off.

The traction off light comes on whenthe Traction Control System (TCS) hasbeen turned off by pressing andreleasing the TCS/StabiliTrak button.

This light and the StabiliTrak OFFlight come on when StabiliTrak isturned off.

If the TCS is off, wheel spin is notlimited. Adjust driving accordingly.




StabiliTrak OFF Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak system is turned off.If StabiliTrak is off, the TractionControl System (TCS) is also off.

If StabiliTrak and TCS are off, thesystem does not assist in controllingthe vehicle. Turn on the TCS and theStabiliTrak systems, and the warninglight turns off.


Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally, theindicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS and potentially the StabiliTraksystem have been disabled. A DriverInformation Centre (DIC) messagemay display. Check the DIC messagesto determine which feature(s) is nolonger functioning and whether thevehicle requires service. See RideControl System Messages 0 158.

If the light is on and flashing, the TCSand/or the StabiliTrak system isactively working.


Engine CoolantTemperature Warning Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the vehicle.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If the systemis working normally the indicator lightgoes off.

Caution

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light indicates that thevehicle has overheated. Driving withthis light on can damage the engineand it may not be covered by thevehicle warranty. See EngineOverheating 0 282.



The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on when theengine has overheated.

If this happens, pull over and turn offthe engine as soon as possible. SeeEngine Overheating 0 282.

Tyre Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tyre PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides information abouttyre pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more of thetyres are significantly underinflated.

A Driver Information Centre (DIC) tyrepressure message may also display.See Tyre Messages 0 159. Stop as soonas possible, and inflate the tyres to

the pressure value shown on the Tyreand Loading Information label. SeeTyre Pressure 0 306.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the light willcome on at every ignition cycle. SeeTyre Pressure Monitor Operation 0 308.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engine oillow can also damage the engine.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Check theoil level as soon as possible. Add oilif required, but if the oil level iswithin the operating range and theoil pressure is still low, have the

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

vehicle serviced. Always follow themaintenance schedule for changingengine oil.

This light should come on briefly asthe engine is started. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle serviced byyour dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehicle couldbe low on oil and might have someother system problem. See your dealer.



Low Fuel Warning Light

This light is near the fuel gauge andcomes on briefly when the ignition isturned on as a check to show it isworking.

It also comes on when the fuel tank islow on fuel. The light turns off whenfuel is added. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced.

Security Light

The security light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on, have the vehicle

serviced by your dealer. If the systemis working normally, the indicatorlight turns off.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Immobiliser Operation0 45.

High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use. SeeHeadlamp Main/Dipped-Beam Changer0 174.

IntelliBeam® Light

This light comes on when theIntelliBeam system, if equipped, isenabled. See Exterior Lamp Controls0 172.

Lamps On Reminder

This light comes on when the exteriorlamps are in use. See Exterior LampControls 0 172.



Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light is white whenthe cruise control is on and ready, andturns green when the cruise control isset and active.

See Cruise Control 0 230.

Adaptive Cruise Control Light

This light is white when the AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC, if equipped) is onand ready, and turns green when theACC is set and active. See AdaptiveCruise Control 0 233.

Door Ajar Light

This light comes on when a door isopen or not securely latched. Beforedriving, check that all doors areproperly closed. See Door AjarMessages 0 153.

Information Displays

Driver InformationCentre (DIC)The DIC is displayed in theinstrument cluster. It shows the statusof many vehicle systems.

y orz : Move SEL up or down togo to the previous or next selection.

S or T : Press to move between theinteractive display zones in thecluster. Press S to go back to theprevious menu.



SEL : Press to open a menu or select amenu item. Press and hold to resetvalues on certain screens.

DIC Information Display Options

The info displays on the DIC can beturned on or off through theSettings menu.

1. Press SEL while viewing theSettings page in one of theinteractive display zones on thecluster.

2. Scroll to Info Pages andpress SEL.

3. Pressy orz to move throughthe list of possible info displays.

4. Press SEL while an item ishighlighted to select or deselectthat item. When an item isselected, a checkmark will appearnext to it.

DIC Information Displays

The following is the list of all possibleDIC information displays. Some of theinformation displays may not beavailable for your particular vehicle.

Trip 1 or Trip 2 and Average FuelEconomy : The Trip display shows thecurrent distance travelled, in eitherkilometres (km) or miles (mi), sincethe trip odometer was last reset. Thetrip odometer can be reset by pressingand holding SEL while this display isactive.

The Average Fuel Economy displayshows the approximate average litresper 100 kilometres (L/100 km) ormiles per gallon (mpg). This numberis calculated based on the number ofL/100 km (mpg) recorded since thelast time this menu item was reset.This number reflects only theapproximate average fuel economythat the vehicle has right now, andwill change as driving conditionschange. The Average Fuel Economycan be reset along with the tripodometer by pressing and holding SELwhile this display is active.

Also shows if the Active FuelManagement is active and inV4 mode, or inactive and in V8 mode.See Active Fuel Management 0 213.

Fuel Range : Shows the approximatedistance the vehicle can be drivenwithout refuelling. LOW will bedisplayed when the vehicle is low onfuel. The fuel range estimate is basedon an average of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank.

Instantaneous Fuel Economy : Showsthe current fuel economy in eitherlitres per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)or miles per gallon (mpg). Thisnumber reflects only the approximatefuel economy that the vehicle hasright now and changes frequently asdriving conditions change.

Average Speed : Shows the averagespeed of the vehicle in kilometers perhour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph).This average is calculated based onthe various vehicle speeds recordedsince the last reset of this value. Theaverage speed can be reset by pressingand holding SEL while this display isactive.

Timer : This display can be used as atimer. To start the timer, press SELwhile this display is active. The



display will show the amount of timethat has passed since the timer waslast reset. To stop the timer, press SELbriefly while this display is active andthe timer is running. To reset thetimer to zero, press and hold SELwhile this display is active.

Turn Arrow : Shows the nextmanoeuvre when using routeguidance.

Estimated Time to Arrival : Showsthe estimated time until arrival atyour destination.

Distance to Destination : Shows thedistance to the destination whenusing route guidance.

Speed Warning : Allows the driver toset a speed that they do not want toexceed. To set the Speed Warning,press SEL when Speed Warning isdisplayed. Pressy orz to adjust thevalue. This feature can be turned offby pressing and holding SEL whileviewing this page. If the selectedspeed limit is exceeded, a pop-upwarning is displayed and a chime maysound.

Cruise Set Speed : Shows the speedthe cruise control or Adaptive CruiseControl is set to.

Gap Setting : When ACC has beenengaged, this page shows the currentgap setting along with the vehicleahead indicator.

Battery Voltage : Shows the currentbattery voltage.

Oil Life : Shows an estimate of theoil's remaining useful life.If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low, theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messagewill appear on the display. See EngineOil Messages 0 154. The oil should bechanged as soon as possible. SeeEngine Oil 0 272. In addition to theengine oil life system monitoring theoil life, additional maintenance isrecommended. See ScheduledMaintenance 0 344.

The Oil Life display must be resetafter each oil change. It will not resetitself. Do not reset the Oil Life displayaccidentally at any time other than

when the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately until thenext oil change. To reset the engineoil life system, press and hold SEL forseveral seconds while the Oil Lifedisplay is active. See Engine Oil LifeSystem 0 274.

Oil Pressure : Shows the engine oilpressure in kPa (kilopascals)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Engine Hours : Shows the totalnumber of hours the engine has run.

Transmission Fluid Temperature :Shows the temperature of theautomatic transmission fluid in eitherdegrees Celsius (°C) or degreesFahrenheit (°F).

Tyre Pressure : Shows theapproximate pressures of all fourtyres. Tyre pressure is displayed ineither kilopascal (kPa) or in poundsper square inch (psi). If the pressure islow, the value for that tyre is shown inamber. See Tyre Pressure MonitorSystem 0 307 and Tyre PressureMonitor Operation 0 308.



Blank Page : Allows for noinformation to be displayed in thecluster info display areas.

Head-Up Display (HUD)

{ Warning

If the HUD image is too bright ortoo high in your field of view, itmay take you more time to seethings you need to see when it isdark outside. Be sure to keep theHUD image dim and placed low inyour field of view.

If equipped with HUD, someinformation concerning the operationof the vehicle is projected onto thewindscreen. The image is projectedthrough the HUD lens on top of theinstrument panel. The informationappears as an image focused outtoward the front of the vehicle.

Caution

If you try to use the HUD image asa parking aid, you may misjudgethe distance and damage yourvehicle. Do not use the HUD imageas a parking aid.

The HUD information can bedisplayed in various languages. Thespeedometer reading and othernumerical values can be displayed ineither English or metric units.

The language selection is changedthrough the radio and the units ofmeasurement is changed through theinstrument cluster. See VehiclePersonalisation 0 162 and “ClusterSettings Menu” under InstrumentCluster 0 132.

HUD Display on the VehicleWindscreen

The HUD may display some of thefollowing vehicle information andvehicle messages or alerts:

. Speed

. Rev Counter

. Audio

. Phone

. Navigation

. Collision Alert

. Cruise Control

. Lane Departure

. Low Fuel



Some vehicle messages or alertsdisplayed in the HUD may be clearedby using the steering wheel controls.See Vehicle Messages 0 152.

Some information shown may not beavailable on your vehicle if it is notequipped with these features.

The HUD control is to the left of thesteering wheel.

To adjust the HUD image:

1. Adjust the driver seat.

2. Start the engine.

3. Use the following settings toadjust the HUD.

$ : Press down or lift up to centrethe HUD image. The HUD image canonly be adjusted up and down, notside to side.

! : Press to select the display view.Each press will change thedisplay view.

D : Lift up and hold to brighten thedisplay. Press down and hold to dimthe display. Hold down to turn thedisplay off.

The HUD image will automaticallydim and brighten to compensate foroutside lighting. The HUD brightnesscontrol can also be adjusted asneeded.

The HUD image can temporarily lightup depending on the angle andposition of the sunlight on the HUDdisplay. This is normal.

Polarised sunglasses could make theHUD image harder to see.

Head-Up Display (HUD) RotationOption

This feature allows for adjusting theangle of the HUD image.

Press SEL on the steering wheelcontrols while Head-up DisplayRotation is highlighted to enter AdjustMode. Pressy orz to adjust the

angle of the HUD display. Press S or

T to highlight OK, then press SEL tosave the setting. CANCEL can also beselected to cancel the setting. Thevehicle must be in P (Park). SeeInstrument Cluster 0 132.

Press SEL on the steering wheelcontrols while Head-up DisplayRotation is highlighted to enter AdjustMode. Pressy orz to adjust the

angle of the HUD display. Press S orT to highlight OK, then press SEL tosave the setting. CANCEL can also beselected to cancel the setting. Thevehicle must be in P (Park). SeeInstrument Cluster 0 132.

HUD Views

There are four views in the HUD.Some vehicle information and vehiclemessages or alerts may be displayedin any view.



Speed View : This display gives thespeedometer reading (in English ormetric units), speed limit, AdaptiveCruise Control speed, Lane DepartureWarning, and vehicle ahead indicator.Some information only appears onvehicles that have these features, andwhen they are active.

Audio/Phone View : This displays thespeed view along with audio/phoneinformation. The current radio station,media type, and incoming calls will bedisplayed.

All HUD views may briefly displayaudio information when the driveruses the steering wheel controls toadjust the audio settings appearing inthe instrument cluster.

Incoming phone calls appearing in theinstrument cluster may also display inany HUD view.

Navigation View : This displays thespeed view along with Turn-by-TurnNavigation information. The compassheading is displayed when navigationrouting is not active.

Navigation Turn-by-Turn Alertsshown in the instrument cluster mayalso be displayed in any HUD view.

Performance View : This displays thespeedometer reading, rpm reading,transmission positions, and gear shiftindicator.

Care of the HUD

Clean the inside of the windscreen toremove any dirt or film that couldreduce the sharpness or clarity of theHUD image.

Clean the HUD lens with a soft clothsprayed with glass cleaner. Wipe thelens gently, then dry it.

HUD Troubleshooting

Check that:

. Nothing is covering the HUD lens.

. HUD brightness setting is not toodim or too bright.

. HUD is adjusted to the properheight.

. Polarised sunglasses are not worn.

. Windscreen and HUD lens areclean.

If the HUD image is not correct,contact your dealer.

The windscreen is part of the HUDsystem. See Windshield Replacement0 291.



Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action that may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiple messagesmay display one after the other.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared by pressingSEL. The messages that requireimmediate action cannot be cleareduntil that action is performed. Allmessages should be taken seriouslyand clearing the messages does notcorrect the problem.

The following are some of the vehiclemessages that may be displayeddepending on the vehicle content.

Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

This message displays when thevehicle has detected that the batteryvoltage is dropping beyond areasonable point. The battery saversystem starts reducing features of the

vehicle that may be noticed. At thepoint that features are disabled, thismessage displays. Turn offunnecessary accessories to allow thebattery to recharge.

LOW BATTERY

This message is displayed when thebattery voltage is low. See Battery0 286.

SERVICE BATTERY CHARGINGSYSTEM

This message is displayed when thereis a fault in the battery chargingsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

TRANSPORT MODE ON

This message is displayed when thevehicle is in transport mode. Somefeatures can be disabled while in thismode, including Remote Keyless Entry(RKE), remote start, and the vehiclealarm system. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service to turn transportmode off.

Brake System Messages

BRAKE FLUID LOW

This message is displayed when thebrake fluid level is low. See Brake Fluid0 285.

BRAKES OVERHEATED

This message is displayed when thebrakes are becoming overheated. Thismay be seen when driving on hills.Shift to a lower gear.

STEP ON BRAKE TO RELEASEPARK BRAKE

This message is displayed if youattempt to release the Electric ParkingBrake without the brake pedal applied.See Electric Parking Brake 0 224.

RELEASE PARKING BRAKE

This message is displayed if theElectric Parking Brake is on while thevehicle is in motion. See ElectricParking Brake 0 224.

SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST

This message may be displayed whenthere is a problem with the brakeboost assist system. The brake boost



assist motor may be heard and brakepedal pulsation may be felt. This isnormal under these conditions. Takethe vehicle to your dealer for service.

SERVICE PARKING BRAKE

This message is displayed when thereis a problem with the parking brake.Take the vehicle to your dealer forservice.

Cruise Control Messages

ADAPTIVE CRUISE SET TO XXX

This message displays when theAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) speedis set. See Adaptive Cruise Control0 233.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE TEMPORARILYUNAVAILABLE

This message displays whenattempting to activate Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC) when it is temporarilyunavailable. The ACC system does notneed service.

This can occur under the followingconditions:

. The radar is not clean. Keep theradar sensors free of mud, dirt,snow, ice, and slush. Clean theentire front and/or rear of thevehicle. For cleaning instructions,see Exterior Care 0 334.

. Heavy rain or snow is interferingwith the radar object detection orcamera performance.

CRUISE SET TO XXX

This message displays when the cruisecontrol speed is set. See Cruise Control0 230.

NO CRUISE BRAKING GAS PEDALAPPLIED

This message displays when AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC) is active and thedriver is pressing the acceleratorpedal. When this occurs, ACC will notbrake. See Adaptive Cruise Control0 233.

SERVICE ADAPTIVE CRUISECONTROL

This message displays when theAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) needsservice. Take the vehicle to yourdealer.

SHIFT TO PARK BEFORE EXITING

This message may display if AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC) is engagedholding the vehicle at a stop, and thedriver attempts to exit the vehicle. Putthe vehicle in P (Park) before exiting.

Door Ajar Messages

DOOR OPEN

A door open symbol will be displayedon the DIC showing which door isopen. If the vehicle has been shiftedout of P (Park), a DOOR OPENmessage will also be displayed. TheDOOR OPEN message may also bedisplayed if the vehicle starts to move.Close the door completely.



BONNET OPEN

This message will display along with abonnet open symbol when the bonnetis open. A chime may also sound.Close the bonnet completely.

BOOT LID OPEN

This message will display along with asymbol when the boot is open. Closethe boot completely.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

A/C OFF DUE TO HIGHENGINE TEMP

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature. SeeEngine Coolant Temperature Gauge0 135. To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioningcompressor automatically turns off.When the coolant temperature returnsto normal, the air conditioningcompressor turns back on. You cancontinue to drive your vehicle.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is too hot.Stop and allow the vehicle to idle untilit cools down. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge 0 135.

When towing, use Tow/Haul Mode toprevent damage to the engine ortransmission. See Tow/Haul Mode0 218.

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE

This message displays and a chimemay sound if the engine coolingsystem reaches unsafe temperaturesfor operation. Stop and turn off thevehicle as soon as it is safe to do so toavoid severe damage. This messageclears when the engine has cooled to asafe operating temperature.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed. Whenyou change the engine oil, be sure toreset the Oil Life System. See EngineOil Life System 0 274, DriverInformation Centre (DIC) 0 146, EngineOil 0 272, and Scheduled Maintenance0 344.

ENGINE OIL HOT, IDLE ENGINE

This message displays when theengine oil temperature is too hot. Stopand allow the vehicle to idle until itcools down.

ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays when the engine oil level maybe too low. Check the oil level beforefilling to the recommended level.If the oil is not low and this messageremains on, take the vehicle to yourdealer for service. See Engine Oil0 272.



OIL PRESSURE LOW — STOPENGINE

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop the vehicleas soon as safely possible and do notoperate it until the cause of the lowoil pressure has been corrected. Checkthe oil as soon as possible and havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affect thevehicle's ability to accelerate. If thismessage is on, but there is noreduction in performance, proceed toyour destination. The performancemay be reduced the next time thevehicle is driven. The vehicle may bedriven at a reduced speed while thismessage is on, but maximumacceleration and speed may bereduced. Anytime this message stayson, or displays repeatedly, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays when thevehicle is low on fuel. Refuel as soonas possible.

Key and Lock Messages

NO REMOTE KEY WASDETECTED. PLACE KEY INTRANSMITTER POCKET. THENSTART YOUR VEHICLE

This message displays when trying tostart the vehicle if an RKE transmitteris not detected. The transmitterbattery may be weak. See “Starting theVehicle with a Low TransmitterBattery” under Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation 0 28.

NO REMOTE DETECTED

This message displays when thetransmitter battery may be weak. See“Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation0 28.

NO REMOTE DETECTED PRESSBRAKE TO RESTART

This message displays whenattempting to turn off the vehicle andthe RKE transmitter is no longerdetected. Restarting is allowedwithout the RKE transmitter forfive minutes. Press the brake pedaland ENGINE START/STOP to restartthe vehicle.

NUMBER OF KEYS PROGRAMMED

This message displays whenprogramming new keys to the vehicle.

REMOTE LEFT IN VEHICLE

This message displays when leavingthe vehicle with the RKE transmitterstill inside.

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays when thebattery in the RKE transmitter needsto be replaced.



Lamp Messages

AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROLON/OFF

This message is displayed when theexterior lamp control is in AUTO andthe lights have turned on or off. SeeAutomatic Headlamp System 0 175.

XXX TURN INDICATOR FAILURE

When one of the indicators is out, thismessage displays to show which bulbneeds to be replaced.See Bulb Replacement 0 292 andReplacement Bulbs 0 293.

INDICATOR ON

This message is displayed if theindicator has been left on. Turn offthe indicator.

Object Detection SystemMessages

FORWARD COLLISIONSYSTEM OFF

This message displays when ForwardAutomatic Braking (FAB) has beenturned off. See Forward AutomaticBraking (FAB) 0 248.

FORWARD COLLISION SYSTEMREDUCED

This message displays when ForwardAutomatic Braking (FAB) has been setto the Alert setting. This settingdisables most FAB functions. SeeForward Automatic Braking (FAB)0 248.

FORWARD COLLISION SYSTEMUNAVAILABLE

This message displays when ForwardAutomatic Braking (FAB) has beenunavailable for some time. The FABSystem does not need service. Thismessage can display under thefollowing conditions:

. The front of the vehicle orwindscreen is not clean. Keepthese areas clean and free of mud,dirt, snow, ice, and slush. Forcleaning instructions, see ExteriorCare 0 334.

. Heavy rain or snow is interferingwith the object detectionperformance.

This message may also be displayed ifthere is a problem with the StabiliTraksystem. See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 226.

FORWARD COLLISION ALERT OFF

This message displays when theForward Collision Alert (FCA) hasbeen turned off.

FRONT CAMERA BLOCKED CLEANWINDSCREEN

This message displays when thecamera is blocked. Cleaning theoutside of the windscreen behind therearview mirror may correct the issue.The Lane Keep Assist (LKA) and theLane Departure Warning (LDW)



system will not operate. ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) may not work ormay not work as well.

LANE CHANGE ALERT OFF

This message indicates that the driverhas turned the Side Blind Zone Alert(SBZA) and Lane Change Alert (LCA)systems off.

LANE KEEPING ASSISTUNAVAILABLE

This message displays when the LaneKeep Assist (LKA) and Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) system is temporarilyunavailable. The LKA system does notneed service.

This message could be due to thecamera being blocked. Clean theoutside of the windscreen behind therear-view mirror.

SERVICE FORWARD COLLISIONSYSTEM

If this message displays, take thevehicle to your dealer to repair thesystem. Adaptive Cruise Control(ACC), Forward Collision Alert (FCA),and/or Forward Automatic Braking

(FAB) may not work. Do not use thesesystems until the vehicle has beenrepaired.

SERVICE DRIVER ASSIST SYSTEM

If this message displays, take thevehicle to your dealer to repair thesystem.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),Forward Collision Alert (FCA),Forward Automatic Braking (FAB),Assistance Systems for Parking orReversing, and/or Lane Keep Assist(LKA) system may not work. Do notuse these systems until the vehiclehas been repaired.

SERVICE FRONT CAMERA

If this message remains on aftercontinued driving, the vehicle needsservice. Do not use the Lane KeepAssist (LKA), Lane Departure Warning(LDW), Forward Automatic Braking(FAB), and Forward Collision Alert(FCA) features. Take the vehicle toyour dealer.

SERVICE PARK ASSIST

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Parking Assistsystem. Do not use this system tohelp you park. See your retailer forservice.

SERVICE SIDE DETECTIONSYSTEM

If this message remains on aftercontinued driving, the vehicle needsservice. Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA),Lane Change Alert (LCA), and RearCross Traffic Alert (RCTA) featureswill not work. Take the vehicle to yourdealer.

SIDE DETECTION SYSTEMUNAVAILABLE

This message indicates that Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA), Lane Change Alert(LCA), and Rear Cross Traffic Alert(RCTA) are disabled either because thesensor is blocked and cannot detectvehicles in the blind zone, or thevehicle is passing through an openarea, such as the desert, where thereis insufficient data for operation. Thismessage may also activate duringheavy rain or due to road spray. The



vehicle does not need service. Forcleaning, see "Washing the Vehicle"under Exterior Care 0 334.

Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE LEVELLING SYSTEM

This message displays when there is aproblem with the automatic rear levelcontrol. See Automatic Level Control0 230. Have the vehicle serviced byyour dealer.

SERVICE STABILITRAK

This message displays if there is aproblem with the StabiliTrak system.See Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 226.

SERVICE SUSPENSION SYSTEM

This message displays when there is aproblem with the Magnetic RideControl system. See Magnetic RideControl 0 229. Have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL

This message displays when there is aproblem with the Traction ControlSystem (TCS). See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 226.

SPORT MODE ON

This message displays when the SportMode is on. See Magnetic Ride Control0 229.

TOUR MODE ON

This message displays when the TourMode is on. See Magnetic Ride Control0 229.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) hasbeen turned off. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 226.

TRACTION CONTROL ON

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) hasbeen turned on. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 226.

Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIRBAG

This message displays if there is aproblem with the airbag system. Seeyour retailer for service.

Safety Belt Messages

AUTOMATIC SEATBELTTIGHTENING UNAVAILABLE

This message displays when theAutomatic Safety Belt TighteningSystem, if equipped, becomesunavailable. This could be caused by atemporary condition. If the messagecontinues to display, see your dealer.

SERVICE AUTOMATIC SEATBELTTIGHTENING SYSTEM

If this message displays, take thevehicle to your dealer to repair theAutomatic Safety Belt TighteningSystem, if equipped.



Security Messages

THEFT ATTEMPTED

This message displays if the vehicledetects a tamper condition.

Service Vehicle Messages

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

This message is displayed if there is aproblem with the vehicle. Take thevehicle to your dealer for service.

Steering System Messages

STEERING ASSIST IS REDUCEDDRIVE WITH CARE

This message may display if a problemoccurs with the electric power steeringsystem. If this message appears,steering effort may be slightly higherthan normal. The vehicle is still safeto drive. Use caution while in reducedassist mode. If this message ispersistent or appears repeatedly, takethe vehicle to your dealer for service.See Steering 0 193.

SERVICE POWER STEERING

This message displays when there is aproblem with electric power steering.If this message displays and areduction in steering performance orloss of power steering assistance isnoticed, see your retailer. See Steering0 193.

Starting the VehicleMessages

PRESS BRAKE TO START

This message is displayed whenattempting to start the vehiclewithout first pressing the brake pedal.

SERVICE KEYLESS STARTSYSTEM

This message is displayed if there is aproblem with the pushbutton startsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

Tyre Messages

SERVICE TYRE MONITOR SYSTEM

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Tyre PressureMonitor System (TPMS). See TyrePressure Monitor Operation 0 308.

TYRE LEARNING ACTIVE

This message displays when thesystem is learning new tyres. See TyrePressure Monitor Operation 0 308.

TYRE PRESSURE LOW ADD AIRTO TYRE

This message displays when thepressure in one or more of the tyresis low.

This message also displays LEFTFRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT REAR,or RIGHT REAR to indicate thelocation of the low tyre.

The low tyre pressure warning lightwill also come on. See Tyre PressureLight 0 144.



If a tyre pressure message appears onthe DIC, stop as soon as possible.Inflate the tyres by adding air untilthe tyre pressure is equal to the valuesshown on the Tyre and LoadingInformation label. See Tyres 0 304,Vehicle Load Limits 0 202, and TyrePressure 0 306.

More than one tyre pressure messagecan appear at a time. The DIC alsoshows the tire pressure values. SeeDriver Information Centre (DIC) 0 146.

Transmission Messages

4WD OFF

If equipped with four-wheel drive, thismessage displays when thefour-wheel-drive system is temporarilydisabled due to an overheatedcondition. The vehicle will run intwo-wheel drive when this message ispresent. Once the four-wheel-drivesystem cools down, the message turnsoff and the four-wheel-drive systemreturns to normal operation.

4WD SHIFT IN PROGRESS

This message will display while thefour-wheel-drive system is shifting.

FOR 4WD LOW SHIFT TONEUTRAL

If a four-wheel drive shift into 4 n isrequested, and the vehicle speed iscorrect, but the transmission is not inN (Neutral), this message will displayuntil the transmission is shifted toN (Neutral).

FOR 4WD LOW SLOW TO XXX

If a four-wheel drive shift into 4 n isrequested, but the vehicle speed is toohigh, this message will display untilthe correct vehicle speed is reached.

GRADIENT BRAKING ACTIVE

This message displays when gradebraking has been activated whiledriving on downhill gradients. Thismessage will only appear the firsttime the feature is activated in anignition cycle. See Tow/Haul Mode0 218, Automatic Transmission 0 214,and Cruise Control 0 230.

GRADIENT BRAKING OFF

This message displays when gradebraking has been disabled with theTow/Haul Mode button on the end ofthe gear lever. See Tow/Haul Mode0 218, Automatic Transmission 0 214,and Cruise Control 0 230.

GRADIENT BRAKING ON

This message displays when gradebraking has been enabled with theTow/Haul Mode button on the end ofthe gear lever. See Tow/Haul Mode0 218, Automatic Transmission 0 214,and Cruise Control 0 230.

SERVICE 4WD

If the vehicle has four-wheel drive,this message may display if a problemoccurs with the four-wheel-drivesystem. If this message appears, stopas soon as possible and turn off thevehicle. Turn the vehicle off for atleast one minute, then restart thevehicle and check for the message onthe DIC display. If the message is stilldisplayed or appears again when youbegin driving, the four-wheel-drivesystem needs service. See your dealer.



SHIFT DENIED

This message displays when the gearlever is in L (Manual Mode) and atransmission range has been selectedthat is unavailable at the currentvehicle speed.

TO EXIT 4WD LOW SHIFT TONEUTRAL

If a four-wheel drive shift out of 4 n isrequested, and the vehicle speed iscorrect, but the transmission is not inN (Neutral), this message will displayuntil the transmission is shifted toN (Neutral).

TO EXIT 4WD LOW SLOW TO XXX

If a four-wheel drive shift out of 4 n isrequested, but the vehicle speed is toohigh, this message will display untilthe correct vehicle speed is reached.

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLEENGINE

This message displays and a chimemay sound if the gearbox fluid in thevehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle. Stop

the vehicle and let it idle to allow thetransmission to cool. This messageclears and the chime stops when thefluid temperature reaches a safe level.

When towing, use Tow/Haul Mode toprevent damage to the engine ortransmission. See Tow/Haul Mode0 218.

VEHICLE IN 4WD LOW

This message will display if thevehicle is driven in 4 n for about10 minutes above 72 km/h (45 mph).

Vehicle ReminderMessages

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE

This message displays when iceconditions are possible.

Vehicle Speed Messages

VEHICLE OVERSPEED

This message displays when thevehicle speed exceeds 120 km/h(75 mph).

Washer Fluid Messages

WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID

This message may display when thewasher fluid level is low. Fill thewindscreen washer reservoir as soonas possible. See Engine CompartmentOverview 0 271 for the location of thewindscreen washer reservoir. Also, seeWasher Fluid 0 283.

Window Messages

OPEN, THEN CLOSE DRIVER/PASSENGER WINDOW

This message is displayed when thewindow needs to be reprogrammed.If the vehicle's battery has beendischarged or disconnected, you mayneed to program each front windowfor the express-up feature to work. SeePower Windows 0 51.



Vehicle PersonalisationUse the audio system controls toaccess the personalisation menus forcustomising vehicle features.

The following are all possiblepersonalisation features. Dependingon the vehicle, some may not beavailable.

Audio System Controls

1. Press the desired feature todisplay a list of available options.

2. Press to select the desiredfeature setting.

3. Press o BACK on the faceplate

or the 0 screen button to returnto the previous menu or exit.

To access the Settings menu, selectSETTINGS from the Home page onthe infotainment display.

Personalisation Menus

The following list of menu items maybe available:

. Time and Date

. Language

. Valet Mode

. Radio

. Vehicle

. Bluetooth

. Apple CarPlay

. Android Auto

. Voice

. Display

. Rear Camera

. Return to Factory Settings

. Software Information

Detailed information for each menufollows:

Time and Date

Manually set the time and date. SeeClock 0 126.

Language

Select Language, then select from theavailable language(s).

The selected language will display onthe system.

Valet Mode (If Equipped)

This will lock the infotainment systemand steering wheel controls. It mayalso limit access to vehicle storagelocations (if equipped).

To enable valet mode:

1. Enter a four-digit code on thekeypad.

2. Select Enter to go to theconfirmation screen.

3. Re-enter the four-digit code.

Select LOCK or UNLOCK to lock orunlock the system. Press Back to goback to the previous menu.

Radio

Press to display the Radio Menu andthe following may display:

. Manage Favourites

. Number of Favourites Pages

. Audible Touch Feedback

. Auto Volume

. Maximum Start-Up Volume

. Audio Cue Volume



Manage Favourites

This allows favourites to be edited.See “Manage Favourites” in “Settings”under “Radio” in the infotainmentmanual.

Number of Favourites Pages

Touch to set the number of favouritesto display.

Select the desired number or selectAuto and the infotainment system willautomatically adjust the number offavourites shown.

Audible Touch Feedback

This allows Audible Touch Feedbackto be turned on or off.

Select Off or On.

Auto Volume

This feature adjusts the volume basedon vehicle speed and ambient noise.

Select Off, Low, Medium-Low,Medium, Medium-High, or High.

Maximum Start-Up Volume

This feature sets the maximumstartup volume. If the vehicle isstarted and the volume is greater than

this level, the volume is adjusted tothis level. To set the maximumstart-up volume, touch + or − toincrease or decrease.

Audio Cue Volume

This feature sets the volume of audiofiles played at system start-up andshut-down.

Select On, then press + or − toincrease or decrease the volume.

Vehicle

Select and the following may display:

. Climate and Air Quality

. Collision/Detection Systems

. Comfort and Convenience

. Lighting

. Power Door Locks

. Remote Lock, Unlock, Start

Climate and Air Quality


. Auto Fan Speed

. Auto Cooled Seats

. Auto Heated Seats

. Auto Demist

Auto Fan Speed

This feature will set the maximumauto fan speed.

Select Low, Medium, or High.

Auto Cooled Seats

When enabled, this feature willautomatically activate the cooled seatsat the level required by the interiortemperature. See Heated and CooledFront Seats 0 62.

Select Off or On.

Auto Heated Seats

When the vehicle is on, this featurewill automatically activate the heatedseats at the level required by thevehicle's interior temperature. See“Auto Heated Seats” under in Heatedand Cooled Front Seats 0 62.

Select Off or On.

Auto Demist

When set to on, the auto demistcomes on when the climate controldetects a humidity risk based on



outside temp, windscreen temp, andinterior humidity. Air will be directedon to windscreen.

Select Off or On.

Collision/Detection Systems

Select the Collision/Detection Systemsmenu and the following may display:

. Alert Type

. Forward Collision System

. Rear Cross Traffic Alert

. Adaptive Cruise Go Notifier

. Park Assist

. Side Blind Zone Alert

Alert Type

This feature will set crash alerts tobeeps or seat vibrations. This settingaffects all crash alerts includingForward Collision Alert, LaneDeparture Warning, and Park Assistalerts. See Driver Assistance Systems0 240.

Select Beeps or Safety Alert Seat.

Forward Collision System

This feature will turn on or offForward Collision Alert (FCA) andForward Automatic Braking (FAB).The Off setting disables all FCA andFAB functions. With the Alert andBrake setting, both FCA and FAB areavailable. The Alert setting disablesFAB. See Forward Automatic Braking(FAB) 0 248.

Select Off, Alert and Brake, or Alert.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off. See Assistance Systems forParking or Reversing 0 240.

Select Off or On.

Adaptive Cruise Go Notifier

This feature will give a reminder thatAdaptive Cruise Control provideswhen it has brought the vehicle to acomplete stop behind anotherstopping vehicle, and then that vehicledrives on.

Select Off or On.

Park Assist

If equipped, this allows the feature tobe turned on or off. See AssistanceSystems for Parking or Reversing 0 240.

Select Off, On, or On with Tow BarAttached.

Side Blind Zone Alert

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off. See Side Blind Zone Alert(SBZA) 0 249.

Select Off or On.

Comfort and Convenience


. Auto Running Boards

. Auto Memory Recall

. Easy Exit Options

. Chime Volume

. Reverse Tilt Mirror

. Auto Mirror Folding

. Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear

Auto Running Boards

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off. See Power Assist Steps 0 42.



Select Off, On, or Extended.

Auto Memory Recall

This feature automatically recalls thecurrent driver's previously stored 1 or2 button positions when entering thevehicle. See Memory Seats 0 60.

Select On or Off.

Easy Exit Options

This feature automatically recalls thecurrent driver's previously stored exitbutton position when exiting thevehicle. See Memory Seats 0 60.

Select On or Off.

Chime Volume

This allows the selection of the chimevolume level.

Press + or − to adjust the volume.

Reverse Tilt Mirror

When on, the driver and/or passengermirrors will tilt downward when thevehicle is shifted to R (Reverse) toimprove visibility of the ground nearthe rear wheels. See Reverse TiltMirrors 0 48.

Select Off, On - Driver and Passenger,On - Driver, or On - Passenger.

Auto Mirror Folding

When on, the outside rear-viewmirrors will automatically fold orunfold when the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter Q or Kbutton is pressed and held. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 28.

Select Off or On.

Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear

When on, the rear wiper willautomatically activate when thevehicle is shifted to R (Reverse). SeeRear Window Wiper/Washer 0 125.

Select Off or On.

Lighting


. Vehicle Locator Lights

. Exit Lighting

Vehicle Locator Lights

This feature will flash the exteriorlamps and allows some of the exteriorlamps and most of the interior lamps

to turn on briefly when K on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is pressed to locate thevehicle.

Select Off or On.

Exit Lighting

This allows the selection of how longthe exterior lamps stay on whenleaving the vehicle when it is darkoutside.

Select Off, 30 Seconds, 60 Seconds,or 120 Seconds.

Power Door Locks


. Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout

. Auto Door Lock

. Delayed Door Lock

Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout

When on, this feature will keep thedriver door from locking when thevehicle is off, the driver door is open,and locking is requested. All the doorswill lock and only the driver door willunlock. See Lockout Protection 0 37.



If Off is selected, the Delayed DoorLock menu will be available.

Select On or Off.

Auto Door Lock

When this feature is turned on, alldoors will automatically lock when thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park). Thedoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Select Off or On.

Delayed Door Lock

When on, this feature will delay thelocking of the doors. To override thedelay, press the power door lockswitch on the door.

Select Off or On.

Remote Lock, Unlock, Start


. Remote Unlock Light Feedback

. Remote Lock Feedback

. Remote Door Unlock

. Remote Start Auto Cool Seats

. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

. Remote Window Operation

. Passive Door Unlock

. Passive Door Lock

. Remote Left in Vehicle Alert

Remote Unlock Light Feedback

When on, the exterior lamps will flashwhen unlocking the vehicle with theRKE transmitter.

Select Off or Flash Lights.

Remote Lock Feedback

This allows selection of what type offeedback is given when locking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

Select Off, Lights and Horn, LightsOnly, or Horn Only.

Remote Door Unlock

This allows selection of which doorswill unlock when pressing K on theRKE transmitter.

Select All Doors or Driver Door.

Remote Start Auto Cool Seats

If equipped and turned on, thisfeature will turn the cooled seats onwhen using remote start onwarm days.

Select Off or On.

Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

If equipped and turned on, thisfeature will turn the heated seats onwhen using remote start on cold days.

Select Off or On.

Remote Window Operation

This allows the window to be openedwhen pressing K on the RKEtransmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation 0 28.

Select Off or On.

Passive Door Unlock

This allows the selection of whatdoors will unlock when using thebutton on the driver door to unlockthe vehicle.

Select All Doors or Driver's Door Only.

Passive Door Lock

This feature can be turned on or off,or can be used to select feedbackwhen using the button on the driverdoor to lock the vehicle. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation0 28.



Select Off, On with Horn Chirp, or On.

Remote Left in Vehicle Alert

This feature sounds an alert when theRKE transmitter is left in the vehicle.

Select Off or On.

Bluetooth


. Pair New Device

. Device Management

. Ringtones

. Voice Mail Numbers

Pair New Device

Select to pair a new device. See“Pairing” under “Bluetooth(Infotainment Controls)” in theinfotainment manual.

Device Management

Select to connect to a different phonesource, disconnect a phone, or deletea phone.

Ringtones

Press to change the ring tone for thespecific phone. The phone does notneed to be connected to changethe ring.

Voice Mail Numbers

This feature displays the voice mailnumber for all connected phones. Tochange the voice mail number, selectEDIT or press the EDIT button. Type anew number, then select SAVE orpress the SAVE button.

Apple CarPlay™


. Apple CarPlay

. Manage Apple CarPlay Devices

Apple CarPlay

This feature allows Apple devices tobe connected to the infotainmentsystem through a USB port.

Select Off or On.

Manage Apple CarPlay Devices

Select to manage Apple devices. AppleCarPlay must be on for this feature tobe accessed.

Android Auto


. Android Auto

. Manage Android Auto Devices

Android Auto

This feature allows Android devices tobe connected to the infotainmentsystem through a USB port.

Select Off or On.

Manage Android Auto Devices

Select to manage Android devices.Android Auto must be on for thisfeature to be accessed.

Voice


. Confidence Threshold

. Prompt Length

. Audio Feedback Speed

Confidence Threshold

This feature allows the adjustment ofthe sensitivity of the speechrecognition system.

Select Confirm More or Confirm Less.



Prompt Length

This feature adjusts the voice promptlength.

Select Short or Long.

Audio Feedback Speed

This feature adjusts the audiofeedback speed.

Select Slow, Medium, or Fast.

Display


. Theme

. Proximity Sensing

. Calibrate Touchscreen

. Turn Display Off

Theme

Select to change the display of theinfotainment system.

Select Contemporary, Mainstreet,Urban, or Velocity.

Proximity Sensing

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off.

Select Off, On, or On-Map Only.

Calibrate Touchscreen

Select to calibrate the touchscreen,then follow the prompts.

Turn Display Off

Select to turn the display off. Pressanywhere on the display area or anyfaceplate button to turn thedisplay on.

Rear Camera


. Guidance Lines

. Rear Park Assist Symbols

Guidance Lines

Select to turn Off or On. SeeAssistance Systems for Parking orReversing 0 240.

Rear Park Assist Symbols

Select to turn Off or On. SeeAssistance Systems for Parking orReversing 0 240.

Return to Factory Settings


. Restore Vehicle Settings

. Clear All Private Data

. Restore Radio Settings

Restore Vehicle Settings

This allows selection of restoringvehicle settings.

Select Restore or Cancel.

Clear All Private Data

This allows selection to clear allprivate information from the vehicle.

Select Delete or Cancel.

Restore Radio Settings

This allows selection to restore radiosettings.

Select Restore or Cancel.

Software Information

Select to view the infotainmentsystem current software information.



Universal RemoteSystemSee Declaration of Conformity 0 356.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

If equipped, these buttons are in theoverhead console.

This system can replace up to threeremote control transmitters used toactivate devices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, and homeautomation devices. These

instructions refer to a garage dooropener, but can be used for otherdevices.

Do not use the Universal Remotesystem with any garage door openerthat does not have the stop andreverse feature. This includes anygarage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completelybefore programming the UniversalRemote system. It may help to haveanother person assist withprogramming process.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future programming.Erase the programming when vehicleownership is terminated. See “ErasingUniversal Remote System Buttons”later in this section.

To program a garage door opener,park outside directly in line with andfacing the garage door opener receiver.Clear all people and objects near thegarage door.

Make sure the hand-held transmitterhas a new battery for quick andaccurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalRemote System

The Universal Remote system iscompatible with radio-frequencydevices operating between 433 MHz.If the system being programmed doesnot operate within this frequencyrange then a Universal Receiver maybe required.

For questions, help programming theUniversal Remote system, or orderingof a Universal Receiver, seewww.homelink.com.

Programming involves time-sensitiveactions, and may time out causing theprocedure to be repeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. Hold the end of the hand-heldtransmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to3 in) away from the UniversalRemote system buttons with theindicator light in view. The



hand-held transmitter wassupplied by the manufacturer ofthe garage door opener receiver.

2. At the same time, press and holdboth the hand-held transmitterbutton and one of the threeUniversal Remote systembuttons to be used to operate thegarage door. Do not release eitherbutton until the indicator lightgoes from a slow to a rapid flashlight. Then release both buttons.

Some entry gates and garagedoor openers may requiresubstitution of Step 2 with theprocedure under “Programmingfor Some Gate Operators” later inthis section.

3. Press and hold the newlyprogrammed Universal Remotesystem button for five secondswhile watching the indicatorlight and garage door activation.

. If the indicator light stays oncontinuously or the garagedoor moves when the buttonis pressed, then programmingis complete. There is no needto complete Steps 4–6.

. If the indicator light does notcome on or the garage doordoes not move, a secondbutton press may berequired. For a second time,press and hold the newlyprogrammed button forfive seconds. If the light stayson or the garage door moves,programming is complete.

. If the indicator light blinksrapidly for two seconds, thenchanges to a solid light andthe garage door does notmove, continue withprogramming Steps 4–6.

Learn or Smart Button

4. After completing Steps 1–3,locate the Learn or Smart buttoninside the garage on the garage

door opener receiver. The nameand colour of the button mayvary by manufacturer.

5. Press and release the Learn orSmart button. Step 6 must becompleted within 30 seconds ofpressing this button.

6. Inside the vehicle, press and holdthe newly programmed UniversalRemote system button fortwo seconds and then release it.If the garage door does not moveor the lamp on the garage dooropener receiver does not flash,press and hold the same buttona second time for two seconds,then release it. Again, if the doordoes not move or the garagedoor lamp does not flash, pressand hold the same button a thirdtime for two seconds, thenrelease it.

The Universal Remote system shouldnow activate the garage door.

Repeat the process for programmingthe two remaining buttons.



Programming for Some GateOperators

For questions or programming helpsee www.homelink.com.

Some gate operators requiretransmitter signals to time out or quitafter several seconds of transmission.This may not be long enough for theUniversal Remote system to pick upthe signal during programming.

If the programming did not work,replace Step 2 under “Programmingthe Universal Remote System” withthe following:

Press and hold the Universal Remotesystem button while pressing andreleasing the hand-held transmitterbutton every two seconds until thesignal has been successfully acceptedby the Universal Remote system. TheUniversal Remote system indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under“Programming the Universal RemoteSystem” to complete.

Universal Remote SystemOperation

Using the Universal RemoteSystem

Press and hold the appropriateUniversal Remote system button for atleast one-half second. The indicatorlight will come on while the signal isbeing transmitted.

Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons

Erase all programmed buttons whenvehicle ownership is terminated.

To erase:

1. Press and hold the two outsidebuttons until the indicator lightbegins to flash. This should takeabout 10 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Remote SystemButton

To reprogram any of the systembuttons:

1. Press and hold any one of thebuttons. Do not release thebutton.

2. The indicator light will begin toflash after 20 seconds. Withoutreleasing the button, proceedwith Step 1 under “Programmingthe Universal Remote System.”


172 LIGHTING

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . . 172Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 174Headlamp Main/Dipped-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Automatic Headlamp System . . . 175Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . 176Indicator and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Cornering Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Battery Load Management . . . . . . 179Battery Power Protection . . . . . . . . 180

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

Turn the control to the followingpositions:

P : Turns off the automaticheadlights and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL). Turning the headlightcontrol toP again will turn theautomatic headlights or DRL back on.

AUTO : Automatically turns theexterior lamps on and off, dependingon outside lighting.

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps.

2 : Turns on the headlamps togetherwith the parking lamps andinstrument panel lights.

When the headlamps are turned onwhile the vehicle is on, the headlampswill turn off automatically 10 minutesafter the ignition is turned off. Whenthe headlamps are turned on whilethe vehicle is off, the headlamps willstay on for 10 minutes beforeautomatically turning off to preventthe battery from being drained. Turnthe headlamp control to off and thenback to the headlamp on position tomake the headlamps stay on for anadditional 10 minutes.

IntelliBeam® System

If equipped, this system turns thevehicle's main beam headlamps onand off according to surroundingtraffic conditions.

The system turns the main beamheadlamps on when it is dark enoughand there is no other traffic present.


LIGHTING 173

Thisb lamp comes on in theinstrument cluster when theIntelliBeam system is enabled.

Turning On and Enabling IntelliBeam

To enable the IntelliBeam system,with the indicator lever in the neutralposition, turn the exterior lampcontrol to AUTO. The blue main beamon light appears on the instrumentcluster when the main beams are on.

Driving with IntelliBeam

The system only activates the mainbeams when driving over 40 km/h(25 mph).

There is a sensor near the top centreof the windscreen, whichautomatically controls the system.Keep this area of the windscreen clearof debris to allow for best systemperformance.

The main beam headlamps remain on,under the automatic control, until oneof the following situations occurs:

. The system detects anapproaching vehicle's headlamps.

. The system detects a precedingvehicle's tail lamps.

. The outside light is bright enoughthat main beam headlamps arenot required.

. The vehicle's speed drops below20 km/h (12 mph).

. The indicator lever is movedforward to the main beam positionor the Flash-to-Pass feature isused. See Headlamp Main/Dipped-Beam Changer 0 174 andFlash-to-Pass 0 174.

. The IntelliBeam system is disabledby the main/dipped beam changeror the Flash-to-Pass feature. If thishappens, the main/dipped beamchanger must be activated twotimes within five seconds toreactivate the IntelliBeam system.The instrument cluster light willcome on to indicate theIntelliBeam is reactivated.See Headlamp Main/Dipped-BeamChanger 0 174 and Flash-to-Pass0 174.

The main beams may not turn offautomatically if the system cannotdetect other vehicle's lamps becauseof any of the following:

. The other vehicle's lamps aremissing, damaged, obstructed fromview, or otherwise undetected.

. The other vehicle's lamps arecovered with dirt, snow, and/orroad spray.

. The other vehicle's lamps cannotbe detected due to dense exhaust,smoke, fog, snow, road spray, mist,or other airborne obstructions.

. The vehicle's windscreen is dirty,cracked, or obstructed bysomething that blocks the view ofthe light sensor.

. The vehicle is loaded such that thefront end points upward, causingthe light sensor to aim high andnot detect headlamps and taillamps.

. The vehicle is being driven onwinding or hilly roads.

The automatic main beam headlightsmay need to be disabled if any of theabove conditions exist.


174 LIGHTING

Exterior Lamps OffReminderIf a door is open, a reminder chimesounds when the headlights orparking lights are manually turned onand the ignition is off. To turn off thechime, turn the exterior lamp controlto off or AUTO and then back on,or close and re-open the door. In theAUTO mode, the headlights turn offonce the ignition is off or remain onuntil the headlight delay ends (ifenabled in the DIC). See “ExitLighting” under Vehicle Personalisation0 162.

Headlamp Main/Dipped-Beam ChangerPush the indicator lever toward theinstrument panel to change theheadlights from dipped to main beam.

Pull the indicator lever toward youand release it to return to dippedbeam headlights.

When the main beam headlights areon, this indicator light on theinstrument cluster will also be on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use themain-beam headlamps to signal adriver in front of you that you want topass. It works even if the headlampsare in the automatic position.

To use it, pull the indicator stalktoward you, then release it.

If the headlamps are in the automaticposition or on dipped beam, themain-beam headlamps will turn on.They will stay on as long as you holdthe stalk toward you. The main-beamindicator on the instrument clusterwill come on. Release the stalk toreturn to normal operation.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)DRL can make it easier for others tosee the front of the vehicle duringthe day.

The DRL system comes on when thefollowing conditions are met:

. The ignition is on.

. The exterior lamp control isin AUTO.

. The transmission is not inP (Park).

. The light sensor determines it isdaytime.

When the DRL system is on, only theDRL are on. The tail lamps,sidemarker lamps, instrument panellights, and other lamps will not be on.

When it begins to get dark, theautomatic headlight system switchesfrom DRL to the headlights.


LIGHTING 175

The DRL turn off when the headlampsare turned to; or2. DRL alsoturns off when the ignition is off. DRLwill turn back on when the exteriorlamp control turns back to AUTOor O.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside, theautomatic headlamp system turns onthe headlamps at the normalbrightness, along with the tail lamps,sidemarker, parking lamps, and theinstrument panel lights. The radiolights will also be dim.

To turn off the automatic headlightsystem, turn the exterior light controltoP and then release it.

The vehicle has a light sensor on thetop of the instrument panel thatcontrols the automatic headlampsystem. Do not cover the sensor,otherwise the headlamps may comeon when they are not needed.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage, heavy overcastweather, or a tunnel. This is normal.

There is a delay in the transitionbetween the daytime and nighttimeoperation of the automatic headlampsystem so that driving under bridgesor bright overhead street lights doesnot affect the system. The automaticheadlamp system is only affected

when the light sensor detects achange in lighting lasting longer thanthe delay.

If the vehicle is started in a darkgarage, the automatic headlampsystem will come on immediately.Once the vehicle leaves the garage, ittakes approximately one minute forthe automatic headlamp system tochange if it is bright enough outside.During that delay, the instrumentcluster may not be as bright as usual.Make sure the instrument panelbrightness control is in the full brightposition. See Instrument PanelIllumination Control 0 177.

To idle the vehicle with the automaticheadlamp system off, turn the controlto the off position.

The headlamps will also stay on afteryou exit the vehicle.

The regular headlamp system can beturned on when needed.

Lights On with Wipers

If the windscreen wipers are activatedin daylight with the engine on, andthe exterior lamp control is in AUTO,the headlamps, parking lamps, and


176 LIGHTING

other exterior lamps come on. Thetransition time for the lamps comingon varies based on wiper speed. Whenthe wipers are not operating, theselamps turn off. Move the exteriorlamp control toP or; to disablethis feature.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| : Press to make the front and rearturn signal lamps flash on and off.Press again to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning indicatorsare on, the vehicle's indicators willnot work.

Indicator and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument clusterflashes in the direction of the turn orlane change.

Move the indicator stalk all the wayup or down to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the stalk for less thanone second until the arrow starts toflash to signal a lane change. Thiscauses the indicators to automaticallyflash three times. It will flash sixtimes if Tow/Haul Mode is active.Holding the indicator lever for morethan one second will cause theindicators to flash until the lever isreleased.

The stalk returns to its startingposition whenever it is released.

If after signalling a turn or a lanechange the arrows flash rapidly or donot come on, a signal bulb could beburned out.

Replace any burned out bulbs. If abulb is not burned out, check the fuse.See Fuses 0 294.

Indicator On Chime

If the indicator is left on for morethan 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chime soundsat each flash of the indicator. Themessage INDICATOR ON will alsoappear in the Driver InformationCentre (DIC). To turn the chime andmessage off, move the indicator stalkto the off position.


LIGHTING 177

Fog Lamps

The rear fog lamps make the vehiclemore visible from the rear in foggy ormisty conditions.

s : Press to turn the rear fog lampson or off.

The parking lights or headlights mustbe on for the rear fog lamps to work.

Cornering LightsIf equipped with cornering lamps, theyautomatically come on when all of thefollowing occur:

. The dipped beam headlightsare on.

. The indicators are activated or thesteering wheel is at a calibratedangle.

. The vehicle speed is below thecalibrated speed.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

This feature controls the brightness ofthe instrument panel lights and isnext to the exterior light control.

D : Move the thumbwheel up ordown to brighten or dim the lights.

The brightness of the displaysautomatically adjusts based onoutdoor lighting. The instrumentpanel illumination control will set thelowest level to which the displays willbe automatically adjusted.


178 LIGHTING

Dome Lamps

There are interior lights in theoverhead console and the headliner,if equipped.

To change the dome lamp settings,press the following:

OFF : Turns the lamps off, even whena door is open.

DOOR : The lamps come onautomatically when a door is opened.

ON : Turns all dome lamps on.

Reading Lamps

There are reading lamps in theoverhead console and the headliner,if equipped. To operate, the ignitionmust be in the ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN position, or using RetainedAccessory Power (RAP).

Pressm orn next to each readinglamp to turn it on or off.


LIGHTING 179

Lighting Features

Entry LightingSome exterior lamps and the interiorlamps turn on briefly at night, or inareas with limited lighting, when K ispressed on the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter. When a door isopened, the interior lamps come on ifthe dome lamp control is in the DOORposition. After about 30 seconds theexterior lights turn off. Entry lightingcan be disabled manually by changingthe ignition out of the OFF position,or by pressing the RKE transmitter Qbutton.

This feature can be changed. See“Vehicle Locator Lights” under VehiclePersonalisation 0 162.

Exit LightingSome exterior lamps and interiorlamps come on at night, or in areaswith limited lighting, when the driverdoor is opened after the ignition isturned off and the indicator lever ispulled briefly toward you andreleased. The exterior lamps and

interior lamps remain on after thedoor is closed for a set amount oftime, then automatically turn off.

The exterior lamps turn offimmediately by turning the exteriorlamp control off.

This feature can be changed. SeeVehicle Personalisation 0 162.

Battery Load ManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM), which estimatesthe battery's temperature and state ofcharge. It then adjusts the voltage forbest performance and extended life ofthe battery.

When the battery's state of charge islow, the voltage is raised slightly toquickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high, thevoltage is lowered slightly to preventovercharging. The voltmeter gauge orthe voltage display on the DriverInformation Centre (DIC), if equipped,may show the voltage moving up ordown. This is normal. If there is aproblem, an alert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged at idleif the electrical loads are very high.This is true for all vehicles. This isbecause the generator (alternator)may not be spinning fast enough atidle to produce all the power that isneeded for very high electrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, fog lamps,rear window defogger, climate controlfan at high speed, heated seats, enginecooling fans, trailer loads, and loadsplugged into accessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reduce thepower demands of some accessories.

Normally, these actions occur in stepsor levels, without being noticeable. Inrare cases at the highest levels ofcorrective action, this action may benoticeable to the driver. If so, a DICmessage might be displayed and it isrecommended that the driver reduce


180 LIGHTING

the electrical loads as much aspossible. See Battery Voltage andCharging Messages 0 152.

Battery Power ProtectionThis feature shuts off the interior andreading lights if they are left on formore than 10 minutes when theignition is off. This will keep thebattery from running down.


INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM 181

Infotainment System

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Introduction

InfotainmentSee the infotainment manual forinformation on the radio, audioplayers, phone, and navigation system.It also includes information onsettings.


182 CLIMATE CONTROLS

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Rear Climate Control System . . . . 186

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

MaintenancePassenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Climate Control Systems

Dual Automatic ClimateControl SystemThe climate control buttons and thetouch screen are used to adjust theheating, cooling, and ventilation.

Climate Control Buttons


2. Fan Control

3. OFF (Fan)

4. Driver and Passenger Heated andCooled Seats

5. Recirculation

6. Rear Window Demister

7. Defrost


Climate Touch Screen Controls



3. Fan Control

4. SYNC (SynchronisedTemperature)

5. A/C Mode (Air Conditioning)

6. Climate Control Selection(Application Tray Button)


CLIMATE CONTROLS 183

7. Rear (Rear Climate ControlTouch Screen)


Climate Control Touch Screen

The fan, air delivery mode, airconditioning, driver and passengertemperatures, and SYNC settings canbe controlled by pressing CLIMATE onthe infotainment home screen or theclimate button in the touch screenapplication tray. A selection can thenbe made on the front climate controlpage displayed. See the infotainmentmanual.

Climate Control Status Screen

The climate control status screenappears briefly when the climatecontrol buttons on the faceplate areadjusted. The air delivery mode can beadjusted on the climate control statusscreen.

Automatic Operation

The system automatically controls thefan speed, air delivery, airconditioning, and recirculation inorder to heat or cool the vehicle to thedesired temperature.

When the indicator light is on orAUTO is displayed on the touchscreen, the system is in full automaticoperation. If the air delivery mode orfan setting is manually adjusted, theauto indicator turns off and thedisplay will show the selected settings.Auto operation can be turned offindividually for climate settings.

For automatic operation:

1. Press AUTO.

2. Set the temperature. Allow thesystem time to stabilise. Thenadjust the temperature as neededfor best comfort.

To improve fuel efficiency and to coolthe vehicle faster, recirculation may beautomatically selected in warmweather. The recirculation light willnot come on. Press@ to selectrecirculation; press it again to selectoutside air.

English units can be changed tometric units through the instrumentcluster. See “Cluster Settings Menu”under Instrument Cluster 0 132.

OFF : Press OFF to turn the fan on oroff. The temperature control and airdelivery mode can still be adjustedwith the fan off.

w /x : The temperature can beadjusted separately for the driver andthe passenger on the front climatecontrol faceplate or touchscreen. Pressor touchw to increase orx decreasethe temperature. Press and hold torapidly increase or decrease thetemperature.

The driver and passengertemperatures can also be adjusted bypressing the controls on the touchscreen.



SYNC : Touch SYNC on the touchscreen to link all climate zone settingsto the driver settings. Adjust thedriver side temperature control tochange the linked temperature. Whenthe passenger settings are adjusted,the SYNC button is displayed whenthe temperatures are unlinked.

Rear : If equipped, touch Rear on thefront climate control touch screen toopen the rear climate control screen.The rear climate control settings cannow be adjusted from the frontpassenger area.

Manual Operation

z9y : Press the fan controlbuttons or the touch screen fancontrol, to increase or decrease thefan speed. Press and hold the buttonsor the touch screen control to adjustspeed more quickly. The fan speedsetting displays. Pressing either buttoncancels automatic fan control and thefan can be controlled manually. PressAUTO to return to automaticoperation. To turn off the fan andclimate control system, press OFF onthe climate control faceplate. The

airflow will be blocked from enteringin all air delivery modes, exceptdefrost.

The maximum automatic fan speedcan be set to low, medium, or high. Toadjust Auto Fan Max Speed, see“Climate and Air Quality” underVehicle Personalisation 0 162.

Air Delivery Mode Control : Whenthe climate information is displayed,press the desired air delivery mode onthe touch screen to change thedirection of the airflow. The selectedair delivery mode button is lit.Pressing any of the air deliverybuttons cancels automatic air deliverycontrol and the direction of theairflow can be controlled manually.Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation.

To change the current mode, selectone of the following:

Y : Air is directed to the instrumentpanel outlets.

\ : Air is divided between theinstrument panel outlets and the flooroutlets.

[ : Air is directed to the flooroutlets.

- : Clears the windows of mist ormoisture. Air is directed to thewindscreen and floor outlets.

0 : Clears the windscreen of mist orfrost more quickly. Air is directed tothe windscreen. Press the0 buttonto turn on or off. Changing the airdelivery mode also turns thedefrost off.

A/C Mode : Touch A/C Mode on thetouch screen to turn the automatic airconditioning on or off. If the fan isturned off or the outside temperaturefalls below freezing, the airconditioner will not run.

Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation and the air conditioner runsas needed.

Automatic Air Recirculation : Whenthe AUTO indicator light is on, the airis automatically recirculated asneeded to help quickly cool the insideof the vehicle.



The climate control system may havea sensor to detect air pollution. Whenusing automatic air recirculation, theair quality control system mayoperate. To adjust the sensitivity ofthe air quality sensor, see “Climateand Air Quality” under VehiclePersonalisation 0 162.

@ (Recirculation) : Press toalternate between recirculating airinside the vehicle or pulling in outsideair. The indicator light on the buttonis lit when recirculation mode isactive. This helps to quickly cool theair inside the vehicle and reduce theentry of outside air and odours.

Pressing this button cancels automaticrecirculation. Press AUTO to return toautomatic operation; recirculationruns automatically as needed.

Manual recirculation mode is notavailable when in Defrost or Defogmodes.

Auto Defog : The climate controlsystem uses a sensor to automaticallydetect high humidity inside thevehicle. When high humidity isdetected, the climate control systemmay adjust to outside air supply, turn

on the air conditioner, and directmore air to the windscreen. If theclimate control system does notdetect possible window misting, itreturns to normal operation. To turnAuto Demist off or on, see "Climateand Air Quality" under VehiclePersonalisation 0 162.

Rear Window Demister

K : Press to turn the rear windowdemister on or off. An indicator lighton the button comes on to show thatthe rear window demister is on.

The rear window demister only workswhen the ignition is in ON/RUN. Thedemister turns off if the ignition isturned to ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF.

The rear window demister can be setto automatic operation. When AutoRear Demist is selected, the rearwindow demister turns onautomatically when the vehicle is firststarted in cold weather and turns offwhen the vehicle is warmed. To turnAuto Rear Demist on or off, see“Climate and Air Quality” underVehicle Personalisation 0 162.

The heated outside rearview mirrorsturn on when the rear windowdemister button is on and help toclear mist or frost from the surface ofthe mirrors.

Caution

Do not try to clear frost or othermaterial from the inside of thefront windscreen and rear windowwith a razor blade or anything elsethat is sharp. This may damage therear window demister grid andaffect the radio's ability to pick upstations clearly. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Driver and Passenger Heated andCooled Seats : PressI or+ to heatthe driver or passenger backrest only.

Press J or z to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion and backrest.




There are also auto heated and cooledseats, for more information see Heatedand Cooled Front Seats 0 62.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation : The climate controlsystem may run when the vehicle isstarted remotely. The system uses thedriver's previous settings to heat orcool the inside of the vehicle. The reardemist may come on during remotestart based on cold ambientconditions. The rear demist indicatorlight does not come on during aremote start. If equipped with heatedor cooled seats, they may come onduring a remote start. See RemoteVehicle Start 0 33 and Heated andCooled Front Seats 0 62.

Sensor

The solar sensor, on top of theinstrument panel near the windscreen,monitors the solar heat.

The climate control system uses thesensor information to adjust thetemperature, fan speed, recirculation,and air delivery mode for bestcomfort.

If the sensor is covered, the automaticclimate control system may not workproperly.

Rear Climate ControlSystemIf equipped with a rear climate controlsystem, the settings can be adjustedwith the rear climate control buttonsand the touch screen on theinfotainment display.

Rear Climate Control Buttons

1. Heated Rear Seats


3. Temperature Control

4. Fan Control

5. O (On/Off)




Rear Climate Touch Screen Controls


2. Rear Climate TemperatureControl

3. Fan Control

4. SYNC (SynchronisedTemperatures)

5. REAR O (On/Off)

6. Rear AUTO (AutomaticOperation)

7. Front (Front Climate ControlTouch Screen)

8. Rear Control Lockout


Rear : Touch Rear on the frontclimate control touch screen to openthe rear climate control screen. Therear climate control settings can nowbe adjusted from the frontpassenger area.

O : Press O or REAR O to turn therear climate control on or off. If therear climate control is turned offusing REAR O on the touch screen,

the O button and the temperature orair delivery mode buttons on the rearclimate control faceplate must bepressed within five seconds to turn itback on.

SYNC : Touch SYNC on the touchscreen to match the rear climatecontrol temperature to the frontclimate control driver temperature.The SYNC button will be lit. Press thetemperature, MODE, or AUTO buttontwice to unlink the set driver and reartemperatures. The SYNC buttonturns off.

Rear Control Lockout : Touch RearControl Lockout on the touch screento lock or unlock control of the rearclimate control system from the frontclimate control touch screen. Whenlocked the rear climate control cannotbe adjusted from the rear climatecontrol faceplate.

Automatic Operation

Rear AUTO : Touch to turn on or off.The air delivery and fan speed arecontrolled automatically. The AUTOindicator appears on the display. If theMode or fan control buttons aremanually adjusted, this cancels theautomatic operation.

Manual Operation

A«/ªAª : Touch or press thefan controls on the touchscreen orrear faceplate to increase or decreasethe airflow. PressingA« when thesystem is off will turn the system on.The air delivery mode remains in itsprevious setting.



w /x : Press briefly or press andhold the rear temperature controlbuttons or touch screen to adjust therear passenger temperature. Presswfor warmer air and pressx forcooler air.

Y/\/Y : Touch the desired modeon the touch screen or the MODEbutton on the rear faceplate to changethe direction of the airflow in the rearseating area.

M or L : Press M or L to heat theleft or right outboard seat cushion andseatback. See Heated Rear Seats 0 64.

Air VentsAdjustable air vents are in the centreand on the side of the instrumentpanel.

1. Slider Knob

2. Thumbwheel

Move the slider knobs (1) to changethe direction of the airflow.

Use the thumbwheels (2) near the airvents to open or close off the airflow.

Operation Tips

. Clear away any ice, snow, or leavesfrom the air inlets at the base ofthe windscreen that could blockthe flow of air into the vehicle.

. Clear snow off the bonnet toimprove visibility and helpdecrease moisture drawn into thevehicle.

. When you enter a vehicle in coldweather, press the fan up buttonto the maximum fan level beforedriving. This helps clear the intakeducts of snow and moisture, andreduces the chance of misting theinside of the window.

. Keep the air path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

. Use of non-GM approved bonnetair flow deflectors can adverselyaffect the performance of thesystem. Check with your dealerbefore adding equipment to theoutside of the vehicle.



Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe filter reduces the dust, pollen andother airborne irritants from outsideair that are drawn into the vehicle.

The filter should be replaced as partof routine scheduled maintenance. SeeScheduled Maintenance 0 344. To findout what type of filter to use, seeMaintenance Replacement Parts 0 348.

1. Before opening the glove box,remove the two lower screws(out of view).

2. Open the glove box completelyand remove the two upperscrews.

3. Disconnect the electrical plugand remove the entire glove box.

4. Release the two tabs holding theservice door. Open the servicedoor and remove the old filter.

5. Install the new air filter.

6. Close the service door and securethe tabs.

7. Reverse the steps to reinstall theglove box.

See your dealer if additionalassistance is needed.



ServiceThis vehicle has the newenvironmentally friendly refrigerant,R1234yf. This refrigerant has asignificantly reduced global warmingimpact on the environment, comparedto the traditional automotiverefrigerant, R-134a. All vehicles have alabel under the bonnet that identifiesthe refrigerant used in the vehicle.

The refrigerant system should only beserviced by trained and certifiedtechnicians. The air conditioningevaporator should never be repaired orreplaced by one from a salvagevehicle. It should only be replaced bya new evaporator to ensure properand safe operation.

During service, all refrigerants shouldbe reclaimed with proper equipment.Venting refrigerants directly to theatmosphere is harmful to theenvironment and may also createunsafe conditions based on inhalation,combustion, frostbite, or otherhealth-based concerns.


DRIVING AND OPERATING 191

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . 199Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 200Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . 201Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Run-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Adjustable Throttle and BrakePedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Active Fuel Management . . . . . . . . 213Extended Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . 214Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Drive SystemsFour-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

BrakesAntilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . 223Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Ride Control SystemsTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Driver Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Magnetic Ride Control . . . . . . . . . . . 229Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Automatic Level Control . . . . . . . . . 230

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . 233

Driver Assistance SystemsDriver Assistance Systems . . . . . . . 240Assistance Systems for Parkingor Reversing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Assistance Systems forDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Forward AutomaticBraking (FAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . . 249Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . . . . . 249Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . . . . . 251

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Trailer TowingGeneral Towing Information . . . . 256Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259


192 DRIVING AND OPERATING

Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . 266

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On Electrical Equipment . . . 267

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many forms andcan take your focus from the task ofdriving. Exercise good judgement anddo not let other activities divert yourattention away from the road. Manylocal governments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, keep youreyes on the road, keep your hands onthe steering wheel, and focus yourattention on driving.

. Do not use a phone in demandingdriving situations. Use ahands-free method to place orreceive necessary phone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read, takenotes, or look up information onphones or other electronic devices.

. Designate a front seat passengerto handle potential distractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favourite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings. Programall trip information into anynavigation device prior to driving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parked toretrieve items that have fallen tothe floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tend tochildren.

. Keep pets in an appropriate carrieror restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a mobile phone.

{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.



See the infotainment manual forinformation on that system or thenavigation system, if equipped,including pairing and using a mobilephone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The first stepin driving defensively is to wear thesafety belt. See Seat Belts 0 71.

. Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, and otherdrivers) are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipatewhat they might do and be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and accelerating areimportant factors in helping to controla vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time is aboutthree-quarters of a second. In thattime, a vehicle moving at 100 km/h(60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft), whichcould be a lot of distance in anemergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:

. Keep enough distance betweenyou and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brake normallybut do not pump the brakes. Doing socould make the pedal harder to pushdown. If the engine stops, there willbe some power brake assist but it willbe used when the brake is applied.

Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and the brakepedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Electric Power Steering

This vehicle has electric powersteering. It does not have powersteering fluid. Regular maintenance isnot required.

If power steering assist is lost due to asystem malfunction, the vehicle canbe steered, but may require increasedeffort.

See your dealer if there is a problem.

If the steering assistance is used foran extended period of time, powerassistance may be reduced.

If the steering wheel is turned until itreaches the end of its travel, and isheld in that position for an extendedperiod of time, power steering assistmay be reduced.

Normal use of the power steeringassist should return when the systemcools down.



See specific vehicle steering messagesunder Steering System Messages 0 159.See your dealer if there is a problem.

Bend Tips. Take bends at a reasonable speed.

. Reduce speed before enteringa bend.

. Maintain a reasonable steadyspeed through the bend.

. Wait until the vehicle is out of thebend before accelerating gentlyinto the straight.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem may bemore effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of the steeringwheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)allows steering while braking.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can drop offthe edge of a road onto the shoulderwhile driving. Follow these tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator and then,if there is nothing in the way,steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tyre contacts thepavement edge.

3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:

. Braking Skid - wheels are notrolling.

. Steering or Cornering Skid - toomuch speed or steering in a bendcauses tyres to slip and losecornering force.

. Acceleration Skid - too muchthrottle causes the driving wheelsto spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skids bytaking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:

. Ease your foot off the acceleratorpedal and steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. The vehicle maystraighten out. Be ready for asecond skid if it occurs.



. Slow down and adjust your drivingaccording to weather conditions.Stopping distance can be longerand vehicle control can be affectedwhen traction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or other materialon the road. Learn to recognisewarning clues - such as enoughwater, ice, or packed snow on theroad to make a mirrored surface -and slow down when you have anydoubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking, includingreducing vehicle speed by shiftingto a lower gear. Any suddenchanges could cause the tyres toslide.

Remember: Antilock brakes help avoidonly the braking skid.

Off-Road DrivingFour-wheel-drive vehicles can be usedfor off-road driving. Vehicles withoutfour-wheel drive and vehicles notequipped with All Terrain (AT) orOn-Off Road (OOR) tires must not bedriven off-road except on a level, solidsurface.

One of the best ways for successfuloff-road driving is to control thespeed.

{ Warning

When driving off-road, bouncingand quick changes in direction caneasily throw you out of position.This could cause you to lose controland crash. You and your passengersshould always wear safety belts.

Before Driving Off-Road. Have all necessary maintenance

and service work completed.

. Fuel the vehicle, fill fluid levels,and check inflation pressure in alltyres, including the spare,if equipped.

. Read all the information aboutfour-wheel-drive vehicles in thismanual.

. Know the local laws that apply tooff-road driving.

To gain more ground clearance ifneeded, it may be necessary to removethe front fascia lower air dam.

Caution

Operating the vehicle for extendedperiods without the front fascialower air dam installed can causeimproper airflow to the engine.Reattach the front fascia air damafter off-road driving.

Loading the Vehicle for Off-RoadDriving

{ Warning

. Unsecured cargo on the loadfloor can be tossed aboutwhen driving over roughterrain. You or yourpassengers can be struck byflying objects. Secure thecargo properly.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Keep cargo in the cargo areaas far forward and as low aspossible. The heaviest thingsshould be on the floor,forward of the rear axle.

. Heavy loads on the roof raisethe vehicle's centre of gravity,making it more likely to rollover. You can be seriously orfatally injured if the vehiclerolls over. Put heavy loadsinside the cargo area, not onthe roof.

For more information about loadingthe vehicle, see If the Vehicle Is Stuck0 201 and Tyres 0 304.

Environmental Concerns. Always use established trails,

roads, and areas that have beenset aside for public off-roadrecreational driving and obey allposted regulations.

. Do not damage shrubs, flowers,trees, or grasses or disturb wildlife.

. Do not park over things that burn.See Parking over Things That Burn0 212.

Driving on Hills

Driving safely on hills requires goodjudgement and an understanding ofwhat the vehicle can and cannot do.

{ Warning

Many hills are simply too steep forany vehicle. Driving up hills cancause the vehicle to stall. Drivingdown hills can cause loss of control.Driving across hills can cause arollover. You could be injured orkilled. Do not drive on steep hills.

Before driving on a hill, assess thesteepness, traction, and obstructions.If the terrain ahead cannot be seen,get out of the vehicle and walk the hillbefore driving further.

When driving on hills:

. Use a low gear and keep a firmgrip on the steering wheel.

. Maintain a slow speed.

. When possible, drive straight upor down the hill.

. Slow down when approaching thetop of the hill.

. Use headlamps even during theday to make the vehicle morevisible.

{ Warning

Driving to the top of a hill at highspeed can cause an accident. Therecould be a drop-off, embankment,cliff, or even another vehicle. Youcould be seriously injured or killed.As you near the top of a hill, slowdown and stay alert.

. Never go downhill forward orbackward with either thetransmission or transfer case inN (Neutral). The brakes couldoverheat and you could losecontrol.



{ Warning

If the vehicle has the two-speedautomatic transfer case, shifting thetransfer case to N (Neutral) cancause your vehicle to roll even ifthe transmission is in P (Park). Thisis because the N (Neutral) positionon the transfer case overrides thetransmission. You or someone elsecould be injured. If leaving thevehicle, set the parking brake andshift the transmission to P (Park).Shift the transfer case to anyposition but N (Neutral).

. When driving down a hill, keepthe vehicle headed straight down.Use a low gear because the enginewill work with the brakes to slowthe vehicle and help keep thevehicle under control.

{ Warning

Heavy braking when going down ahill can cause your brakes tooverheat and fade. This could causeloss of control and you or otherscould be injured or killed. Apply thebrakes lightly when descending ahill and use a low gear to keepvehicle speed under control.

If the vehicle stalls on a hill:

1. Apply the brakes to stop thevehicle, and then apply theparking brake.

2. Shift into P (Park) and thenrestart the engine.

. If driving uphill when thevehicle stalls, shift toR (Reverse), release theparking brake, and reversestraight down.

. Never try to turn the vehiclearound. If the hill is steepenough to stall the vehicle, itis steep enough to cause it toroll over.

. If you cannot make it up thehill, back straight downthe hill.

. Never reverse down a hill inN (Neutral) using only thebrake.

The vehicle can roll backwardquickly and you could losecontrol.

. If driving downhill when thevehicle stalls, shift to a lowergear, release the parkingbrake, and drive straightdown the hill.

3. If the vehicle cannot be restartedafter stalling, apply the parkingbrake, shift into P (Park), andturn the vehicle off.

3.1. Leave the vehicle andseek help.

3.2. Stay clear of the path thevehicle would take if itrolled downhill.

. Avoid turns that take the vehicleacross the incline of the hill. A hillthat can be driven straight up ordown might be too steep to driveacross. Driving across an incline



puts more weight on the downhillwheels, which could cause adownhill slide or a roll-over.

. Surface conditions can be aproblem. Loose gravel, muddyspots, or even wet grass can causethe tyres to slip sideways,downhill. If the vehicle slipssideways, it can hit something thatwill trip it - a rock, a rut, etc. - androll over.

. Hidden obstacles can make thesteepness of the incline moresevere. If a rock is driven acrosswith the uphill wheels, or if thedownhill wheels drop into a rut ordepression, the vehicle can tilteven more.

. If an incline must be drivenacross, and the vehicle starts toslide, turn downhill. This shouldhelp straighten out the vehicle andprevent the side slipping.

{ Warning

Getting out of the vehicle on thedownhill side when stopped acrossan incline is dangerous. If thevehicle rolls over, you could becrushed or killed. Always get out onthe uphill side of the vehicle andstay well clear of the rollover path.

Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow,or Ice

Use a low gear when driving in mud –the deeper the mud, the lower thegear. Keep the vehicle moving to avoidgetting stuck.

Traction changes when driving onsand. On loose sand, such as onbeaches or sand dunes, the tyres tendto sink into the sand. This affectssteering, accelerating, and braking.Drive at a reduced speed and avoidsharp turns or abrupt manoeuvres.

Traction is reduced on hard packedsnow and ice and it is easy to losecontrol. Reduce vehicle speed whendriving on hard packed snow and ice.

{ Warning

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,or rivers can be dangerous. Iceconditions vary greatly and thevehicle could fall through the ice;you and your passengers coulddrown. Drive your vehicle on safesurfaces only.

Driving in Water

{ Warning

Driving through rushing water canbe dangerous. Deep water cansweep your vehicle downstream andyou and your passengers coulddrown. If it is only shallow water, itcan still wash away the groundfrom under your tyres. Tractioncould be lost, and the vehicle couldroll over. Do not drive throughrushing water.



Caution

Do not drive through standingwater if it is deep enough to coverthe wheel hubs, axles, or exhaustpipe. Deep water can damage theaxle and other vehicle parts.

If the standing water is not too deep,drive slowly through it. At fasterspeeds, water splashes and the vehiclecan stall. When going through water,the brakes get wet and it may takelonger to stop. See “Driving on WetRoads” later in this section.

After Off-Road Driving

Remove any brush or debris that hascollected on the underbody or chassis,or under the bonnet. Theseaccumulations can be a fire hazard.

After operation in mud or sand, havethe brake linings cleaned and checked.These substances can cause glazingand uneven braking. Check the bodystructure, steering, suspension,wheels, tyres, and exhaust system fordamage and check the fuel lines andcooling system for any leakage.

More frequent maintenance service isrequired.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reduce vehicletraction and affect your ability to stopand accelerate. Always drive slower inthese types of driving conditions andavoid driving through large puddlesand deep-standing or flowing water.

{ Warning

Wet brakes can cause crashes. Theymight not work as well in a quickstop and could cause pulling to oneside. You could lose control of thevehicle.

After driving through a large puddleof water or a car/vehicle wash,lightly apply the brake pedal untilthe brakes work normally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicle

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

occupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and be verycautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Aquaplaning

Aquaplaning is dangerous. Water canbuild up under the vehicle's tyres sothey actually ride on the water. Thiscan happen if the road is wet enoughand you are going fast enough. Whenthe vehicle is aquaplaning, it has littleor no contact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule aboutaquaplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:

. Allow extra following distance.

. Overtake with caution.

. Keep windscreen wipingequipment in good condition.



. Keep the windscreen washer fluidreservoir filled.

. Have good tyres with proper treaddepth. See Tyres 0 304.

. Turn off cruise control.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than driving onflat or rolling terrain. Tips include:

. Keep the vehicle serviced and ingood shape.

. Check all fluid levels and brakes,tyres, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ Warning

Using the brakes to slow the vehicleon a long downhill slope can causebrake overheating, can reduce brakeperformance, and could result in aloss of braking. Shift the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

transmission to a lower gear to letthe engine assist the brakes on asteep downhill slope.

{ Warning

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) orwith the ignition off is dangerous.This can cause overheating of thebrakes and loss of steering. Alwayshave the engine running and thevehicle in gear.

. Drive at speeds that keep thevehicle in its own lane. Do notswing wide or cross thecentre line.

. Be alert on top of hills; somethingcould be in your lane (e.g., stalledcar, accident).

. Pay attention to special road signs(e.g., falling rocks area, windingroads, long gradients, overtakingor no-overtaking zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Snow or ice between the tyres and theroad creates less traction or grip, sodrive carefully. Wet ice can occur atabout 0 °C (32 °F) when freezing rainbegins to fall. Avoid driving on wet iceor in freezing rain until roads can betreated.

For Slippery Road Driving:

. Accelerate gently. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetyres slick.

. Turn on Traction Control. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 226.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)improves vehicle stability duringhard stops, but the brakes shouldbe applied sooner than when ondry pavement. See Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) 0 223.

. Allow greater following distanceand watch for slippery spots. Icypatches can occur on otherwiseclear roads in shaded areas. The



surface of a curve or an overpasscan remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear. Avoidsudden steering manoeuvres andbraking while on ice.

. Turn off cruise control.

Blizzard Conditions

Stop the vehicle in a safe place andsignal for help. Stay with the vehicleunless there is help nearby. To gethelp and keep everyone in thevehicle safe:


. Tie a red cloth to an outsidemirror.

{ Warning

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This may causeexhaust gases to get inside. Engineexhaust contains carbon monoxide(CO), which cannot be seen orsmelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

If the vehicle is stuck in snow:

. Clear snow from the base ofthe vehicle, especially anyblocking the exhaust pipe.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the vehicle side thatis away from the wind, tobring in fresh air.


. Adjust the climate controlsystem to circulate the airinside the vehicle and set thefan speed to the highestsetting. See “Climate ControlSystems.”

For more information about CO, seeEngine Exhaust 0 213.

To save fuel, run the engine for shortperiods to warm the vehicle and thenshut the engine off and partially closethe window. Moving about to keepwarm also helps.

If it takes time for help to arrive,when running the engine, push theaccelerator pedal slightly so theengine runs faster than the idle speed.This keeps the battery charged torestart the vehicle and to signal forhelp with the headlamps. Do this aslittle as possible, to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin the wheelsto free the vehicle when stuck in sand,mud, ice, or snow. See “Rocking theVehicle to Get It Out” later in thissection.

The Traction Control System (TCS)can often help to free a stuck vehicle.See Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 226. If TCS cannot free thevehicle, see “Rocking the Vehicle toGet it Out” following.

{ Warning

If the vehicle's tyres spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you orothers could be injured. The vehiclecan overheat, causing an engine

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

compartment fire or other damage.Spin the wheels as little as possibleand avoid going above 56 km/h(35 mph).

For information about using tyrechains on the vehicle, see Tyre Chains0 316.

Rocking the Vehicle to Get It Out

Turn the steering wheel left and rightto clear the area around the frontwheels. For four-wheel-drive vehicles,shift into Four-Wheel Drive High.Turn the TCS off. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a forwardgear, spinning the wheels as little aspossible. To prevent transmissionwear, wait until the wheels stopspinning before shifting gears. Slowlyspinning the wheels in the forwardand reverse directions causes arocking motion that could free thevehicle. If that does not get thevehicle out after a few tries, it mightneed to be towed out. See Towing theVehicle 0 330.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle can carry.This weight is called the vehiclecapacity weight and includes theweight of all occupants, cargo, andall non-factory-installed options.Two labels on the vehicle mayshow how much weight it wasdesigned to carry, the Tyre andLoading Information label and theCertification/Tyre label.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front orrear Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). This can causesystems to break and changethe way the vehicle handles.This could cause loss of controland a crash. Overloading can

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

also reduce stopping distance,damage the tyres, and shortenthe life of the vehicle.

Tyre and Loading Information Label

Label Example

A vehicle specific Tyre andLoading Information label isattached to the centre pillar(B-pillar). The tyre and loadinginformation label shows thenumber of occupant seating



positions (1), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (2) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tyre and Loading Informationlabel also shows the size of theoriginal equipment tyres (3) andthe recommended cold tyreinflation pressures (4). For moreinformation on tyres and inflationsee Tyres 0 304 and Tyre Pressure0 306.

There is also important loadinginformation on the vehicleCertification/Tyre label. It mayshow the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for thefront and rear axles. See“Certification/Tyre Label” later inthis section.

“Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit–

1. Locate the statement “Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs.” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weightof the driver and passengersfrom XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity. Forexample, if the “XXX” amountequals 1400 lbs. and therewill be five 150 lb passengersin your vehicle, the amountof available cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lbs.(1400-750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine howthis reduces the availablecargo and luggage loadcapacity of your vehicle.”

See Trailer Towing 0 259 for importantinformation on towing a trailer,towing safety rules, and trailering tips.



Example 1

1. Maximum Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 1 =453 kg (1,000 lbs)

2. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg(300 lbs)

3. Available Occupant and CargoWeight = 317 kg (700 lbs)

Example 2

1. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 2 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs)

2. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 136 kg(750 lbs)

3. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs)

Example 3

1. Maximum Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 3 =453 kg (1,000 lbs)

2. Subtract Occupant Weight @91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs)

3. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs)

Refer to the vehicle's Tyre andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combined



weight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceed thevehicle's capacity weight.

Certification/Tyre Label

Label Example

A vehicle specific Certification/Tyre label is attached to theB-pillar. The label may show thesize of the vehicle's original tyresand the inflation pressures neededto obtain the gross weightcapacity of the vehicle. This iscalled Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR). The GVWRincludes the weight of the vehicle,all occupants, fuel, and cargo.

The Certification/Tyre label mayalso show the maximum weightsfor the front and rear axles, calledGross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). To find out the actualloads on the front and rear axles,weigh the vehicle at a weighstation. Your dealer can help withthis. Be sure to spread the loadequally on both sides of thecentre line.

The warranty does not cover partsor components that fail because ofoverloading.

The label will help determine howmuch cargo and installedequipment the vehicle can carry.

Using heavier suspensioncomponents to get addeddurability might not change theweight ratings. Ask your dealer tohelp load the vehicle properly.

{ Warning

Things you put inside thevehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop or turnor in a crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

. Never stack heavier things,like suitcases, inside thevehicle so that some ofthem are above the tops ofthe seats.

. Do not leave an unsecuredchild restraint in thevehicle.

. When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secure itwhenever you can.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless you need to.



There is also important loadinginformation for off-road driving inthis manual. See “Loading theVehicle for Off-Road Driving”under Off-Road Driving 0 195.

Add-On Equipment

There may be a limit on howmany people can be inside thevehicle when carrying removableitems. Be sure to weigh the vehiclebefore buying and installing thenew equipment.

Caution

Overloading the vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty. Donot overload the vehicle.

Remember not to exceed theGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)of the front or rear axle.

Automatic Level Control

See Automatic Level Control 0 230.

If a weight-distributing hitch isbeing used, it is recommended toallow the shocks to inflate,thereby levelling the vehicle priorto adjusting the height. See“Hitches” under Towing Equipment0 262.

Starting and Operating

New Vehicle Run-In

Caution

The vehicle does not need anelaborate run-in. But it will performbetter in the long run if you followthese guidelines:

. Keep the vehicle speed at88 km/h (55 mph) or less forthe first 805 km (500 mi).

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km (500 mi).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200 mi) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow this

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

breaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringrun-in. See Trailer Towing0 259 for the trailer towingcapabilities of the vehicle andmore information.

Following run-in, engine speed andload can be gradually increased.

Adjustable Throttle andBrake PedalIf equipped, the position of thethrottle and brake pedals can bechanged.

The pedals can only be adjusted whenthe vehicle is in P (Park).

Press the top of the switch to movethe pedals closer to your body. Pressthe bottom of the switch to move thepedals away.

Before you start driving, fully pressthe brake pedal to confirm theadjustment is right for you.

The vehicle may have a memoryfunction, which lets pedal settings besaved and recalled. See Memory Seats0 60.

Ignition Positions

Vehicle is equipped with KeylessAccess and has pushbutton starting.

The transmitter must be in the vehiclefor the system to operate. If thepushbutton start is not working, thevehicle may be near a strong radioantenna signal causing interference tothe Keyless Access system. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation0 28.

To shift out of P (Park), the vehiclemust be in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN and the brake pedal must beapplied.



Stopping the Engine/LOCK/OFF (NoIndicator Lights) : When the vehicleis stopped, press ENGINE START/STOP once to turn the engine off.

If the vehicle is in P (Park), theignition will turn off, and RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) 0 210.

If the vehicle is not in P (Park), theignition will return to ACC/ACCESSORY and display the messageSHIFT TO PARK in the DriverInformation Centre (DIC). SeeTransmission Messages 0 160. Whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park), theignition system will switch to OFF.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brake andsteering systems and disable theairbags.

The vehicle may have an electricsteering column lock. The lock isactivated when the vehicle is switchedto OFF and either front door isopened. A sound may be heard as thelock actuates or releases. The steeringcolumn lock may not release with the

wheels turned off centre. If thishappens, the vehicle may not start.Move the steering wheel from left toright while attempting to start thevehicle. If this does not work, thevehicle needs service.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle to asafe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shift toP (Park) and turn the ignition toOFF. On vehicles with anautomatic transmission, the gearlever must be in P (Park) to turnthe ignition switch to the OFFposition.

4. Apply the parking brake. SeeParking Brake 0 223.

{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassistance in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut the vehicleoff in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,press and hold ENGINE START/STOPfor longer than two seconds, or presstwice in five seconds.

ACC/ACCESSORY (Amber IndicatorLight) : This mode allows someelectrical accessories to be used whenthe engine is off.

With the ignition off, pressing thebutton once without the brake pedalapplied will place the ignition systemin ACC/ACCESSORY.

The ignition will switch from ACC/ACCESSORY to OFF after five minutesto prevent battery rundown.



ON/RUN/START (Green IndicatorLight) : This mode is for driving andstarting. With the ignition off, and thebrake pedal applied, pressing thebutton once will place the ignitionsystem in ON/RUN/START. Onceengine cranking begins, release thebutton. Engine cranking will continueuntil the engine starts. See Starting theEngine 0 209. The ignition will thenremain in ON/RUN.

Service Only Mode

This power mode is available forservice and diagnostics, and to verifythe proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp as may berequired for emission inspectionpurposes. With the vehicle off, and thebrake pedal not applied, pressing andholding the button for more thanfive seconds will place the vehicle inService Only Mode. The instrumentsand audio systems will operate as theydo in ON/RUN, but the vehicle willnot be able to be driven. The enginewill not start in Service Only Mode.Press the button again to turn thevehicle off.

Starting the EngineMove the gear lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Caution

Do not try to shift to P (Park) if thevehicle is moving. If you do, youcould damage the transmission.Shift to P (Park) only when thevehicle is stopped.

Caution

If you add electrical parts oraccessories, you could change theway the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty. SeeAdd-On Electrical Equipment 0 267.

Starting Procedure

1. With the Keyless Access system,the RKE transmitter must be inthe vehicle. Press ENGINESTART/STOP with the brakepedal applied. When the enginebegins cranking, let go of thebutton.

The idle speed will go down asthe engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it.

If the RKE transmitter is not inthe vehicle, if there isinterference, or if the RKEbattery is low, the DriverInformation Centre (DIC) willdisplay a message. See Key andLock Messages 0 155.

Caution

Cranking the engine for longperiods of time, by returning theignition to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damage

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

the cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start afterfive to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18 °Cor 0 °F), it could be flooded withtoo much petrol. Try pushing theaccelerator pedal all the way tothe floor and holding it there asyou press ENGINE START/STOP,for up to a maximum of15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, toallow the cranking motor to cooldown. When the engine starts,let go of the button, and theaccelerator. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again, dothe same thing. This clears theextra petrol from the engine. Donot race the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate the

engine and transmission gentlyuntil the oil warms up andlubricates all moving parts.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)The following vehicle accessories canbe used for up to 10 minutes after theengine is turned off:

. Audio System

. Power Windows

. OnStar System (if equipped)

. Sunroof (if equipped)

. Accessory Power Outlets. Theconsole and centre seat outlets areRetained Accessory Power (RAP)powered.

These features work when the ignitionis in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.Once the ignition is turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, the windows andsunroof continue to work up to10 minutes until any door is opened.The radio continues to work for up to10 minutes or until the driver door isopened.

Shifting Into Park

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If the vehicle has afour-wheel-drive transfer case witha N (Neutral) position, and thetransfer case is in N (Neutral), thevehicle will be free to roll, even ifthe gear lever is in P (Park). Be surethe transfer case is in a drive gear.If towing a trailer, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips0 256.

1. Hold the brake pedal down, thenset the parking brake.

See Parking Brake 0 223.



2. Move the shift lever into theP (Park) position by pulling theshift lever toward you andmoving it up as far as it will go.

3. Be sure the transfer case is in adrive gear — not in N (Neutral).

4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenly ifthe shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set.

If you have four-wheel drive andthe transfer case is in N (Neutral),the vehicle will be free to roll, evenif the shift lever is in P (Park). So besure the transfer case is in a drivegear - not in N (Neutral).

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

And, if you leave the vehicle withthe engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do notleave the vehicle with the enginerunning unless you have to.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and the parkingbrake is firmly applied before youleave it. After you move the shift leverinto P (Park), hold the regular brakepedal down. Then, see if you canmove the shift lever away fromP (Park) without first pulling it towardyou. If you can, it means that the shiftlever was not fully locked intoP (Park).

Torque Lock

If you are parking on a hill and you donot shift the transmission intoP (Park) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force onthe parking pawl in the transmission.You may find it difficult to pull the

shift lever out of P (Park). This iscalled torque lock. To prevent torquelock, apply the parking brake and thenshift into P (Park) properly before youleave the driver seat. To find out how,see Shifting Into Park 0 210.

When you are ready to drive, movethe shift lever out of P (Park) beforeyou release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you mayneed to have another vehicle pushyours a little uphill to take some ofthe pressure from the parking pawl inthe transmission. You will then beable to pull the gear lever out ofP (Park).

Shifting out of ParkThis vehicle is equipped with anelectronic shift lock release system.The shift lock release is designed toprevent movement of the gear leverout of P (Park), unless the ignition isin ON/RUN and the regular brakepedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9 volt) battery.



If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting 0 327.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Ease the pressure on the shiftlever.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, push the gear lever all theway into P (Park).

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you are still having a problemshifting, then have the vehicleserviced soon.

Parking

{ Warning

Do not park the vehicle on an easilyignitable surface. The hightemperature of the exhaust systemcould ignite the surface.

Always apply parking brake. SeeParking Brake or Electric ParkingBrake.

Switch off the engine.

If the vehicle is on a level surface oruphill slope, engage 1 (First) gear orset the selector lever to P (Park)before switching off the ignition. Onan uphill slope, turn the frontwheels away from the kerb.

If the vehicle is on a downhill slope,engage R (Reverse) gear or set theselector lever to P (Park) beforeswitching off the ignition. Turn thefront wheels towards the kerb.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Switch off the ignition. Turn thesteering wheel until the steeringwheel lock engages. Turn theignition key to position OFF andremove it. Turn the steering wheeluntil the steering wheel lock is feltto engage.

For vehicles with automatictransmission, the key can only beremoved when the selector lever isin the P (Park) position.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ Warning

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under the vehicleand ignite. Do not park over papers,leaves, dry grass, or other thingsthat can burn.



Active Fuel ManagementThis system allows the engine tooperate on either all or half of itscylinders, depending on the drivingconditions.

When less power is required, such ascruising at a constant vehicle speed,the system will operate in the halfcylinder mode, allowing the vehicle toachieve better fuel economy. Whengreater power demands are required,such as accelerating from a stop,overtaking, or merging onto a freeway,the system will maintain full-cylinderoperation.

Extended ParkingIt is better not to park with thevehicle running. If the vehicle is leftwhile running, follow the proper stepsto be sure the vehicle will not moveand there is adequate ventilation.See Shifting Into Park 0 210 and EngineExhaust 0 213.

If the vehicle is left in P (Park) whilerunning and the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter is outside thevehicle, the vehicle will turn off afterone hour.

If the vehicle is left in P (Park) whilerunning and the RKE transmitter isinside, the vehicle will run for twohours. At the end of the second hour,the vehicle will turn off.

The timer will reset if the vehicle istaken out of P (Park) while it isrunning.

Engine Exhaust

{ Warning

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO), which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:

. The vehicle idles in areas withpoor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or exhaust pipes).

. The exhaust smells or soundsstrange or different.

. The exhaust system leaks dueto corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damaged,or improperly repaired.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected or ifit is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with thewindows completely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosed areasuch as a garage or a building thathas no fresh air ventilation.

Running the Vehicle WhileParkedIt is better not to park with the enginerunning.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps to besure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park 0 210 and EngineExhaust 0 213.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips 0 256.

Automatic TransmissionIf equipped, there is an electronic gearlever position indicator within theinstrument cluster. This display comeson when the ignition is turned to theON/RUN position.

There are several different positionsfor the shift lever.

See “Range Selection Mode” underManual Mode 0 217.

P : This position locks the rear wheels.It is the best position to use whenstarting the engine because thevehicle cannot move easily. Whenparked on a hill, especially when thevehicle has a heavy load, you mightnotice an increase in the effort to shiftout of P (Park). See “Torque Lock”under Shifting Into Park 0 210.



{ Warning

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly applied. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others couldbe injured. To be sure the vehiclewill not move, even when you areon fairly level ground, always setthe parking brake and move theshift lever to P (Park). See ShiftingInto Park 0 210 and DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips0 256.

{ Warning

If you have four-wheel drive, thevehicle will be free to roll — even ifthe gear lever is in P (Park) — if thetransfer case is in N (Neutral). So,

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

be sure the transfer case is in adrive gear, Two-Wheel Drive Highor Four-Wheel Drive High orFour-Wheel Drive Low — not inN (Neutral). See Shifting Into Park0 210.

R : Use this gear to reverse.

Caution

Shifting to R (Reverse) while thevehicle is moving forward coulddamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Shift toR (Reverse) only after the vehicle isstopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see If theVehicle Is Stuck 0 201.

N : In this position, the engine doesnot connect with the wheels. Torestart when you are already moving,

use N (Neutral) only. Also, useN (Neutral) when the vehicle is beingtowed.

{ Warning

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shift intoa drive gear while the engine isrunning at high speed.

Caution

Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the engine runningat high speed may damage thetransmission. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehicle warranty.Be sure the engine is not running athigh speed when shifting thevehicle.



D : This position is for normal driving.It provides the best fuel economy.If you need more power forovertaking, and you are:

. Going less than about 55 km/h(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator all theway down.

By doing this, the vehicle shiftsdown to the next gear and hasmore power.

Use D (Drive) and Tow/Haul Modewhen towing a trailer, carrying aheavy load, driving on steep hills,or driving off-road. Shift thetransmission to a lower gear selectionif the transmission shifts too often.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding. See “Skidding” under Lossof Control 0 194.

The vehicle has a shift stabilisationfeature that adjusts the transmissionshifting to the current drivingconditions in order to reduce rapidupshifts and downshifts. This shift

stabilisation feature is designed todetermine, before making an upshift,if the engine is able to maintainvehicle speed by analysing things suchas vehicle speed, throttle position, andvehicle load. If the shift stabilisationfeature determines that a currentvehicle speed cannot be maintained,the transmission does not upshift andinstead holds the current gear. Insome cases, this could appear to be adelayed shift, however thetransmission is operating normally.

The transmission uses adaptive shiftcontrols. The adaptive shift controlprocess continually compares key shiftparameters to pre-programmed idealshifts stored in the transmission'scomputer. The transmissionconstantly makes adjustments toimprove vehicle performanceaccording to how the vehicle is beingused, such as with a heavy load orwhen the temperature changes.During this adaptive shift controlprocess, shifting might feel differentas the transmission determines thebest settings.

When temperatures are very cold, thetransmission's gear shifting could bedelayed providing more stable shiftsuntil the engine warms up. Shiftscould be more noticeable with a coldtransmission. This difference inshifting is normal.

L : This position allows selection of arange of gears appropriate for currentdriving conditions. If equipped, see“Range Selection Mode” under ManualMode 0 217.

Caution

Spinning the tyres or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill usingonly the accelerator pedal maydamage the transmission. Therepair will not be covered by thevehicle warranty. If the vehicle isstuck, do not spin the tyres. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakes tohold the vehicle in place.

Normal Mode Grade Braking

This mode is enabled when thevehicle is started, but is not enabledin Range Selection Mode. It assists in



maintaining desired vehicle speedswhen driving on downhill grades byusing the engine and transmission toslow the vehicle. The first time thesystem engages for each ignitioncycle, a DIC message will be displayed.See Transmission Messages 0 160.

To disable or enable Normal ModeGrade Braking within the currentignition cycle, press and hold theTow/Haul button for five seconds.When the button is released, therequested mode change is made.A DIC message displays. SeeTransmission Messages 0 160.

For other forms of grade braking, seeTow/Haul Mode 0 218 and CruiseControl 0 230.

Kickdown Mode

The accelerator pedal provides anadditional downshift after pressingthrough the kickdown feature.

It requires extra pedal pressure nearthe end of its travel to engage.

Manual Mode

Range Selection Mode

If equipped, Range Selection Modehelps control the vehicle'stransmission and vehicle speed whiledriving downhill or towing a trailer byletting you select a desired range ofgears.

To use this feature:

1. Move the gear lever to L(Manual Mode).

2. Tap the plus/minus buttons onthe gear lever to select thedesired range of gears for currentdriving conditions. Or, hold theplus/minus buttons to select thehighest or lowest range availablefor the current vehicle speed.

When the gear lever is moved from D(Drive) to L (Manual Mode), a numberdisplays next to the L, indicating thecurrent transmission range.

This number is the highest gear thatthe transmission will command whileoperating in L (Manual Mode). Allgears below that number are available.As driving conditions change, thetransmission can automatically shiftto lower gears. For example, when 5(Fifth) is selected, 1 (First) through 5(Fifth) gears are automatically shiftedby the transmission, but 6 (Sixth)cannot be used until the plus/minusbutton on the gear lever is used tochange to the range.

In vehicles with gasoline engines,when the gear lever is moved from D(Drive) to L (Manual Mode), adownshift may occur. The gear thatthe transmission is operating in whenthe gear lever is moved from D (Drive)to L (Manual Mode) determines if adownshift occurs. See the followingchart.



Gear before shiftingfrom D (Drive) to L(Manual Mode)

8th 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st

Range after shiftingfrom D (Drive) to L(Manual Mode) –Tow/Haul notengaged

L6 L6 L5 L4 L3 L3 L2 L1

Range after shiftingfrom D (Drive) to L(Manual Mode) –Tow/Haul engaged

L6 L5 L4 L3 L3 L3 L2 L1

Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active. SeeTow/Haul Mode 0 218.

While using Range Selection Mode,cruise control and the Tow/Haul Modecan be used.

Caution

Spinning the tyres or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill usingonly the accelerator pedal maydamage the transmission. The

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

repair will not be covered by thevehicle warranty. If the vehicle isstuck, do not spin the tyres. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakes tohold the vehicle in place.

Low Traction Mode

Low Traction Mode assists in vehicleacceleration when road conditions areslippery, such as with ice or snow.While the vehicle is at a stop, select

L2 using Range Selection Mode. Thiswill limit torque to the wheels andhelp to prevent the tyres fromspinning.

Tow/Haul Mode

The Tow/Haul Mode adjusts thetransmission shift pattern to reduceshift cycling. This provides increasedperformance, vehicle control, andenhanced transmission and enginecooling when driving down steep hillsor mountain grades, towing,or hauling heavy loads.



The selector button is on the end ofthe gear lever. Turn the Tow/HaulMode on and off by pressing thebutton. When the Tow/Haul Mode isenabled, a light on the instrumentcluster will come on.

See Tow/Haul Mode Light 0 141 andHill and Mountain Roads 0 200.

Also see “Tow/Haul Mode” underDriver Mode Control 0 228.

Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking

Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking is onlyenabled while the Tow/Haul Mode isselected and the vehicle is not in theRange Selection Mode. See “Tow/HaulMode” listed previously and ManualMode 0 217. Tow/Haul Mode GradeBraking assists in maintaining desiredvehicle speeds when driving ondownhill grades by using the engineand transmission to slow the vehicle.

To disable or enable Tow/Haul GradeBraking within the current ignitioncycle, press and hold the Tow/Haulbutton for five seconds. When thebutton is released, the requested modechange is made. A DIC message isdisplayed. See Transmission Messages0 160.

See Towing Equipment 0 262.

For other forms of grade braking, seeAutomatic Transmission 0 214 andCruise Control 0 230.

Drive Systems

Four-Wheel DriveIf equipped, four-wheel drive engagesthe front axle for extra traction.

Caution

Do not drive on clean, dry

pavement in 4 m and 4 n (ifequipped) for an extended period oftime. These conditions may causepremature wear on the vehicle'spowertrain.

Driving on clean, dry pavement in 4HIor 4LO may:

. Cause a vibration to be felt in thesteering system.

. Cause tyres to wear faster.

. Make the transfer case harder toshift, and cause it to run noisier.



{ Warning

Shifting the transfer case toN (Neutral) can cause the vehicle toroll even if the transmission is inP (Park). You or someone else couldbe seriously injured. Be sure toapply the parking brake beforeplacing the transfer case inN (Neutral). See Parking Brake0 223.

Caution

Extended high-speed operation in 4n may damage or shorten the life ofthe drivetrain.

Engagement noise and bump whenshifting between 4 n and 4 m or fromN (Neutral), with the engine running,is normal.

Shifting into 4 n will turn TractionControl and StabiliTrak® off. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 226.

Automatic Transfer Case

If equipped, use the transfer case knobnext to the steering wheel to shift intoand out of four-wheel drive.

All of the lights will blink on then offmomentarily when the ignition ismoved to the ON/RUN position. Thelight that remains on will indicate thestate of the Transfer Case.

If the indicator mark on the switchdoes not match up with the light thenthat likely means the switch wasmoved when the ignition was off.

The indicator mark on the switchmust line up with the indicator lightbefore a shift can be commanded. To

command a shift rotate the transfercase switch to the new desiredposition. The light will blink meaningthat the shift is in progress. When theshift is completed the new positionwill be illuminated. If the transfer casecan not complete a shift command, itwill go back to its last chosen setting.

The settings are:

N (Neutral) : Use only when thevehicle needs to be towed. See Towingthe Vehicle 0 330.

2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High) : Use fordriving on most streets andmotorways. The front axle is notengaged. This setting provides thebest fuel economy.

AUTO (Automatic Four-WheelDrive) : Use when road surfacetraction conditions are variable. Whendriving in AUTO, the front axle isengaged, and the vehicle's power issent to the front and rear wheelsautomatically based on drivingconditions. This setting providesslightly lower fuel economy than 2 m.



Do not use AUTO mode, if equipped,to park on a steep gradient with poortraction such as ice, snow, mud,or gravel. In AUTO mode only the rearwheels will hold the vehicle fromsliding when parked. If parking on asteep gradient, use 4 m to keep all fourwheels engaged.

4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High) : Usethis position when extra traction isneeded, such as when driving onsnowy or icy roads, when off-roading,or when ploughing snow.

4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low) : Thissetting engages the front axle anddelivers extra torque. Choose 4 n whendriving off-road in deep sand, deepmud, or deep snow, and whileclimbing or descending steep hills.

Shifting into 4 n will turn TractionControl and StabiliTrak off. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 226.

Shifting Into 4 m or AUTO

Turn the knob to the 4 m or AUTOposition at any speed, except from 4 n.The indicator light will flash whileshifting and will remain on when theshift is completed.

Shifting Into 2 m

Turn the knob to 2 m at any speed,

except when shifting from 4 n. Theindicator light will flash while shiftingand will remain on when the shift iscompleted.

Shifting Into 4 n

When 4 n is engaged, keep vehiclespeed below 72 km/h (45 mph).

To shift:

1. The ignition must be in ON/RUNand the vehicle must be stoppedor moving less than 5 km/h(3 mph) with the transmission inN (Neutral). It is best for thevehicle to be moving 1.6 to3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph).

2. Turn the knob to 4 n. Wait for

the 4 n indicator light to stopflashing before shifting thetransmission into gear.

Caution

Shifting the transmission into gearbefore the requested mode indicatorlight has stopped flashing coulddamage the transfer case.

If the transmission is in gear and/ormoving more than 5 km/h (3 mph),the 4 n indicator light will flash for30 seconds and not complete theshift. After 30 seconds the transfercase will shift to 4 m. Turn the knob to

4 m to display the indicator. With thevehicle moving less than 5 km/h(3 mph), and the transmission inN (Neutral), attempt the shift again.

Shifting Out of 4 nTo shift:

1. The vehicle must be stopped ormoving less than 5 km/h (3 mph)with the transmission in



N (Neutral) and the ignition inON/RUN. It is best for thevehicle to be moving 1.6 to3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph).

2. Turn the knob to 4 m, AUTO, or 2m. Wait for the 4 m, AUTO, or 2 mindicator light to stop flashingbefore shifting the transmissioninto gear.

Caution

Shifting the transmission into gearbefore the requested mode indicatorlight has stopped flashing coulddamage the transfer case.

If the transmission is in gear and/ormoving more than 5 km/h (3 mph),the 4 m, AUTO, or 2 m indicator lightwill flash for 30 seconds but will notcomplete the shift. With the vehiclemoving less than 5 km/h (3 mph), andthe transmission in N (Neutral),attempt the shift again.

Shifting Into N (Neutral)

To shift into N (Neutral):

1. Park the vehicle on a levelsurface.

2. Apply the parking brake andpress and hold the brake pedal.See Parking Brake 0 223.

3. Start the vehicle or turn theignition to ON/RUN.

4. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

5. Shift the transfer case to 2 m.6. Turn the transfer case knob

clockwise to N (Neutral) until itstops and hold it there until theN (Neutral) light starts blinking.This will take at least10 seconds. Then slowly releasethe knob to the 4 n position. TheN (Neutral) light will come onwhen the transfer case shift toN (Neutral) is complete.

7. With the engine running, verifythat the transfer case is inN (Neutral) by shifting thetransmission to R (Reverse), thenshift the transmission to D

(Drive). There should be nomovement of the vehicle whileshifting the transmission.

8. Turn the engine off, and theignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

9. Place the transmission shift leverin P (Park).


Shifting Out of N (Neutral)

To shift out of N (Neutral):

1. Apply the parking brake andapply the brake pedal.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUNwith the engine off.

3. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

4. Turn the transfer case knob tothe desired setting.

After the transfer case hasshifted out of N (Neutral), theN (Neutral) light will go out.

5. Release the parking brake.

6. Start the engine and shift thetransmission to the desired gear.



Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has an Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advanced electronicbraking system that helps prevent abraking skid.

When the vehicle begins to driveaway, ABS checks itself. A momentarymotor or clicking noise may be heardwhile this test is going on, and it mayeven be noticed that the brake pedalmoves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Light0 141.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking to avoid

a sudden obstacle, a computer sensesthe wheels are slowing down. If one ofthe wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressure toeach wheel, as required, faster thanany driver could. This can help yousteer around the obstacle whilebraking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updates onwheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not change thetime needed to get a foot up to thebrake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get too closeto the vehicle in front of you, therewill not be enough time to apply thebrakes if that vehicle suddenly slowsor stops. Always leave enough roomup ahead to stop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just hold thebrake pedal down firmly and let ABSwork. You may hear the ABS pump ormotor operating and feel the brakepedal pulsate. This is normal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows you to steer and brake atthe same time. In many emergencies,steering can help more than even thevery best braking.

Parking Brake



Apply the parking brake by holdingthe regular brake pedal down, thenpushing down the parking brakepedal.

If the ignition is on, the brake systemwarning light will come on. See BrakeSystem Warning Light 0 139.

Caution

Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake system andcause premature wear or damage tobrake system parts. Make sure thatthe parking brake is fully releasedand the brake warning light is offbefore driving.

To release the parking brake, hold theregular brake pedal down, then pushdown momentarily on the parkingbrake pedal until you feel the pedalrelease. Slowly pull your foot up offthe parking brake pedal. If the parkingbrake is not released when you beginto drive, a DIC message will appearand a chime will sound warning youthat the parking brake is still on.

If you are towing a trailer and areparking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips 0 256.

Electric Parking Brake

If equipped with an Electric ParkingBrake (EPB), the switch is to the leftof the steering wheel on theinstrument panel, below the exteriorlamp controls. The EPB can always beactivated, even if the ignition is off. Toprevent draining the battery, avoidrepeated cycles of the EPB when theengine is not running.

The system has a red handbrakestatus light and an amber handbrakewarning light. See Electric ParkingBrake Light 0 140 and Service ElectricParking Brake Light 0 140. There arealso handbrake-related DriverInformation Centre (DIC) messages.See Brake System Messages 0 152. Incase of insufficient electrical power,the EPB cannot be applied or released.

Before leaving the vehicle, check thered handbrake status light to ensurethat the handbrake is applied.

EPB Apply

To apply the EPB:

1. Be sure the vehicle is at acomplete stop.

2. Lift up the EPB switchmomentarily.

The red handbrake status light willflash and then stay on once the EPB isfully applied. If the red handbrakestatus light flashes continuously, thenthe EPB is only partially applied orthere is a problem with the EPB.A DIC message will display. Releasethe EPB and try to apply it again.If the light does not come on, or keeps



flashing, have the vehicle serviced. Donot drive the vehicle if the redhandbrake status light is flashing. Seeyour dealer. See Electric Parking BrakeLight 0 140.

If the amber handbrake warning lightis on, lift up on the EPB switch andhold it up. Continue to hold theswitch until the red handbrake statuslight remains on. If the amberhandbrake warning light is on, seeyour dealer.

If the EPB is applied while the vehicleis moving, the vehicle will decelerateas long as the switch is held up. If theswitch is held up until the vehiclecomes to a stop, the EPB will remainapplied.

The vehicle may automatically applythe EPB in some situations when thevehicle is not moving. This is normal,and is done to periodically check thecorrect operation of the EPB system.

If the EPB fails to apply, the rearwheels should be blocked to preventvehicle movement.

EPB Release

To release the EPB:

1. Place the ignition in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/STARTposition.

2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

3. Push down momentarily on theEPB switch.

The EPB is released when the redhandbrake status light is off.

If the amber handbrake warning lightis on, release the EPB by pushingdown on the EPB switch and holdingit down. Continue to hold the switchuntil the red handbrake status light isoff. If either light stays on after releaseis attempted, see your dealer.

Caution

Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake system andcause premature wear or damage tobrake system parts. Make sure thatthe parking brake is fully releasedand the brake warning light is offbefore driving.

Automatic EPB Release

The EPB will automatically release ifthe vehicle is running, placed intogear and an attempt is made to driveaway. Avoid rapid acceleration whenthe EPB is applied, to preserve parkingbrake lining life.

If parking on a hill, or if the vehicle ispulling a trailer, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips 0 256.

Brake AssistThe Brake Assist feature is designed toassist the driver in stopping ordecreasing vehicle speed in emergencydriving conditions. This feature usesthe stability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system under conditionswhere the driver has quickly andforcefully applied the brake pedal inan attempt to quickly stop or slowdown the vehicle. The stability systemhydraulic brake control moduleincreases brake pressure at eachcorner of the vehicle until the ABSactivates. Minor brake pedal pulsationor pedal movement during this time isnormal and the driver should continue



to apply the brake pedal as the drivingsituation dictates. The Brake Assistfeature will automatically disengagewhen the brake pedal is released orbrake pedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist(HSA) feature, which may be usefulwhen the vehicle is stopped on agrade. This feature is designed toprevent the vehicle from rolling, eitherforward or rearward, during vehicledrive off. After you completely stopand hold the vehicle at a completestandstill on an incline, HSA willautomatically activate. During thetransition period between when yourelease the brake pedal and start toaccelerate to drive off on an incline,HSA holds the brake pressure for amaximum of two seconds to ensure

that there is no rolling. The brakeswill automatically release when theaccelerator pedal is applied within thetwo-second window. If the vehicle isequipped with the Integrated TrailerBrake Control (ITBC) system, HSAmay also apply the trailer brakes.It will not activate if the vehicle is in adrive gear and facing downhill or ifthe vehicle is facing uphill and inR (Reverse). There may be situationson minor hills (less than 5% gradient)with a loaded vehicle or while pullinga trailer where HSA may activate.

If you release the brake pedal andthen reapply the brake pedal whileHSA is activated, the brake pedaltypically feels firmer with less pedaltravel.

Ride Control Systems

Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control

System Operation

The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) and StabiliTrak®, anelectronic stability control system.These systems help limit wheel spinand assist the driver in maintainingcontrol, especially on slippery roadconditions.

TCS activates if it senses any of thedrive wheels are spinning or beginningto lose traction. When this happens,TCS applies the brakes to the spinningwheels and reduces engine power tolimit wheel spin.

StabiliTrak activates when the vehiclesenses a difference between theintended path and the direction thevehicle is actually travelling.StabiliTrak selectively applies brakingpressure to any one of the vehiclewheel brakes to assist the driver inkeeping the vehicle on the intendedpath. Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is



also on automatically when thevehicle is started. See Trailer SwayControl (TSC) 0 266.

If cruise control is being used andtraction control or StabiliTrak beginsto limit wheel spin, cruise control willdisengage. Cruise control may beturned back on when road conditionsallow.

Both systems come on automaticallywhen the vehicle is started and beginsto move. The systems may be heard orfelt while they are operating or whileperforming diagnostic checks. This isnormal and does not mean there is aproblem with the vehicle.

It is recommended to leave bothsystems on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessary toturn TCS off if the vehicle gets stuckin sand, mud, ice, or snow. See If theVehicle Is Stuck 0 201 and “Turningthe Systems Off and On” later in thissection.

When the transfer case (if equipped)is in Four-Wheel Drive Low, thestability system is automaticallydisabled, g comes on, and theappropriate message will appear on

the DIC. Both traction control andStabiliTrak are automatically disabledin this condition.

The indicator light for both systems isin the instrument cluster. Thislight will:

. Flash when TCS is limitingwheel spin.

. Flash when StabiliTrak isactivated.

. Turn on and stay on when eithersystem is not working.

If either system fails to turn on or toactivate, a message displays in theDriver Information Centre (DIC), andd comes on and stays on to indicatethat the system is inactive and is notassisting the driver in maintainingcontrol. The vehicle is safe to drive,but driving should be adjustedaccordingly.

If d comes on and stays on:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.


Drive the vehicle. If d comes on andstays on, the vehicle may need moretime to diagnose the problem. If thecondition persists, see your dealer.

Turning the Systems Off and On

The button for TCS and StabiliTrak ison the centre stack.

Caution

Do not repeatedly brake oraccelerate heavily when TCS is off.The vehicle driveline could bedamaged.



To turn off only TCS, press andrelease g. The traction off light idisplays in the instrument cluster. Theappropriate message will display inthe DIC. See Ride Control SystemMessages 0 158. To turn TCS on again,press and release g. The traction off

light i displayed in the instrumentcluster will turn off.

If TCS is limiting wheel spin when gis pressed, the system will not turn offuntil the wheels stop spinning.

To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak,press and hold g until the traction

off light i and the StabiliTrak OFF

light g come on and stay on in theinstrument cluster, then release. Theappropriate message will display inthe DIC. See Ride Control SystemMessages 0 158.

To turn TCS and StabiliTrak on again,press and release g. The traction

off light i and the StabiliTrak OFF

light g in the instrument clusterturn off.

StabiliTrak will automatically turn onif the vehicle exceeds 56 km/h(35 mph). Traction control willremain off.

The vehicle has a Trailer Sway Control(TSC) feature and a Hill Start Assist(HSA) feature. See Trailer Sway Control(TSC) 0 266 or Hill Start Assist (HSA)0 226.

Adding accessories can affect thevehicle performance. See Accessoriesand Modifications 0 269.

Driver Mode ControlDriver Mode Control attempts to adda sportier feel, provide a morecomfortable ride, or assist in differentweather conditions or terrain. Thissystem simultaneously changes thesoftware settings of varioussub-systems. Depending on the optionpackage, available features and modeselected, the suspension, steering andpowertrain will change settings inorder to achieve the desired modecharacteristics. If the vehicle isequipped with Magnetic Ride Control,selecting the various Driver Modesadjusts the ride of the vehicle to

enhance the ride performance for theroad conditions and theselected mode.

The Driver Mode Control has fourmodes: Tour, Sport, Snow/Ice, andTow/Haul.

Press the TOW/HAUL switch toactivate and deactivate the Tow/Haul Mode.

Press the MODE switch on the centreconsole to select Tour, Sport, or Snow/Ice. Pressing the switch will display agraphic of all available ride modes andchange to the next mode. The Tourand Sport Modes will feel similar on asmooth road. Select a new settingwhenever driving conditions change.

Tour Mode

Use for normal city and highwaydriving to provide a smooth, soft ride.

When selected, there will be noindication in the DIC.

Sport Mode

Use where road conditions or personalpreference demand a more controlledresponse.



The steering will change to providemore precise control. The MagneticRide Control will change to providebetter cornering performance.

When selected, the Sport Modeindicator will display in the DIC.

Snow/Ice Mode

Use when more traction is neededduring slippery conditions.

The vehicle will upshift normallywhen the vehicle is moving. Theacceleration will adjust to help providea smoother launch.

When selected, the Snow/Ice Modeindicator will display in the DIC.

Tow/Haul Mode

Tow/Haul is a feature that assistswhen pulling a heavy trailer or a largeor heavy load. See .Tow/Haul Mode0 218

Tow/Haul is designed to be mosteffective when the vehicle and trailercombined weight is at least 75 percentof the vehicle's Gross CombinedWeight Rating (GCWR)l See “Weightof the Trailer” under Trailer Towing0 259.

Tow/Haul is most useful under thefollowing conditions:

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load through rollingterrain.

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load in stop-and-gotraffic.

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load in busyparking lots where improved lowspeed control of the vehicle isdesired.

Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haulwhen lightly loaded or with no trailerat all will not cause damage. However,there is no benefit to the selection ofTow/Haul when the vehicle isunloaded. Such a selection whenunloaded may result in unpleasantengine and transmission drivingcharacteristics and reduced fueleconomy. Tow/Haul is recommendedonly when pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load.

When selected, the Tow/Haulindicator will display in theinstrument cluster.

Magnetic Ride ControlThe Magnetic Ride Control monitorsthe suspension system.

Based on road conditions, steeringwheel angle, and vehicle speed, thesystem automatically adjusts toprovide the best handling whileproviding a smooth ride. The Tour andSport Modes will feel similar on asmooth road.

Tour : Use for normal city andhighway driving. This setting providesa smooth, soft ride.

8 Sport : Use where road conditionsor personal preference demand morecontrol. This setting provides more“feel,” or response to road conditions.

6 Snow/Ice : Use when moretraction is needed during slipperyconditions.



The vehicle is normally in Tour Mode.Sport Mode and Snow/Ice Mode areengaged when the Magnetic RideControl MODE button on the centreconsole is pressed. Press the button toselect the desired mode.

The Driver Information Centre (DIC)briefly displays the appropriatemessage on vehicle startup or when anew mode is selected. See Ride ControlSystem Messages 0 158.

Locking Rear AxleVehicles with a locking rear axle cangive more traction on snow, mud, ice,sand, or gravel. It works like astandard axle most of the time, but

when traction is low, this feature willallow the rear wheel with the mosttraction to move the vehicle.

Automatic Level ControlThe automatic level control rearsuspension comes as a part of theMagnetic Ride Control system.

This type of level control is fullyautomatic and will provide a betterlevelled riding position as well asbetter handling under a variety ofpassenger and loading conditions. Anair compressor connected to the rearshocks will raise or lower the rear ofthe vehicle to maintain proper vehicleheight. The system is activated whenthe ignition is in ON/RUN and willautomatically adjust vehicle heightthereafter. The system may exhaust(lower vehicle height) for up to10 minutes after the ignition has beenturned off. You may hear the aircompressor operating when the heightis being adjusted.

If a weight-distributing hitch is beingused, it is recommended to allow theshocks to inflate, levelling the vehicleprior to adjusting the hitch.

Cruise Control

{ Warning

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely at asteady speed. Do not use cruisecontrol on winding roads or inheavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tyre traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you couldlose control. Do not use cruisecontrol on slippery roads.

If equipped with cruise control, aspeed of about 40 km/h (25 mph) ormore can be maintained withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator.Cruise control does not work at speedsbelow about 40 km/h (25 mph).



If the Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control system begins tolimit wheel spin while using cruisecontrol, the cruise controlautomatically disengages. See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Control0 226. If a collision alert occurs whencruise control is activated, cruisecontrol is disengaged. See ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) System 0 245.When road conditions allow you tosafely use it again, the cruise controlcan be turned back on.

If the brakes are applied, cruisecontrol disengages.

J : Press to turn the system on andoff. A white indicator appears in theinstrument cluster when cruise isturned on.

+RES : If there is a set speed inmemory, press the control up brieflyto resume that speed or press andhold to accelerate. If the cruise controlis already active, use to increasevehicle speed.

SET− : Press the control down brieflyto set the speed and activate cruisecontrol. If the cruise control is alreadyactive, use to decrease vehicle speed.

* : Press to disengage cruise controlwithout erasing the set speed frommemory.

Setting Cruise Control

If J is on when not in use, SET− or+RES could get pressed and go intocruise when not desired. Keep J offwhen cruise is not being used.

To set cruise control:

1. Press J.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press and release SET− .

4. Remove your foot from theaccelerator.

When the cruise control has been setto the desired speed, a green cruisecontrol indicator appears on theinstrument cluster and a cruise setspeed message appears on the DriverInformation Centre (DIC) andHead-Up Display (HUD), if equipped.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at a desiredspeed and then the brakes are appliedor* is pressed, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed reaches about40 km/h (25 mph) or more, press+RES up briefly. The vehicle returns tothe previous set speed.

Increasing Speed While CruiseControl is at a Set Speed

If the cruise control system is alreadyactivated:

. Press and hold +RES up until thevehicle accelerates to the desiredspeed, then release it.



. To increase vehicle speed in smallincrements, press +RES up briefly.For each press, the vehicle goesabout 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.

The speedometer reading can bedisplayed in either English or metricunits. See Instrument Cluster 0 132.The increment value used depends onthe units displayed.

Reducing Speed While CruiseControl is at a Set Speed

If the cruise control system is alreadyactivated:

. Press and hold SET− down untilthe desired lower speed is reached,then release it.

. To decrease the vehicle speed insmall increments, press SET−down briefly. For each press, thevehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) slower.


Overtaking Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal to increasethe vehicle speed. When you take yourfoot off the pedal, the vehicle will slowdown to the previous set cruise speed.

While pressing the accelerator pedalor shortly following the release tooverride cruise, briefly applying theSET− control will result in cruise setto the current vehicle speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control will workon hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepness of thehills. When going up steep hills, youmight have to step on the acceleratorpedal to maintain the vehicle speed.

While going downhill vehicles with asix-speed automatic transmission haveCruise Grade Braking to help maintaindriver selected speed. Cruise GradeBraking is enabled when the vehicle isstarted and cruise control is active.It is not enabled in Range SelectionMode. It assists in maintaining driver

selected speed when driving ondownhill grades by using the engineand transmission to slow the vehicle.

To disable and enable Cruise GradeBraking for the current ignition keycycle, press and hold the Tow/Haulbutton for five seconds. A DriverInformation Centre (DIC) messagedisplays. See Transmission Messages0 160.

For other forms of Grade Braking, seeAutomatic Transmission 0 214, andTow/Haul Mode 0 218.

Ending Cruise Control

There are four ways to end cruisecontrol:

. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press*.

. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

. To turn off cruise control,press J.



Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed is erasedfrom memory if J is pressed or ifthe ignition is turned off.

Adaptive Cruise ControlIf equipped with Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC), it allows for selectingthe cruise control set speed andfollowing gap. Read this entire sectionbefore using this system. ACC uses acamera and radar sensors to detectother vehicles. See Declaration ofConformity 0 356. The following gap isthe following time (or distance)between your vehicle and a vehicledetected directly ahead in your path,moving in the same direction. If novehicle is detected in your path, ACCworks like regular cruise control.

If a vehicle is detected in your path,ACC can speed up the vehicle or applylimited, moderate braking to maintainthe selected following gap. Todisengage ACC, apply the brake. If theTraction Control System (TCS) orelectronic stability control systemactivates while ACC is engaged, ACCmay automatically disengage. See

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 226. When road conditionsallow ACC to be safely used, the ACCcan be turned back on.

ACC will not engage if the TCS orStabiliTrak electronic stability controlsystem is disabled.

{ Warning

ACC has limited braking ability andmay not have time to slow thevehicle down enough to avoid acollision with another vehicle youare following. This can occur whenvehicles suddenly slow or stopahead, or enter your lane. Also see“Alerting the Driver” in this section.Complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving and youshould be ready to take action andapply the brakes. See DefensiveDriving 0 193.

{ Warning

ACC will not detect or brake forchildren, pedestrians, animals,or other objects.

Do not use ACC when:

. On winding and hilly roads orwhen the sensors are blockedby snow, ice, or dirt. Thesystem may not detect avehicle ahead. Keep the entirefront of the vehicle clean.

. Visibility is low, such as inmist, rain, or snow conditions.ACC performance is limitedunder these conditions.

. On slippery roads where fastchanges in tyre traction cancause excessive wheel slip.



J : Press to turn the system on oroff. The indicator turns white on theinstrument cluster when ACC isturned on.

+RES : Press the control up briefly toresume the previous set speed or holdupwards to accelerate. If ACC isalready engaged, use to increasevehicle speed.

SET− : Press the control down brieflyto set the speed and activate ACC.If ACC is already engaged, use todecrease vehicle speed.

* : Press to disengage ACC withouterasing the selected set speed.

[ : Press to select a following gaptime (or distance) setting for ACC ofFar, Medium, or Near.


Setting Adaptive Cruise Control

If J is on when not in use, it couldget pressed and go into ACC when notdesired. Keep J off when cruise isnot being used.

Select the set speed desired for cruise.This is the vehicle speed when novehicle is detected in its path.

ACC will not set at a speed less than25 km/h (15 mph), although it can beresumed when driving at lowerspeeds.

To set ACC:

1. Press J.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press and release SET–.

4. Remove your foot from theaccelerator.

After ACC is set, it may immediatelyapply the brakes if a vehicle ahead isdetected closer than the selectedfollowing gap.

The ACC indicator displays on theinstrument cluster and Head-UpDisplay (HUD). When ACC is active,the indicator will be lit green.

Be mindful of speed limits,surrounding traffic speeds, andweather conditions when selecting theset speed.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the ACC is set at a desired speedand then the brakes are applied, ACCis disengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.



To begin using ACC again, press +RESup briefly. The vehicle returns to theprevious set speed.

Increasing Speed While ACC is at aSet Speed

Do one of the following:

. Use the accelerator to get to thehigher speed. Press SET– down.Release the control and theaccelerator pedal. The vehicle willnow cruise at the higher speed.

When the accelerator pedal ispressed, ACC will not brakebecause it is overridden.A warning message will appear onthe Driver Information Centre(DIC) and Head-Up Display (HUD).See Cruise Control Messages 0 153.

. Press and hold +RES up until thedesired set speed appears on thedisplay, then release it.

. To increase speed in smallincrements, briefly press +RES up.For each press, the vehicle speedincreases by 1 km/h (1 mph).

. To increase speed in largerincrements, press and briefly hold±RES up. For each press, thevehicle speed increases by5 km/h (5 mph).

When it is determined there is novehicle ahead or the vehicle ahead isbeyond the selected following gap, thevehicle speed will increase to the setspeed.

Reducing Speed While ACC is at aSet Speed

Do one of the following:

. Use the brake to get to the desiredlower speed. Press SET– down andrelease the accelerator pedal. Thevehicle will now cruise at thelower speed.

. Press and hold SET– down untilthe desired lower speed is reached,then release it.

. To decrease speed in smallincrements, briefly press SET−down. For each press, the vehiclespeed increases by1 km/h (1 mph).

. To decrease speed in largerincrements, press and briefly holdSET− down. For each press, thevehicle speed decreases by5 km/h (5 mph).

Selecting the Follow Distance Gap

When a slower moving vehicle isdetected ahead within the selectedfollowing gap, ACC will adjust thevehicle's speed and attempt tomaintain the follow distance gapselected.

Press[ on the steering wheel toadjust the following gap. Each presscycles the gap button through threesettings: Far, Medium, or Near.

When pressed, the current gap settingdisplays briefly on the DIC and HUD.The gap setting will be maintaineduntil it is changed.

Since each gap setting corresponds toa following time (Far, Medium,or Near), the following distance willvary based on vehicle speed. Thefaster the vehicle speed, the furtherback your vehicle will follow a vehicledetected ahead. Consider traffic andweather conditions when selecting the



following gap. The range of selectablegaps may not be appropriate for alldrivers and driving conditions.

Changing the gap settingautomatically changes the alert timingsensitivity (Far, Medium, or Near) forthe Forward Collision Alert (FCA)feature. See Forward Collision Alert(FCA) System 0 245.

Alerting the Driver

If ACC is engaged, driver action maybe required when ACC cannot applysufficient braking when approaching avehicle too rapidly.

When this condition occurs, thecollision alert symbol on the HUD willflash on the windscreen. Either eightbeeps will sound from the front,or both sides of the Safety Alert Seat

will pulse five times. See “Collision/Detection Systems” under VehiclePersonalisation 0 162.

See Defensive Driving 0 193.

Approaching and Following aVehicle

The vehicle ahead indicator is in theinstrument cluster and HUD display.

This indicator only displays when avehicle is detected in your vehicle'spath moving in the same direction.

If this indicator is not displaying, ACCwill not respond to or brake tovehicles ahead.

ACC automatically slows the vehicledown and adjusts vehicle speed tofollow the vehicle in front at theselected following gap. The vehiclespeed increases or decreases to followthe vehicle in front of you, but willnot exceed the set speed. It may apply

limited braking, if necessary. Whenbraking is active, the brake lights willcome on. The automatic braking mayfeel or sound different than if thebrakes were applied manually. This isnormal.

Stationary or Very Slow-MovingObjects

{ Warning

ACC may not detect and react tostopped or slow-moving vehiclesahead of you. For example, thesystem may not brake for a vehicleit has never detected moving. Thiscan occur in stop-and-go traffic orwhen a vehicle suddenly appearsdue to a vehicle ahead changinglanes. Your vehicle may not stopand could cause a crash. Usecaution when using ACC. Yourcomplete attention is alwaysrequired while driving and youshould be ready to take action andapply the brakes.



ACC Automatically Disengages

ACC may automatically disengage andthe driver will need to manually applythe brakes to slow the vehicle when:

. The sensors are blocked.

. The Traction Control System (TCS)or electronic stability controlsystem has activated or beendisabled.

. No traffic or other objects arebeing detected.

. There is a fault in the system.

The ACC active symbol will not bedisplayed when ACC is no longeractive.

Notification to Resume ACC

ACC will maintain a following gapbehind a detected vehicle and slowyour vehicle to a stop behind thedetected vehicle.

If the stopped vehicle ahead hasdriven away and ACC has notresumed, the vehicle ahead indicatorwill flash as a reminder to checktraffic ahead before proceeding. Inaddition, the left and right sides of theSafety Alert Seat will pulse three

times, or three beeps will sound. See“Alert Type” and “Go Notifier” in“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalisation 0 162.

When the vehicle ahead drives away,press +RES or the accelerator pedal toresume cruise control. If stopped formore than two minutes or if the driverdoor is opened and the driver seat beltis unbuckled, the ACC automaticallyapplies the Electric Parking Brake(EPB) to hold the vehicle. The EPBstatus light will turn on. See ParkingBrake 0 223. To resume ACC andrelease the EPB, press the acceleratorpedal.

A DIC warning message may displayindicating to shift to P (Park) beforeexiting the vehicle. See VehicleMessages 0 152.

{ Warning

If ACC has stopped the vehicle, andif ACC is disengaged, turned off,or cancelled, the vehicle will nolonger be held at a stop. The vehiclecan move. When ACC is holding the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle at a stop, always beprepared to manually apply thebrakes.

{ Warning

Leaving the vehicle without placingit in P (Park) can be dangerous. Donot leave the vehicle while it isbeing held at a stop by ACC. Alwaysplace the vehicle in P (Park) andturn off the ignition before leavingthe vehicle.

ACC Override

If using the accelerator pedal whileACC is active, a DIC warning messagewill indicate automatic braking willnot occur. See Vehicle Messages 0 152.ACC will resume operation when theaccelerator pedal is not being pressed.



{ Warning

The ACC will not automaticallyapply the brakes if your foot isresting on the accelerator pedal.You could crash into a vehicleahead of you.

Bends in the Road

{ Warning

On bends, ACC may not detect avehicle ahead in your lane. Youcould be startled if the vehicleaccelerates up to the set speed,especially when following a vehicleexiting or entering exit ramps. Youcould lose control of the vehicle orcrash. Do not use ACC while drivingon an entrance or exit ramp. Alwaysbe ready to use the brakes ifnecessary.

{ Warning

On bends, ACC may respond to avehicle in another lane, or may nothave time to react to a vehicle inyour lane. You could crash into avehicle ahead of you, or lose controlof your vehicle. Give extra attentionin bends and be ready to use thebrakes if necessary. Select anappropriate speed while driving inbends.

ACC may operate differently in asharp bend. It may reduce the vehiclespeed if the bend is too sharp.

When following a vehicle and enteringa bend, ACC may not detect thevehicle ahead and accelerate to the setspeed. When this happens, the vehicleahead indicator will not appear.

ACC may detect a vehicle that is notin your lane and apply the brakes.

ACC may occasionally provide an alertand/or braking that is consideredunnecessary. It could respond tovehicles in different lanes, signs,guardrails, and other stationaryobjects when entering or exiting abend. This is normal operation. Thevehicle does not need service.



Other Vehicle Lane Changes

ACC will not detect a vehicle aheaduntil it is completely in the lane. Thebrakes may need to be manuallyapplied.

Do Not Use ACC on Hills and WhenTowing a Trailer

Do not use ACC when driving on steephills or when towing a trailer. ACC willnot detect a vehicle in the lane while

driving on steep hills. The driver willoften need to take over accelerationand braking on steep hills, especiallywhen towing a trailer. If the brakes areapplied, the ACC disengages.

Disengaging ACC

There are three ways todisengage ACC:

. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press*.

. Press J.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed is erasedfrom memory if J is pressed or ifthe ignition is turned off.

Cleaning the Sensing System

The camera sensor on the windscreenahead of the rearview mirror and theradar sensors on the front of thevehicle can become blocked by snow,ice, dirt, or mud. These areas need tobe cleaned for ACC to operateproperly.

For cleaning instructions, see“Washing the Vehicle” under ExteriorCare 0 334.

System operation may also be limitedunder snow, heavy rain, or road sprayconditions.



Driver AssistanceSystemsThis vehicle may have features thatwork together to help avoid crashes orreduce crash damage while driving,reversing, and parking. Read thisentire section before using thesesystems.

{ Warning

Do not rely on the DriverAssistance Systems. These systemsdo not replace the need for payingattention and driving safely. Youmay not hear or feel alerts orwarnings provided by thesesystems. Failure to use proper carewhen driving may result in injury,death, or vehicle damage. SeeDefensive Driving 0 193.

Under many conditions, thesesystems will not:

. Detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or animals.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Detect vehicles or objectsoutside the area monitored bythe system.

. Work at all driving speeds.

. Warn you or provide you withenough time to avoid a crash.

. Work under poor visibility orbad weather conditions.

. Work if the detection sensoris not cleaned or is coveredby ice, snow, mud, or dirt.

. Work if the detection sensoris covered up, such as with asticker, magnet, or metalplate.

. Work if the area surroundingthe detection sensor isdamaged or not properlyrepaired.

Complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving, and youshould be ready to take action andapply the brakes and/or steer thevehicle to avoid crashes.

Audible or Safety Alert Seat

Some driver assistance features alertthe driver of obstacles by beeping. Tochange the volume of the warningchime, see “Comfort and Convenience”under Vehicle Personalisation 0 162.

If equipped with the Safety Alert Seat,the driver seat cushion may provide avibrating pulse alert instead ofbeeping. To change this, see“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalisation 0 162.

Assistance Systems forParking or ReversingIf equipped, the Rear Vision Camera(RVC), Rear Parking Assist (RPA),Front Parking Assist (FPA), SurroundVision, Front Vision Camera, RearCross Traffic Alert (RCTA), andAutomatic Parking Assist (APA) mayhelp the driver park or avoid objects.Always check around the vehicle whenparking or backing.

Rear Vision Camera (RVC)

When the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse), the RVC displays animage of the area behind the vehicle



in the infotainment display. Theprevious screen displays when thevehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse)after a short delay. To return to theprevious screen sooner, press anybutton on the infotainment system,shift into P (Park), or reach a vehiclespeed of 8 km/h (5 mph). The rearvision camera is above the numberplate.

1. View Displayed by the RearVision Camera

1. View Displayed by the RearVision Camera

2. Corners of the Rear Bumper

Displayed images may be farther orcloser than they appear. The areadisplayed is limited and objects thatare close to either corner of thebumper or under the bumper do notdisplay.

A warning triangle may display toshow that Rear Parking Assist (RPA)has detected an object. This trianglechanges from amber to red andincreases in size the closer the object.

Surround Vision

If equipped, Surround Vision displaysan image of the area surrounding thevehicle, along with the front or rearcamera views in the infotainment

display. The front camera is in thegrille or near the front emblem, theside cameras are on the bottom of theoutside rearview mirrors, and the rearcamera is above the number plate.

{ Warning

The Surround Vision cameras haveblind spots and will not display allobjects near the corners of thevehicle. Folding side mirrors thatare out of position will not displaysurround view correctly. Alwayscheck around the vehicle whenparking or backing.

1. Views Displayed by theSurround Vision Cameras

2. Area Not Shown



1. Views Displayed by theSurround Vision Cameras

2. Area Not Shown

Front Vision Camera

If equipped, a view of the area in frontof the vehicle shows in theinfotainment display. The view

displays after shifting fromR (Reverse) to a forward gear, or bypressing CAMERA in the centre stack,and when the vehicle is movingforward slower than 8 km/h (5 mph).If equipped, the front view cameraalso displays when the Front ParkingAssist system detects an object aheadwithin 30 cm (12 in).

{ Warning

The camera(s) do not displaychildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,crossing traffic, animals, or anyother object outside of the cameras'field of view, below the bumper,or under the vehicle. Showndistances may be different fromactual distances. Do not drive orpark the vehicle using only thesecamera(s). Always check behind andaround the vehicle before driving.Failure to use proper care mayresult in injury, death, or vehicledamage.

Parking Assist

With Front and Rear Parking Assist,as the vehicle moves at speeds of lessthan 8 km/h (5 mph) the sensors onthe bumpers may detect objects up to1.2 m (4 ft) in front and 2.5 m (8 ft)behind the vehicle within a zone25 cm (10 in) high off the ground andbelow bumper level. These detectiondistances may be shorter duringwarmer or humid weather. Blockedsensors will not detect objects andcan also cause false detections. Keepthe sensors clean of mud, dirt, snow,ice, and slush; and clean sensors aftera car wash in freezing temperatures.

{ Warning

The Parking Assist system does notdetect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objectslocated below the bumper or thatare too close or too far from thevehicle. It is not available at speedsgreater than 8 km/h (5 mph). Toprevent injury, death or vehicledamage, even with Parking Assist,

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

always check the area around thevehicle and check all mirrors beforemoving forward or reversing.

The instrument cluster may have aparking assist display with bars thatshow “distance to object” and objectlocation information for the Front andRear Parking Assist system. As theobject gets closer, more bars light upand the bars change colour fromyellow to amber to red.

When an object is first detected in therear, one beep will be heard from therear, or both sides of the Safety AlertSeat will pulse two times. When anobject is very close (<0.6 m (2 ft) in

the vehicle rear, or <0.3 m (1 ft) in thevehicle front), a continuous beep willsound from the front or reardepending on object location, or bothsides of the Safety Alert Seat willpulse five times. Beeps for FPA arehigher pitched than for RPA.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

If equipped, when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse), RCTAdisplays a red warning triangle with aleft or right pointing arrow to warn oftraffic coming from the left or right.This system detects objects comingfrom up to 20 m (65 ft) from the leftor right-hand side of the vehicle.When an object is detected, eitherthree beeps sound from the left orright or three Safety Alert Seat pulsesoccur on the left or right side,depending on the direction of thedetected vehicle.

Use caution while reversing whentowing a trailer, as the RCTAdetection zones that extend out fromthe back of the vehicle do not movefurther back when a trailer is towed.

Turning the Features On or Off

PressX on the centre console toturn on or off the Front and RearParking Assist, and Rear Cross TrafficAlert at the same time. The indicatorlight next to the button comes onwhen the features are on and turns offwhen the features have been disabled.

Front and Rear Parking Assist can beturned off, on, or on with towbarthrough vehicle personalisation. See“Park Assist” under VehiclePersonalisation 0 162. If the parkingassist is turned off through vehiclepersonalisation, the park assist buttonwill be disabled. To turn the parkingassist on again, select On in thevehicle personalisation menu. The Onwith Towbar setting allows for theparking assist to work properly with atrailer hitch.



Turn off parking assist when towing atrailer.

To turn the RPA symbols, guidancelines (on some models), or Rear CrossTraffic Alert on or off, see “RearCamera” under Vehicle Personalisation0 162.

On some vehicles RCTA setting can beturned off through “Collision/Detection Systems” under VehiclePersonalisation 0 162

Automatic Parking Assist (APA)

If equipped, APA searches for andsteers the vehicle into parallel andperpendicular parking spots. Whenusing APA, you must still changegears, and control the brakes andaccelerator. A display and audiblebeeps help to guide parkingmaneuvers.

{ Warning

APA does not apply the brakes. APAmay not detect objects in theparking space, objects that are softor narrow, objects high off the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

ground such as flat-bed trucks,or objects below ground level suchas large potholes. Always verify thatthe parking space is appropriate forparking a vehicle. APA does notrespond to changes in the parkingspace, such as movement of anadjacent vehicle, or a person orobject entering the parking space.APA does not detect or avoid trafficthat is behind or alongside of thevehicle. Always be prepared to stopthe vehicle during the parkingmanoeuvre.

PressO on the centre console toenable the system to search for aparking space that is large enough andwithin 1.5 m (5 ft) of the vehicle. Thevehicle speed must be below 30 km/h(18 mph). APA does not work in 4mor 4n.The system cannot:

. Detect whether it is a legal parkingspace.

. Park exactly lined up with thevehicle next to it if the spot isapproached at an angle or if theparking space is angled.

. Park exactly centred in a spot thatis marked too large.

. Always detect short curbs.

When enabled, APA searches forparallel parking spaces to the right ofthe vehicle. To search for a parkingspace to the left, turn on the leftindicator or, if available, change theside selection in the infotainmentdisplay. To switch the parking modebetween parallel and perpendicular,press and holdO during the searchprocess or, if available, change theparking mode in the infotainmentdisplay.



After completely passing a largeenough space, an audible beep occursand a red stop symbol is displayed.

If the vehicle is in R (Reverse), butdoes not steer into the expectedspace, this may be because the systemis manoeuvring the vehicle into apreviously detected space. The APAsystem does not need service.

APA will instruct the vehicle to stoponce a large enough space is found.Follow the displayed instructions.When instructed to drive in reverse,shift to R (Reverse) to engageautomatic steering. The steering wheelwill briefly vibrate as a reminder toremove hands from the steeringwheel. Check surroundings and

continue braking or accelerating asneeded, and be prepared to stop toavoid vehicles, pedestrians, or objects.

If the vehicle exceeds 10 km/h(6 mph), APA is automaticallydisengaged and automatic steeringwill turn off. A progress arrow displaysthe status of the parking maneuver.Depending on the space size,additional manoeuvres may berequired, and there will be additionalinstructions. When changing gears,allow the automatic steering tocomplete before continuing theparking manoeuvre. Upon successfulcompletion of a manoeuvre, APA willbeep and display a PARKINGCOMPLETE message. Place the vehiclein P (Park).

APA may automatically disengage if:

. The steering wheel is used by thedriver.

. The maximum allowed speed isexceeded.

. There is a failure with the APAsystem.

. Electronic stability control orantilock brakes are activated.

. A high priority vehicle message isdisplayed in the DIC.

To cancel APA, pressO again.

When the System Does Not Seem toWork Properly

The APA system may require a shortperiod of driving along bends tocalibrate.

Assistance Systems forDrivingIf equipped, when driving the vehiclein a forward gear, Forward CollisionAlert (FCA), Lane Departure Warning(LDW), Lane Keep Assist (LKA), SideBlind Zone Alert (SBZA), Lane ChangeAlert (LCA), and/or ForwardAutomatic Braking (FAB) can help toavoid a crash or reduce crash damage.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemIf equipped, the FCA system may helpto avoid or reduce the harm caused byfront-end crashes. When approachinga vehicle ahead too quickly, FCAprovides a red flashing alert on the



windscreen and rapidly beeps orpulses the driver seat. FCA also lightsan amber visual alert if followinganother vehicle much too closely.

FCA detects vehicles within a distanceof approximately 60 m (197 ft) andoperates at speeds above 40 km/h(25 mph). If the vehicle has AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC), it can detectvehicles to distances of approximately110 m (360 ft) and operates at allspeeds. See Adaptive Cruise Control0 233.

{ Warning

FCA is a warning system and doesnot apply the brakes. Whenapproaching a slower-moving orstopped vehicle ahead too rapidly,or when following a vehicle tooclosely, FCA may not provide awarning with enough time to helpavoid a crash. It also may notprovide any warning at all. FCAdoes not warn of pedestrians,animals, signs, crash barriers,bridges, construction barrels,

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

or other objects. Be ready to takeaction and apply the brakes. SeeDefensive Driving 0 193.

FCA can be disabled with either theFCA steering wheel control or,if equipped, through vehiclepersonalisation. See “Collision/Detection Systems” under VehiclePersonalisation 0 162.

Detecting the Vehicle Ahead

FCA warnings will not occur unlessthe FCA system detects a vehicleahead. When a vehicle is detected, thevehicle ahead indicator will displaygreen. Vehicles may not be detectedon bends, motorway exit ramps,or hills, due to poor visibility; or if avehicle ahead is partially blocked by

pedestrians or other objects. FCA willnot detect another vehicle ahead untilit is completely in the driving lane.

{ Warning

FCA does not provide a warning tohelp avoid a crash, unless it detectsa vehicle. FCA may not detect avehicle ahead if the FCA sensor isblocked by dirt, snow, or ice, or ifthe windscreen is damaged. It mayalso not detect a vehicle on windingor hilly roads, or in conditions thatcan limit visibility such as fog, rain,or snow, or if the headlamps orwindscreen are not cleaned or inproper condition. Keep thewindscreen, headlamps, and FCAsensors clean and in good repair.

Collision Alert



When your vehicle approachesanother detected vehicle too rapidly,the red FCA display will flash on thewindscreen. Also, eight rapidhigh-pitched beeps will sound fromthe front, or both sides of the SafetyAlert Seat will pulse five times. Whenthis Collision Alert occurs, the brakesystem may prepare for driver brakingto occur more rapidly which can causea brief, mild deceleration. Continue toapply the brake pedal as needed.Cruise control may be disengagedwhen the Collision Alert occurs.

Tailgating Alert

The vehicle ahead indicator willdisplay amber when you are followinga vehicle ahead much too closely.

Selecting the Alert Timing

The Collision Alert control is on thesteering wheel. Press[ to set theFCA timing to Far, Medium, Near,or on some vehicles, Off. The firstbutton press shows the current settingon the Driver Information Centre(DIC). Additional button presses willchange this setting. The chosensetting will remain until it is changedand will affect the timing of both theCollision Alert and the TailgatingAlert features. The timing of bothalerts will vary based on vehicle speed.The faster the vehicle speed, thefarther away the alert will occur.Consider traffic and weather

conditions when selecting the alerttiming. The range of selectable alerttiming may not be appropriate for alldrivers and driving conditions.

If your vehicle is equipped withAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC),changing the FCA timing settingautomatically changes the ACCfollowing gap setting (Far, Medium,or Near).

Unnecessary Alerts

FCA may provide unnecessary alertsfor turning vehicles, vehicles in otherlanes, objects that are not vehicles,or shadows. These alerts are normaloperation and the vehicle does notneed service.

Cleaning the System

If the FCA system does not seem tooperate properly, cleaning the outsideof the windscreen in front of thecamera sensor on the windscreenbehind the rearview mirror, andcleaning the front of the vehicle whereradar sensors and headlamps arelocated, may correct the issue.



For cleaning instructions, see“Washing the Vehicle” under ExteriorCare 0 334.

System operation may also be limitedunder snow, heavy rain, or road sprayconditions.

Forward AutomaticBraking (FAB)If the vehicle has Forward CollisionAlert (FCA), it also has FAB, whichincludes Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA).When the system detects a vehicleahead in your path that is travelling inthe same direction that you may beabout to crash into, it can provide aboost to braking or automaticallybrake the vehicle. This can help avoidor lessen the severity of crashes whendriving in a forward gear. Dependingon the situation, the vehicle mayautomatically brake moderately orhard. This forward automatic brakingcan only occur if a vehicle is detected.This is shown by the FCA vehicleahead indicator being lit. See ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) System 0 245.

The system works when driving in aforward gear between 8 km/h (5 mph)and 80 km/h (50 mph), or on vehicleswith Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),above 4 km/h (2 mph). It can detectvehicles up to approximately 60 m(197 ft).

{ Warning

FAB is an emergency crashpreparation feature and is notdesigned to avoid crashes. Do notrely on FAB to brake the vehicle.FAB will not brake outside of itsoperating speed range and onlyresponds to detected vehicles.

FAB may not:

. Detect a vehicle ahead onwinding or hilly roads.

. Detect all vehicles, especiallyvehicles with a trailer,tractors, muddy vehicles, etc.

. Detect a vehicle whenweather limits visibility, suchas in fog, rain, or snow.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Detect a vehicle ahead if it ispartially blocked bypedestrians or other objects.

Complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving, and youshould be ready to take action andapply the brakes and/or steer thevehicle to avoid crashes.

FAB may slow the vehicle to acomplete stop to try to avoid apotential crash. If this happens, FABmay engage the Electric Parking Brake(EPB) to hold the vehicle at a stop.Release the EPB or firmly press theaccelerator pedal.

{ Warning

FAB may automatically brake thevehicle suddenly in situationswhere it is unexpected andundesired. It could respond to aturning vehicle ahead, guardrails,signs, and other non-moving

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

objects. To override FAB, firmlypress the accelerator pedal, if it issafe to do so.

Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)

IBA may activate when the brakepedal is applied quickly by providing aboost to braking based on the speedof approach and distance to a vehicleahead.

Minor brake pedal pulsations or pedalmovement during this time is normaland the brake pedal should continueto be applied as needed. IBA willautomatically disengage only whenthe brake pedal is released.

{ Warning

IBA may increase vehicle braking insituations when it may not benecessary. You could block the flowof traffic. If this occurs, take yourfoot off the brake pedal and thenapply the brakes as needed.

FAB and IBA can be disabled throughvehicle personalisation. See “Collision/Detection Systems” under VehiclePersonalisation 0 162.

{ Warning

Using FAB or IBA while towing atrailer could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle and crash.Turn the system to Alert, or if thevehicle has ACC to Off, whentowing a trailer.

A system unavailable message maydisplay if:

. The front of the vehicle orwindscreen is not clean.

. Heavy rain or snow is interferingwith object detection.

. There is a problem with theStabiliTrak system.

The FAB system does not needservice.

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)If equipped, the SBZA system is alane-changing aid that assists driverswith avoiding crashes that occur withmoving vehicles in the side blind zone(or spot) areas. When the vehicle is ina forward gear, the left or right sidemirror display will light up if a movingvehicle is detected in that blind zone.If the indicator is activated and avehicle is also detected on the sameside, the display will flash as an extrawarning not to change lanes. Sincethis system is part of the Lane ChangeAlert (LCA) system, read the entireLCA section before using this feature.

Lane Change Alert (LCA)If equipped, the LCA system is alane-changing aid that assists driverswith avoiding lane change crashesthat occur with moving vehicles in theside blind zone (or spot) areas or withvehicles rapidly approaching theseareas from behind. The LCA warningdisplay will light up in thecorresponding outside side mirror andwill flash if the indicator is on.



{ Warning

LCA does not alert the driver tovehicles outside of the systemdetection zones, pedestrians,bicyclists, or animals. It may notprovide alerts when changing lanesunder all driving conditions. Failureto use proper care when changinglanes may result in injury, death,or vehicle damage. Before making alane change, always check mirrors,glance over your shoulder, and usethe indicators.

LCA Detection Zones

1. SBZA Detection Zone2. LCA Detection Zone

The LCA sensor covers a zone ofapproximately one lane over fromboth sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m(11 ft). The height of the zone isapproximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft)and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. TheSide Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) warningarea starts at approximately themiddle of the vehicle and goes back5 m (16 ft). Drivers are also warned ofvehicles rapidly approaching this areaup to approximately 70 m (230 ft)behind the vehicle.

How the System Works

The LCA symbol lights up in the sidemirrors when the system detects amoving vehicle in the next lane overthat is in the side blind zone orrapidly approaching from behind. Thisindicates it may be unsafe to changelanes. Before making a lane change,check the LCA display, check mirrors,glance over your shoulder, and use theindicators.

Left Side MirrorDisplay

Right Side MirrorDisplay

When the vehicle is started, bothoutside mirror LCA displays willbriefly come on to indicate the systemis operating. When the vehicle is in aforward gear, the left or right sidemirror display will light up if a movingvehicle is detected in the next laneover in that blind zone or rapidlyapproaching that zone. If the indicatoris activated in the same direction of adetected vehicle, this display will flashas an extra warning not to changelanes.

LCA can be disabled through vehiclepersonalisation using the Side BlindZone Alert option. See “Collision/Detection Systems” under VehiclePersonalisation 0 162. If LCA isdisabled by the driver, the LCA mirrordisplays will not light up.



When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The LCA system requires some drivingfor the system to calibrate tomaximum performance. Thiscalibration may occur more quickly ifthe vehicle is driven on a straightmotorway with traffic and roadsideobjects (e.g., guardrails, barriers).

LCA displays may not come on whenpassing a vehicle quickly, for astopped vehicle, or when towing atrailer. The LCA detection zones thatextend back from the side of thevehicle do not move further backwhen a trailer is towed. Use cautionwhile changing lanes when towing atrailer. LCA may alert to objectsattached to the vehicle, such as atrailer, bicycle, or object extending outto either side of the vehicle. Attachedobjects may also interfere with thedetection of vehicles. This is normalsystem operation; the vehicle does notneed service.

LCA may not always alert the driver tovehicles in the next lane over,especially in wet conditions or whendriving on sharp curves. The system

does not need to be serviced. Thesystem may light up due to guardrails,signs, trees, shrubs, and othernon-moving objects. This is normalsystem operation; the vehicle does notneed service.

LCA may not operate when the LCAsensors in the left or right corners ofthe rear bumper are covered withmud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush, or inheavy rainstorms. For cleaninginstructions, see “Washing theVehicle” under Exterior Care 0 334.If the DIC still displays the systemunavailable message after cleaningboth sides of the vehicle toward therear corners of the vehicle, see yourdealer.

If the LCA displays do not light upwhen moving vehicles are in the blindzone or are rapidly approaching thatzone and the system is clean, thesystem may need service. Take thevehicle to your dealer.

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW)If equipped, LDW may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. It may provide a warningif the vehicle is crossing a detectedlane marking without using aindicator in the lane departuredirection. Since this system is part ofthe Lane Keep Assist (LKA) system,read the entire LKA section beforeusing this feature.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA)If equipped, LKA may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. It may assist by gentlyturning the steering wheel if thevehicle approaches a detected lanemarking without using a indicator inthat direction. It may also provide aLane Departure Warning (LDW)system alert as the lane marking iscrossed. The LKA system will notassist or provide an LDW alert if itdetects that you are actively steering.Override LKA by turning the steering



wheel. LKA uses a camera to detectlane markings between 60 km/h (37mph) and 180 km/h (112 mph).

{ Warning

The LKA system does notcontinuously steer the vehicle.It may not keep the vehicle in thelane or give a Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) alert, even if a lanemarking is detected.

The LKA and LDW systemsmay not:

. Provide an alert or enoughsteering assist to avoid a lanedeparture or crash.

. Detect lane markings underpoor weather or visibilityconditions. This can occur ifthe windscreen or headlightsare blocked by dirt, snow,or ice, if they are not inproper condition, or if the sunshines directly into thecamera.

. Detect road edges.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Detect lanes on winding orhilly roads.

If LKA only detects lane markingson one side of the road, it will onlyassist or provide an LDW alertwhen approaching the lane on theside where it has detected a lanemarking. Even with LKA and LDW,you must steer the vehicle. Alwayskeep your attention on the road andmaintain proper vehicle positionwithin the lane, or vehicle damage,injury or death could occur. Alwayskeep the windscreen, headlampsand camera sensors clean and ingood repair. Do not use LKA in badweather conditions.

{ Warning

Using LKA while towing a trailer oron slippery roads could cause lossof control of the vehicle and acrash. Turn the system off.

How the System Works

The LKA camera sensor is on thewindscreen ahead of the rear-viewmirror.

To turn LKA on and off, pressAon the centre console.

When on,A is green if LKA isavailable to assist and provideLDW alerts. It may assist by gentlyturning the steering wheel anddisplayA as amber if the vehicleapproaches a detected lane markingwithout using a indicator in thatdirection. It may also provide anLDW alert by flashingA amber asthe lane marking is crossed.Additionally, there may be threebeeps, or the driver seat may pulsethree times, on the right or left,depending on the lane departuredirection.

Take Steering

The LKA system does notcontinuously steer the vehicle. If LKAdoes not detect active driver steering,



an alert, chime, or DIC message maybe provided. Move the steering wheelto dismiss.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The system performance may beaffected by:

. Close vehicles ahead.

. Sudden lighting changes, such aswhen driving through tunnels.

. Banked roads.

. Roads with poor lane markings,such as two-lane roads.

If the LKA system is not functioningproperly when lane markings areclearly visible, cleaning thewindscreen may help.

LKA assistance and/or LDW alertsmay occur due to tar marks, shadows,cracks in the road, temporary orconstruction lane markings, or otherroad imperfections. This is normalsystem operation; the vehicle does notneed service. Turn LKA off if theseconditions continue.

FuelUse the recommended fuel for propervehicle maintenance.

Use unleaded petrol with a postedoctane rating of 95 RON or higher.Unleaded petrol rated at 91 RON canbe used, but acceleration and fueleconomy will be reduced, and anaudible knocking noise may be heard.If this occurs, use petrol rated at95 RON as soon as possible, otherwisethe engine could be damaged. If heavyknocking is heard when usingunleaded petrol rated at 95 RON, theengine needs service.

Caution

Do not use fuels with any of thefollowing conditions; doing so maydamage the vehicle and void itswarranty:

. Fuel with any amount ofmethanol, methylal, andaniline. These fuels can

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

corrode metal fuel systemparts or damage plastic andrubber parts.

. Fuel containing metals suchas methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl(MMT), which can damagethe emissions control systemand spark plugs.

. Fuel with a posted octanerating of less than therecommended fuel. Using thisfuel will lower fuel economyand performance, and maydecrease the life of theemissions catalyst.

Fuel AdditivesPetrol should contain detergentadditives that help prevent engine andfuel system deposits from forming.Clean fuel injectors and intake valveswill allow the emission control systemto work properly. Some petrol does notcontain sufficient quantities ofadditives to keep fuel injectors and



intake valves clean. To make up forthis lack of detergency, consult yourretailer for the GM approved additivetreatment. Add this additive to thefuel tank at every engine oil change orevery 15,000 km (9,000 mi), whicheveroccurs first.

Filling the Tank

{ Warning

Fuel vapours and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and followall the instructions on thefuel pump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefuelling.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Do not use a mobile phonewhile refuelling.

. Do not reenter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

. Keep children away from thefuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

. Fuel can spray out if therefuelling nozzle is insertedtoo quickly. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearlyfull, and is more likely in hotweather. Insert the refuellingnozzle slowly and wait for anyhiss noise to stop prior tobeginning to flow fuel.

Locate the fuel door. The fuel gaugehas an arrow to indicate the side ofthe vehicle the fuel door is on.If equipped, the fuel door is lockedwhen the vehicle doors are locked.Press K on the RKE transmitter tounlock. To open the fuel filler flap,push and release the rearward centreedge of the flap.

The vehicle has a capless refuellingsystem and does not have a fuel cap.The filling nozzle must be fullyinserted and latched prior to startingfuel flow.



{ Warning

Overfilling the fuel tank by morethan three clicks of a standard fillnozzle may cause:

. Vehicle performance issues,including engine stalling anddamage to the fuel system.

. Fuel spills.

. Potential fuel fires.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Wait a fewseconds after you have finishedpumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces assoon as possible. See Exterior Care0 334.

{ Warning

If a fire starts while you arerefuelling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Filling the Tank With a PortableGas Can

If the vehicle runs out of fuel andmust be filled from a portablepetrol can:

1. Locate the capless funneladapter from inside the vehicle.

2. Insert and latch the funnel intothe capless fuel system.

{ Warning

Attempting to refuel without usingthe funnel adapter may cause fuelspillage and damage the caplessfuel system. This could cause a fireand you or others could be badlyburned and the vehicle could bedamaged.

3. Remove and clean the funneladapter and return to the storagelocation.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ Warning

Filling a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle can causefuel vapours that can ignite eitherby static electricity or other means.You or others could be badlyburned and the vehicle could bedamaged. Always:

. Use approved fuel containers.

. Remove the container fromthe vehicle, boot, or pickupbed before filling.

. Place the container on theground.

. Place the nozzle inside the fillopening of the containerbefore dispensing fuel, and

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

keep it in contact with the fillopening until filling iscomplete.

. Fill the container no morethan 95% full to allow forexpansion.

. Do not smoke, light matches,or use lighters whilepumping fuel.

. Avoid using mobile phones orother electronic devices.

Trailer Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle. Contactyour dealer or trailering dealer forassistance with preparing the vehiclefor towing a trailer. Read the entiresection before towing a trailer.

For towing a disabled vehicle, seeTowing the Vehicle 0 330. For towingthe vehicle behind another vehiclesuch as a motor home, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing 0 330.

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips

Driving with a Trailer

When towing a trailer:

. Become familiar with the stateand local laws that apply to trailertowing.

. The trailer must be equipped withbrakes adequate for the intendeduse. A loaded trailer weighing

more than 900 kg (2,000 lb) mustbe equipped with its own brakesystem, with brakes working on allaxles. Trailer braking equipmentconforming to Canadian StandardsAssociation (CSA) requirementCAN3-D313, or its equivalent, isrecommended.

. Do not tow a trailer during thefirst 800 km (500 mi) to preventdamage to the engine, axle,or other parts.

. Then during the first 800 km(500 mi) of trailer towing, do notdrive over 80 km/h (50 mph) anddo not make starts at full throttle.

. Vehicles can tow in D (Drive).Shift the transmission to a lowergear if the transmission shifts toooften under heavy loads and/orhilly conditions.

. Do not use Adaptive CruiseControl when towing.

. Turn off Parking Assist whentowing.



. The Forward Automatic BrakingSystem should be set to Off whentowing. See Forward AutomaticBraking (FAB) 0 248.

{ Warning

When towing a trailer, exhaustgases may collect at the rear of thevehicle and enter if the tailgate,boot/hatch, or rear-most windowis open.

When towing a trailer:

. Do not drive with the tailgate,boot/hatch, or rear-mostwindow open.


. Also adjust the climatecontrol system to a settingthat brings in only outside air.See “Climate Control Systems”in the Index.

For more information about carbonmonoxide, see Engine Exhaust0 213.

Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Thecombination you are driving is longerand not as responsive as the vehicleitself. Get acquainted with thehandling and braking of the rig beforesetting out for the open road.

The structure, tyres, and brakes of thetrailer must be rated to carry the load.Inadequate trailer equipment cancause the combination to operate inan unexpected or unsafe manner.

Before starting, check all trailer hitchparts and attachments, safety chains,electrical connectors, lamps, tyres, andmirrors. Get familiar with thehandling and braking of the rig. If thetrailer has electric brakes, start thecombination moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by hand tobe sure the brakes work.

During the trip, check occasionally tobe sure that the load is secure and thelamps and any trailer brakesstill work.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid heavy brakingand sudden turns.

Overtaking

More overtaking distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Thecombination will not accelerate asquickly and is longer so it is necessaryto go much farther beyond the passedvehicle before returning to the lane.

Reversing

Hold the bottom of the steering wheelwith one hand. To move the trailer tothe left, move that hand to the left. Tomove the trailer to the right, moveyour hand to the right. Always reverseslowly and, if possible, have someoneguide you.



Making Turns

Caution

Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer tocome in contact with the vehicle.The vehicle could be damaged.Avoid making very sharp turnswhile trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal. Do this sothe trailer will not strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,or other objects. Avoid jerky or suddenmanoeuvres. Signal well in advance.

If the trailer indicator bulbs burn out,the arrows on the instrument clusterwill still flash for turns. It isimportant to check occasionally to besure the trailer bulbs are still working.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gearbefore starting down a long or steepdowngrade. If the transmission is notshifted down, the brakes might get hotand no longer work well.

Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shiftthe transmission to a lower gear if thetransmission shifts too often underheavy loads and/or hilly conditions.

When towing, use the Tow/Haul Modeto prevent damage to the engine ortransmission. See Tow/Haul Mode0 218.

When towing at high altitude on steepuphill grades, consider the following:Engine coolant will boil at a lowertemperature than at normal altitudes.If the engine is turned off immediatelyafter towing at high altitude on steepuphill grades, the vehicle may showsigns similar to engine overheating. Toavoid this, let the engine run whileparked, preferably on level ground,with the transmission in P (Park) for afew minutes before turning the engineoff. If the overheat warning comes on,see Engine Overheating 0 282.

Parking on Hills

{ Warning

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and both thevehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but do notshift into P (Park) yet. Turn thewheels into the curb if facingdownhill or into traffic if facinguphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the regular brakesuntil the chocks absorb the load.



4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.


3. Shift into a gear.


5. Release the brake pedal.

6. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

7. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance when TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service more oftenwhen pulling a trailer. See ScheduledMaintenance 0 344. Things that areespecially important in traileroperation are automatic transmissionfluid, engine oil, axle lubricant, belts,

cooling system and brake system. It isa good idea to inspect these beforeand during the trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitchnuts and bolts are tight.

Trailer TowingEight passenger vehicles are notintended to tow a trailer.

Do not tow a trailer during running-in.See New Vehicle Run-In 0 206.

Before towing a trailer, see"Hands-Free Operation" under Tailgate0 37.

{ Warning

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly. Forexample, if the trailer is too heavyor the trailer brakes are inadequatefor the load, the vehicle may notstop as expected. The driver andpassengers could be seriously

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

injured. The vehicle may also bedamaged; the resulting repairswould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Pull a trailer only if all thesteps in this section have beenfollowed. Ask your dealer for adviceand information about towing atrailer with the vehicle.

Caution

Pulling a trailer improperly candamage the vehicle and result incostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. To pull a trailercorrectly, follow the advice in thissection and see your dealer forimportant information abouttowing a trailer with the vehicle.



To identify the trailering capacity ofthe vehicle, see “Weight of the Trailer”following.

Trailering is different than just drivingthe vehicle by itself. Trailering meanschanges in handling, acceleration,braking, durability and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takes correctequipment, and it has to be usedproperly.

The following information has manytime-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules. Many of these areimportant for your safety and that ofyour passengers. Read this sectioncarefully before pulling a trailer.

Weight of the Trailer

Safe trailering requires monitoring theweight, speed, altitude, road gradients,outside temperature, and howfrequently the vehicle is used to pull atrailer. Take into consideration anyspecial equipment on the vehicle, andthe amount of tongue weight thevehicle can carry. See “Weight of theTrailer Tongue” later in this sectionfor more information.

For vehicles that can tow, the TrailerWeight Rating (TWR) is calculated asif the vehicle has a driver, all availablepassenger seats occupied, all vehiclefeatures, and all required traileringequipment.

Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or advice.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load of any trailer is veryimportant because it is also part ofthe vehicle weight. The Gross VehicleWeight (GVW) includes the curbweight of the vehicle, any cargocarried in it, and the people who willbe riding in the vehicle as well astrailer tongue weight. Vehicle options,equipment, passengers, and cargo inthe vehicle reduce the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carry,which will also reduce the trailerweight the vehicle can tow. See VehicleLoad Limits 0 202 for moreinformation about the vehicle'smaximum load capacity.



Vehicle Series Hitch Type Maximum Tongue Weight

Short Wheel Base7 Passenger, 20 inch Wheels, Stationary Assist Steps

Weight-Carrying 122 kg (269 lb)

Short Wheel Base7 Passenger, 22 inch Wheels, Power Assist Steps


Short Wheel Base8 Passenger

* *

Long Wheel Base7 Passenger, 20 inch Wheels, Stationary Assist Steps


Long Wheel Base7 Passenger, 22 inch Wheels, Power Assist Steps


Long Wheel Base8 Passenger

* *

*Trailer Towing not allowed.

The maximum vertical tongue load isalso shown on the vehicle documents.Load to the maximum capacity ifpossible, especially when towing aheavy trailer. The load on the trailertongue must not be too light or tooheavy. Do not load the trailer tongueto less than 4% of the maximumallowable trailer weight or less than

25 kg (55 lb). Do not load the trailertongue to more than 10% of themaximum allowable trailer weight.

Trailer rating may be limited by thevehicle's ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue or kingpin weightcannot cause the vehicle to exceed theGVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

or the RGAWR (Rear Gross AxleWeight Rating). See “Total Weight onthe Vehicle's Tyres” following.

After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving some itemsaround in the trailer.



If a cargo carrier is used in the trailerhitch receiver, choose a carrier thatpositions the load as close to thevehicle as possible. Make sure thetotal weight, including the carrier, isno more than half of the maximumallowable tongue weight for thevehicle or 227 kg (500 lb), whicheveris less.

Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTyres

Be sure the vehicle's tyres are inflatedto the inflation pressures found onthe Certification label on the driver'sside rear door or see Vehicle LoadLimits 0 202. Make sure not to exceedthe GVWR limit for the vehicle, or theRGAWR, with the tow vehicle andtrailer fully loaded for the tripincluding the weight of the trailertongue.

Weight of the TraileringCombination

It is important that the combinationof the tow vehicle and trailer does notexceed any of its weight ratings —GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, TrailerWeight Rating, or Tongue Weight. The

only way to be sure it is not exceedingany of these ratings is to weigh thetow vehicle and trailer combination,fully loaded for the trip, gettingindividual weights for each of theseitems.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

The correct hitch equipment helpsmaintain combination control. Mostsmall-to-medium trailers can be towedwith a weight-carrying hitch whichfeatures a coupler latched to the hitchball. Larger trailers may require aweight-distributing hitch that usesspring bars to distribute the trailertongue weight among the two vehicleand trailer axles. See “Weight of theTrailer Tongue” in Trailer Towing 0 259for rating limits.

Consider using mechanical swaycontrols with any trailer. Ask atrailering professional about swaycontrols or refer to the trailermanufacturer's recommendations andinstructions.

Installing the Tow ball

A trailer ball is provided for vehiclesdesigned to tow a trailer. If equipped,trailering information is provided withthe vehicle documents.

1. Storage Bag2. Pin3. Spacer4. Clip5. Tow ball

The tow ball is stored in the rear ofthe vehicle, on the driver side, behinda door in the trim panel.



1. Pull to open the trim panel door.

The third row driver side seatmay need to be folded to accessthe trim panel door.

2. Lift the acoustic pad to accessthe storage bag (1).

3. Release the strap.

4. Remove the storage bag (1).

5. Remove the pin (2) and trailerball (5) from the storage bag (1).

6. Install the trailer ball (5) into thehitch.

7. Remove the clip (4) andspacer (3) from the pin (2).

8. Install the pin (2) through thehole in the hitch and trailerball (5).

9. Install the spacer (3) and clip (4)onto the pin (2).

Removing and Storing theTow ball

{ Warning

An unsecured tow ball could bethrown about the vehicle during acrash or sudden manoeuvre.Someone could be injured. Alwaysproperly secure the tow ball in itsstorage bag in the rear driver sidejack storage compartment when notin use.

1. Remove the clip (4) andspacer (3) from the pin (2).

2. Remove the pin (2) from thehitch and the trailer ball (5).



3. Remove the trailer ball (5) fromthe hitch.

4. Install the trailer ball (5) into thestorage bag (1) as shown.

5. Install the spacer (3) and clip (4)onto the pin (2).

6. Place the assembled pin onto thebag (1) and tie.

7. Install the storage bag (1) intothe compartment with the buckleforward.

8. Pull the strap behind the bracket.

9. Pull the strap through the buckleand pull tight.

10. Lower the acoustic pad.

11. Reinstall the trim panel door.



Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross the safetychains under the tongue of the trailerto help prevent the tongue fromcontacting the road if it becomesseparated from the hitch. Instructionsabout safety chains may be providedby the hitch manufacturer or by thetrailer manufacturer. If the trailerbeing towed weighs up to 2,271 kg(5,000 lb) with a factory-installed stepbumper, safety chains may beattached to the attaching points onthe bumper, otherwise, safety chainsshould be attached to holes on thetrailer hitch platform. Always leavejust enough slack so the combinationcan turn. Never allow safety chains todrag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

A loaded trailer that weighs more than900 kg (2,000 lb) must be equippedwith its own brake system, withbrakes working on all axles. Trailerbraking equipment conforming toCanadian Standards Association (CSA)requirement CAN3-D313, or itsequivalent, is recommended.

State and local regulations may alsorequire the trailer to have its ownbraking system if loaded above acertain threshold.

Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for the trailer brakes sothey are installed, adjusted andmaintained properly.

Since the vehicle is equipped withStabiliTrak, the trailer brakes cannottap into the vehicle's hydraulicsystem.

Trailer Wiring Harness

The 13-pin trailer connector ismounted in the bumper.

Tow/Haul Mode

Pressing this button at the end of thegear lever turns on and off the Tow/Haul Mode.

This indicator light on the instrumentcluster comes on when the Tow/HaulMode is on.



Tow/Haul is a feature that assistswhen pulling a heavy trailer or a largeor heavy load. See Tow/Haul Mode0 218.

Tow/Haul is designed to be mosteffective when the vehicle and trailercombined weight is at least 75% ofthe vehicle's Gross Combined WeightRating (GCWR). See “Weight of theTrailer” under Trailer Towing 0 259.Tow/Haul is most useful under thefollowing driving conditions:

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load through rollingterrain.

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load in stop-and-gotraffic.

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load in busyparking lots where improved lowspeed control of the vehicle isdesired.

Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haulwhen lightly loaded or with no trailerat all will not cause damage. However,there is no benefit to the selection ofTow/Haul when the vehicle is

unloaded. Such a selection whenunloaded may result in unpleasantengine and transmission drivingcharacteristics and reduced fueleconomy. Tow/Haul is recommendedonly when pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load.

Trailer Sway Control (TSC)Vehicles with StabiliTrak have aTrailer Sway Control (TSC) feature.Trailer sway is unintended side-to-sidemotion of a trailer while being towed.If the vehicle is towing a trailer andthe TSC detects that sway isincreasing, the vehicle brakes areselectively applied at each wheel, tohelp reduce excessive trailer sway.

If TSC is enabled, the Traction ControlSystem (TCS)/StabiliTrak warninglight will flash on the instrumentcluster. Vehicle speed must bereduced. If trailer sway continues,StabiliTrak can reduce engine torqueto help slow the vehicle. See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Control0 226.

{ Warning

Even if the vehicle is equipped withTSC, trailer sway could result inloss of control and the vehicle couldcrash. If excessive trailer sway isdetected, slow down to a safe speed.Check the trailer and vehicle to helpcorrect possible causes. These couldinclude an improperly or overloadedtrailer, unrestrained cargo, impropertrailer hitch configuration, excessivevehicle-trailer speed, or improperlyinflated or incorrect vehicle ortrailer tyres. See Towing Equipment0 262 for trailer ratings and hitchsetup recommendations.

Adding non-dealer accessories canaffect the vehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications 0 269.



Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipment

{ Warning

The Data Link Connector (DLC) isused for vehicle service andEmission Inspection/Maintenancetesting. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Check Engine Light) 0 138.A device connected to the DLC —such as an aftermarket fleet ordriver-behaviour tracking device —may interfere with vehicle systems.This could affect vehicle operationand cause a crash. Such devicesmay also access information storedin the vehicle's systems.

Caution

Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle or causecomponents not to work and wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always check with yourdealer before adding electricalequipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, see Servicingthe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 89 andAdding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 89.


268 VEHICLE CARE

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . 274Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . 277Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . 290Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Windshield Replacement . . . . . . . . 291

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Front Indicator Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 292Number Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Electrical SystemElectrical System Overload . . . . . . 293Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Instrument Panel FuseBlock (Left) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Instrument Panel Fuse Block(Right) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Wheels and TyresTyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304All-Season Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Winter Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Low-Profile Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Tyre Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Tyre Pressure for High-SpeedOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Tyre Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Tyre Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Tyre Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Tyre Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311When It Is Time for NewTyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Buying New Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Different Size Tyres andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Wheel Alignment and TyreBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Tyre Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316If a Tyre Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Tyre Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318Full-Size Spare Tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327


VEHICLE CARE 269

Towing the VehicleTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . 330

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visit yourdealer. You will receive genuine partsand trained and supported servicepeople.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non-dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like anti-lockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Damage to suspension componentscaused by modifying vehicle heightoutside of factory settings will not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non-GM certifiedparts, including control module orsoftware modifications, is not coveredunder the terms of the vehiclewarranty and may affect remainingwarranty coverage for affected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorise the vehicle usinggenuine GM Accessories installed by adealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 89.


270 VEHICLE CARE

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not have theproper knowledge, service manual,tools, or parts. Always followowner's manual procedures andconsult the service manual for yourvehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how toservice the vehicle than thismanual can.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 89.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed.

Caution

Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damage tovehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact the fluids,reservoir caps, or dipsticks.

BonnetTo open the bonnet:

1. Pull the handle with this symbolon it. It is inside the vehicleunder the steering wheel.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle tofind the secondary bonnetrelease. The handle is under thefront edge of the bonnet near thecentre. Push the handle to theright and at the same time raisethe bonnet.

Before closing the bonnet, be sure allthe filler caps are on properly. Thenbring the bonnet from full open towithin 15 cm (6 in) from the closedposition, pause, and push the frontcentre of the bonnet with a swift, firmmotion to fully close the bonnet.


VEHICLE CARE 271

Engine Compartment Overview


272 VEHICLE CARE

1. Positive (+) Terminal. See JumpStarting 0 327.

2. Battery 0 286.

3. Coolant Surge Tank and PressureCap. See Cooling System 0 279.

4. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 277.

5. Automatic TransmissionDipstick. See “How to Check theAutomatic Transmission Fluid”under Automatic TransmissionFluid 0 275.

6. Remote Negative (-) Location.See Jump Starting 0 327.

7. Engine Cooling Fans (Out ofView). See Cooling System 0 279.

8. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When toAdd Engine Oil” under Engine Oil0 272.

9. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil 0 272.

10. Windscreen Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid 0 283.

11. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See BrakeFluid 0 285.

12. Engine Compartment Fuse Block0 294.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engine performanceand long life, careful attention mustbe paid to engine oil. Following thesesimple, but important steps will helpprotect your investment:

. Use engine oil approved to theproper specification and of theproper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section.

. Check the engine oil level regularlyand maintain the proper oil level.See “Checking Engine Oil” and“When to Add Engine Oil” in thissection.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System 0 274.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

Check the engine oil level regularly,every 650 km (400 mi), especiallyprior to a long trip. The engine oildipstick handle is a loop. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 271 for thelocation.

{ Warning

The engine oil dipstick handle maybe hot; it could burn you. Use atowel or glove to touch the dipstickhandle.

If a low oil Driver Information Centre(DIC) message displays, check the oillevel.

Follow these guidelines:

. To get an accurate reading, parkthe vehicle on level ground. Checkthe engine oil level after theengine has been off for at leasttwo hours. Checking the engine oillevel on steep gradients or toosoon after engine shutoff canresult in incorrect readings.Accuracy improves when checking


VEHICLE CARE 273

a cold engine prior to starting.Remove the dipstick and check thelevel.

. If unable to wait two hours, theengine must be off for at least15 minutes if the engine is warm,or at least 30 minutes if theengine is not warm. Pull out thedipstick, wipe it with a clean papertowel or cloth, then push it backin all the way. Remove it again,keeping the tip down, and checkthe level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick and theengine has been off for at least15 minutes, add 1 L (1 qt) of therecommended oil and then recheck

the level. See “Selecting the RightEngine Oil” later in this section for anexplanation of what kind of oil to use.For engine oil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications 0 350.

Caution

Do not add too much oil. Oil levelsabove or below the acceptableoperating range shown on thedipstick are harmful to the engine.If you find that you have an oillevel above the operating range, i.e.,the engine has so much oil that theoil level gets above thecross-hatched area that shows theproper operating range, the enginecould be damaged. You shoulddrain out the excess oil or limitdriving of the vehicle and seek aservice professional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overview0 271 for the location of the engine oilfill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when done.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oil dependson both the proper oil specificationand viscosity grade. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 347.

Specification

Ask for and use engine oils that meetthe dexos2 specification. Engine oilsthat have been approved by GM asmeeting the dexos2 specification aremarked with the dexos2approved logo.


274 VEHICLE CARE

Caution

Failure to use the recommendedengine oil or equivalent can resultin engine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Viscosity Grade

Use SAE 0W-20 viscosity gradeengine oil.

When selecting an oil of theappropriate viscosity grade, it isrecommended to select an oil of thecorrect specification. See“Specification” earlier in this section.

Engine Oil Additives/Engine OilFlushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils meeting the dexos2specification are all that is needed forgood performance and engineprotection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could cause enginedamage not covered by the vehiclewarranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change your ownoil, be sure to drain all the oil fromthe filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in the trashor pouring it on the ground, intosewers, or into streams or bodies ofwater. Recycle it by taking it to a placethat collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is based on acombination of factors which include

engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven. Basedon driving conditions, the mileage atwhich an oil change is indicated canvary considerably. For the oil lifesystem to work properly, the systemmust be reset every time the oil ischanged.

When the system has calculated thatoil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message comes on. See EngineOil Messages 0 154. Change the oil assoon as possible within the next1 000 km (600 mi). It is possible that,if driving under the best conditions,the oil life system might indicate thatan oil change is not necessary for upto a year. The engine oil and filtermust be changed at least once a yearand, at this time, the system must bereset. Your dealer has trained servicepeople who will perform this work andreset the system. It is also importantto check the oil regularly over thecourse of an oil drain interval andkeep it at the proper level.


VEHICLE CARE 275

If the system is ever reset accidentally,the oil must be changed at 5 000 km(3,000 mi) since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil life systemwhenever the oil is changed.

After you change the oil, the oil lifesystem will need to be reset. See yourdealer for service.

See OIL LIFE REMAINING underDriver Information Centre (DIC) 0 146for information on the engine oil lifesystem.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

When to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission Fluid

It is usually not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level. The onlyreason for fluid loss is a transmissionleak or overheated transmission. If asmall leak is suspected, then use thefollowing checking procedures tocheck the fluid level. However, if thereis a large leak, then it may benecessary to have the vehicle towed to

a dealer service department and haveit repaired before driving the vehiclefurther.

Caution

Using the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damage thevehicle, and the damage may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use the automatictransmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids and Lubricants0 347.

Change the fluid and filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalslisted in Scheduled Maintenance 0 344,and be sure to use the transmissionfluid listed in Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 347.

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Caution

Too much or too little fluid candamage the transmission. Toomuch can mean that some of thefluid could come out and fall onhot engine parts or exhaust systemparts, starting a fire. Too little fluidcould cause the transmission tooverheat. Be sure to get an accuratereading if checking thetransmission fluid.

Before checking the fluid level,prepare the vehicle:

1. Start the engine and park thevehicle on a level surface. Keepthe engine running.

2. Apply the parking brake andplace the shift lever in P (Park).

3. With your foot on the brakepedal, move the shift leverthrough each gear range, pausing


276 VEHICLE CARE

for about three seconds in eachrange. Then, move the shift leverback to P (Park).

4. Allow the engine to idle (500-800rpm) for at least one minute.Slowly release the brake pedal.

5. Keep the engine running andcheck the transmission fluidtemperature on the DriverInformation Centre (DIC). SeeDriver Information Centre (DIC)0 146.

6. Using the transmission fluidtemperature reading, determineand perform the appropriatecheck procedure. If thetransmission fluid temperaturereading is not within therequired temperature ranges,allow the vehicle to cool,or operate the vehicle until theappropriate transmission fluidtemperature is reached.

Cold Check Procedure

Use this procedure only as a referenceto determine if the transmission hasenough fluid to be operated safelyuntil a hot check procedure can be

made. The hot check procedure is themost accurate method to check thefluid level. Perform the hot checkprocedure at the first opportunity. Usethis cold check procedure to checkfluid level when the transmissiontemperature is between 27 °C and32 °C (80 °F and 90 °F).

1. Locate the transmission dipstickat the rear of the enginecompartment, on the passengerside of the vehicle.

See Engine Compartment Overview0 271.

2. Flip the handle up, then pull outthe dipstick and wipe it with aclean rag or paper towel.

3. Install the dipstick by pushing itback in all the way; waitthree seconds, and then pull itback out again.

4. Check both sides of the dipstickand read the lower level. Repeatthe check procedure to verify thereading.

5. If the fluid level is below theCOLD check band, add onlyenough fluid as necessary tobring the level into the COLDband. It does not take muchfluid, generally less than 0.5 L(1 pt). Do not overfill.

6. Perform a hot check at the firstopportunity after thetransmission reaches a normaloperating temperature between71 °C to 93 °C (160 °F to 200 °F).

7. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way, thenflip the handle down to lock thedipstick in place.


VEHICLE CARE 277

Hot Check Procedure

Use this procedure to check thetransmission fluid level when thetransmission fluid temperature isbetween 71 °C and 93 °C (160 °F and200 °F).

The hot check is the most accuratemethod to check the fluid level. Thehot check should be performed at thefirst opportunity in order to verify thecold check. The fluid level rises asfluid temperature increases, so it isimportant to ensure the transmissiontemperature is within range.

1. Locate the transmission dipstickat the rear of the enginecompartment, on the passengerside of the vehicle.

See Engine Compartment Overview0 271.

2. Flip the handle up, then pull outthe dipstick and wipe it with aclean rag or paper towel.

3. Install the dipstick by pushing itback in all the way; waitthree seconds, and then pull itback out again.

4. Check both sides of the dipstickand read the lower level. Repeatthe check procedure to verify thereading.

5. Safe operating level is within theHOT cross hatch band on thedipstick. If the fluid level is notwithin the HOT band, and thetransmission temperature isbetween 71 °C and 93 °C (160 °Fand 200 °F), add or drain fluid asnecessary to bring the level intothe HOT band. If the fluid levelis low, add only enough fluid tobring the level into the HOT

band. It does not take muchfluid, generally less than 0.5 L(1 pt). Do not overfill.

6. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way, thenflip the handle down to lock thedipstick in place.

Consistency of Readings

Always check the fluid level at leasttwice using the procedure describedpreviously. Consistency (repeatablereadings) is important to maintainingproper fluid level. If readings are stillinconsistent, contact the dealer.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overview0 271 for the location of the engineair cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

For intervals on changing andinspecting the engine air cleaner/filter,see Scheduled Maintenance 0 344.


278 VEHICLE CARE

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Do not start the engine or have theengine running with the engine aircleaner/filter housing open. Beforeremoving the engine air cleaner/filter,make sure that the engine air cleaner/filter housing and nearby componentsare free of dirt and debris. Remove theengine air cleaner/filter. Lightly tapand shake the engine air cleaner/filter(away from the vehicle), to releaseloose dust and dirt. Inspect the engineair cleaner/filter for damage, andreplace if damaged. Do not clean theengine air cleaner/filter orcomponents with water orcompressed air.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

1. Screws2. Electrical Connector3. Air Duct Clamp

1. Locate the air cleaner/filterassembly. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 271.

2. Disconnect the outlet duct byloosening the air duct clamp (3).

3. Disconnect the electricalconnector (2) and the connectorharness from the cover.

4. Remove the four screws (1) ontop of the cover of the housingand lift up the cover.

5. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the housing. Take careto dislodge as little dirt aspossible.

6. Clean the engine air cleaner/filtersealing surfaces and the housing.

7. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

8. Reverse Steps 2–4 to reinstall thefilter cover housing.

{ Warning

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The air cleanernot only cleans the air; it helps tostop flames if the engine backfires.Use caution when working on theengine and do not drive with the aircleaner/filter off.


VEHICLE CARE 279

Caution

If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which could damage it. Always havethe air cleaner/filter in place whendriving.

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows the engineto maintain the correct workingtemperature.

1. Coolant Surge Tank2. Coolant Surge Tank

Pressure Cap

3. Engine Cooling Fan

{ Warning

An electric engine cooling fan canstart even when the engine is notrunning. To avoid injury, alwayskeep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any engine cooling fan.

{ Warning

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be very hot.Do not touch them. If you do, youcan be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, it couldlose all coolant. That could causean engine fire, and you could beburned. Get any leak fixed beforeyou drive the vehicle.

Caution

Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changingsooner. Any repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use DEX-COOL (silicate-free)coolant in the vehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL® engine coolant.This coolant is designed to remain inthe vehicle for 5 years or 240 000 km(150,000 mi), whichever occurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating, seeEngine Overheating 0 282.


280 VEHICLE CARE

What to Use

{ Warning

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain water andother liquids, can boil before theproper coolant mixture will. Thecoolant warning system is set forthe proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture,the engine could get too hot butyou would not get the overheatwarning. The engine could catchfire and you or others could beburned. Use a 50/50 mixture ofclean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture, nothingelse needs to be added. This mixture:

. Gives freezing protection down to−37 °C (−34 °F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129 °C (265 °F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminium parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Caution

If improper coolant mixture,inhibitors, or additives are used inthe vehicle cooling system, theengine could overheat and bedamaged. Too much water in themixture can freeze and crack enginecooling parts. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehicle warranty.Use only the proper mixture ofengine coolant for the coolingsystem. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants 0 347.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the waste bin, or bypouring it on the ground or intosewers, streams, or bodies of water.

Have the coolant changed by anauthorised service centre, familiarwith legal requirements regardingused coolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The coolant surge tank is in theengine compartment on the passengerside of the vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 271.

The vehicle must be on a level surfacewhen checking the coolant level.

Check to see if coolant is visible in thecoolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything elseuntil it cools down. If coolant isvisible but the coolant level is not ator above the FULL COLD mark, add a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant surge tank, but be sure thecooling system is cool beforedoing this.


VEHICLE CARE 281

The coolant level should be at orabove the FULL COLD mark. If it isnot, there may be a leak in the coolingsystem.

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank for PetrolEngines

{ Warning

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spill coolanton a hot engine.

Caution

This vehicle has a specific coolantfill procedure. Failure to follow thisprocedure could cause the engine tooverheat and be severely damaged.

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. Never turn thecap when the cooling system,including the surge tank pressurecap, is hot. Wait for the coolingsystem and surge tank pressure capto cool.

If no coolant is visible in the surgetank, add coolant:

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlyanticlockwise about one fullturn. If a hiss is heard, wait forthat to stop. A hiss means thereis still some pressure left.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper mixture to the FULLCOLD mark.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start the engineand let it run until the enginecoolant temperature gaugeindicates approximately 90 °C(195 °F).

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the proper


282 VEHICLE CARE

mixture to the coolant surgetank until the level reaches theFULL COLD mark.

5. Replace the pressure cap tightly.

6. Verify coolant level after theengine is shut off and thecoolant is cold. If necessary,repeat coolant fill procedureSteps 1–6.

Caution

If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possibleengine damage may occur. Be surethe cap is properly and tightlysecured.

Engine Overheating

Caution

Running the engine without coolantmay cause damage or a fire. Vehicledamage would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

The vehicle has several indicators towarn of engine overheating.

There is a coolant temperature gaugein the vehicle's instrument cluster. SeeEngine Coolant Temperature Gauge0 135.

In addition, there are ENGINEOVERHEATED STOP ENGINE,ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE,and ENGINE POWER IS REDUCEDmessages in the Driver InformationCentre (DIC). See Engine CoolingSystem Messages 0 154 and EnginePower Messages 0 155.

If the decision is made not to lift thebonnet when this warning appears, getservice help right away.

If the decision is made to lift thebonnet, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Check to see if the engine coolingfan(s) are running. If the engine isoverheating, the fans should berunning. If they are not, do notcontinue to run the engine, and havethe vehicle serviced.

If Steam is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ Warning

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if you justopen the bonnet. Stay away fromthe engine if you see or hear steamcoming from it. Just turn it off andget everyone away from the vehicleuntil it cools down. Wait until thereis no sign of steam or coolantbefore you open the bonnet.

If you keep driving when the engineis overheated, the liquids in it cancatch fire. You or others could bebadly burned. Stop the engine if itoverheats, and get out of thevehicle until the engine is cool.

If No Steam is Coming from theEngine Compartment

The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE or the ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message,along with a low coolant condition,can indicate a serious problem.


VEHICLE CARE 283

If there is an engine overheat warning,but no steam is seen or heard, theproblem may not be too serious.Sometimes the engine can get a littletoo hot when the vehicle:

. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.

. Stops after high-speed driving.

. Idles for long periods in traffic.

. Tows a trailer; see Trailer Towing0 259.

If the ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE or the ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE messageappears with no sign of steam, try thisfor a minute or so:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. When it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral), and let theengine idle.

If the engine coolant temperaturegauge is no longer in the overheatzone or an overheat warning no longer

displays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normallyand have the cooling system checkedfor proper fill and function.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam andthe vehicle is equipped with an enginedriven cooling fan, push down theaccelerator until the engine speed isabout twice as fast as normal idlespeed for at least five minutes whilethe vehicle is parked. If the warning isstill there, turn off the engine and geteveryone out of the vehicle until itcools down.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for five minutes while parked.If the warning is still displayed, turnoff the engine until it cools down.

Engine FanIf the vehicle has electric cooling fans,the fans may be heard spinning at lowspeed during most everyday driving.

The fans may turn off if no cooling isrequired. Under heavy vehicle load,during trailer towing, in high outsidetemperatures, or during operation ofthe air conditioning system, the fansmay change to high speed and anincrease in fan noise may be heard.This is normal and indicates that thecooling system is functioning properly.The fans will change to low speedwhen additional cooling is no longerrequired.

The electric engine cooling fans mayrun after the engine has been turnedoff. This is normal and no service isrequired.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windscreen washer fluid needsto be added, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. Use a fluid that has sufficientprotection against freezing in an areawhere the temperature may fall belowfreezing.


284 VEHICLE CARE

Adding Washer Fluid

The vehicle has a low washer fluidmessage on the DIC that comes onwhen the washer fluid is low. Themessage is displayed for 15 seconds atthe start of each ignition cycle. Whenthe WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUIDmessage displays, washer fluid willneed to be added to the windscreenwasher fluid reservoir.

Open the cap with the washer symbolon it. Add washer fluid until the tankis full. See Engine CompartmentOverview 0 271 for reservoir location.

Caution

. Do not use washer fluid thatcontains any type of waterrepellent coating. This cancause the wiper blades tochatter or skip.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windscreenwasher. It can damage thewindscreen washer systemand paint.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.

. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows forfluid expansion if freezing

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

occurs, which could damagethe tank if it iscompletely full.

BrakesDisc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or can beheard all the time when the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ Warning

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes will notwork well. That could lead to acrash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.


VEHICLE CARE 285

Caution

Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costlybrake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tyres are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications. See Capacities andSpecifications 0 350.

Brake pads should be replaced ascomplete sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedal doesnot return to normal height, or ifthere is a rapid increase in pedaltravel. This could be a sign that brakeservice may be required.

Replacing Brake System Parts

Always replace brake system partswith new, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes may notwork properly. The brakingperformance expected can change inmany other ways if the wrongreplacement brake parts are installedor if parts are improperly installed.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoir isfilled with GM approved DOT 3 brakefluid as indicated on the reservoir cap.See Engine Compartment Overview0 271 for the location of the reservoir.

Checking Brake Fluid

With the vehicle in P (Park) on a levelsurface, the brake fluid level should bebetween the minimum and maximummarks on the brake fluid reservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoir maygo down:

. Normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are installed, the fluidlevel goes back up.

. A fluid leak in the brake hydraulicsystem. Have the brake hydraulicsystem fixed. With a leak, thebrakes will not work well.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoircap and the area around the capbefore removing it.

Do not top off the brake fluid. Addingfluid does not correct a leak. If fluid isadded when the linings are worn,there will be too much fluid whennew brake linings are installed. Add orremove fluid, as necessary, only whenwork is done on the brake hydraulicsystem.

{ Warning

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. You or

(Continued)


286 VEHICLE CARE

Warning (Continued)

others could be burned, and thevehicle could be damaged. Addbrake fluid only when work is doneon the brake hydraulic system.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System Warning Light0 139.

Brake fluid absorbs water over timewhich degrades the effectiveness ofthe brake fluid. Replace brake fluid atthe specified intervals to preventincreased stopping distance. SeeScheduled Maintenance 0 344.

What to Add

Use only GM approved DOT 3 brakefluid from a clean, sealed container.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 347.

{ Warning

The wrong or contaminated brakefluid could result in damage to thebrake system. This could result inthe loss of braking leading to apossible injury. Always use theproper GM approved brake fluid.

Caution

If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces, the paintfinish can be damaged. Immediatelywash off any painted surface.

BatteryThe original equipment battery ismaintenance free. Do not remove thecap and do not add fluid.

Refer to the replacement number onthe original battery label when a newbattery is needed. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 271 forbattery location.

{ Warning

Batteries should not be disposed ofwith regular refuse. Make sure thatyou dispose of old batteries inaccordance with environmentalprotection regulations to helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

{ Warning

Do not use a match or flame near avehicle's battery. If you need morelight, use a torch.

Do not smoke near a vehicle'sbattery.

When working around a vehicle'sbattery, shield your eyes withprotective glasses.

Keep children away from vehiclebatteries.


VEHICLE CARE 287

{ Warning

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode. Youcan be hurt badly if you are notcareful.

Follow instructions carefully whenworking around a battery.

Battery posts, terminals and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds which can cause cancerand reproductive harm. Washhands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

Infrequent Usage: Remove the black,negative (-) cable from the battery tokeep the battery from running down.

Extended Storage: Remove the black,negative (-) cable from the battery oruse a battery trickle charger.

Four-Wheel Drive

Transfer Case

If the vehicle is equipped withFour-Wheel Drive, be sure to performthe lubricant checks described in thissection.

When to Check Lubricant

Refer to the to Scheduled Maintenance0 344 to determine how often tocheck the lubricant.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehicleshould be on a level surface.

1. Fill Plug2. Drain Plug

If the level is below the bottom of thefill plug (1) hole, located on thetransfer case, some lubricant will needto be added. Add enough lubricant toraise the level to the bottom of the fillplug (1) hole. Use care not toover-tighten the plug.

What to Use

Refer to Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 347 to determine whatkind of lubricant to use.

Front AxleWhen to Check and ChangeLubricant

It is not necessary to regularly checkfront axle fluid unless a leak issuspected, or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected andrepaired.


288 VEHICLE CARE



1. Fill Plug2. Drain Plug

. When the differential is cold, addenough lubricant to raise the levelfrom 0 mm (0 in) to 3.2 mm(1/8 in) below the fill plug (1) hole.

. When the differential is atoperating temperature (warm), addenough lubricant to raise the levelto the bottom of the fillplug (1) hole.

What to Use


Rear Axle

When to Check Lubricant

It is not necessary to regularly checkrear axle fluid unless a leak issuspected or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected andrepaired.

All axle assemblies are filled byvolume of fluid during production.They are not filled to reach a certainlevel. When checking the fluid levelon any axle, variations in the readingscan be caused by factory filldifferences between the minimum andthe maximum fluid volume. Also, if avehicle has just been driven beforechecking the fluid level, it may appearlower than normal because fluid hastravelled out along the axle tubes andhas not drained back to the sumparea. Therefore, a reading takenfive minutes after the vehicle has been

driven will appear to have a lowerfluid level than a vehicle that hasbeen stationary for an hour or two.The rear axle assembly must besupported on a flat, level surface toget a true reading.



The proper level is 1.0 mm to19.0 mm (0.04 in to 0.7 in) below thebottom of the fill hole, located on therear axle. Add only enough fluid toreach the proper level.


VEHICLE CARE 289

What to Use


Starter Switch Check

{ Warning

When you are doing this inspection,the vehicle could move suddenly.If the vehicle moves, you or otherscould be injured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Apply both the parking brakeand the regular brake.

Do not use the accelerator pedal,and be ready to turn off theengine immediately if it starts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock Control FunctionCheck

{ Warning

When you are doing this inspection,the vehicle could move suddenly.If the vehicle moves, you or otherscould be injured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Apply the parking brake. Beready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle beginsto move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move thegear lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ Warning

When you are doing this check, thevehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured andproperty could be damaged. Makesure there is room in front of thevehicle in case it begins to roll. Beready to apply the regular brake atonce should the vehicle beginto move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keeping yourfoot on the regular brake, apply theparking brake.

. To check the parking brake'sholding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.


290 VEHICLE CARE

. To check the P (Park) mechanism'sholding ability: With the enginerunning, shift to P (Park). Thenrelease the parking brake followedby the regular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindscreen wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking.

For the proper type and size, seeMaintenance Replacement Parts 0 348.

Front Wiper Blade Replacement

To replace the wiper blade assembly:

1. Pull the windscreen wiperassembly away from thewindscreen.

2. Lift up on the latch in the middleof the wiper blade where thewiper arm attaches.

3. With the catch open, pull thewiper blade down towards thewindscreen far enough to releaseit from the J-hooked end of thewiper arm.

4. Remove the wiper blade.

Allowing the wiper blade arm totouch the windscreen when nowiper blade is installed coulddamage the windscreen. Anydamage that occurs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Do not allow the wiper blade armto touch the windscreen.

5. Reverse Steps 1–3 for wiperblade replacement.

Rear Wiper Blade Replacement

To replace the rear wiper blade:

1. With the rear wiper in the offposition, open the liftglass toaccess the rear wiper arm/blade.

The rear wiper blade will notlock in a vertical position so careshould be used when pulling itaway from the vehicle.

2. Push the release lever (2) todisengage the hook and push thewiper arm (1) out of the bladeassembly (3).


VEHICLE CARE 291

3. Push the new blade assemblysecurely in the wiper arm hookuntil the release lever clicks intoplace.

4. Return the wiper arm and bladeassembly to the rest position onthe glass.

Glass ReplacementIf the windscreen or front side glassmust be replaced, see your dealer todetermine the correct replacementglass.

Windshield Replacement

HUD System

The windscreen is part of the HUDsystem. If the windscreen must bereplaced, get one that is designed forHUD or the HUD image may look outof focus.

Driver Assistance Systems

When a windscreen replacement isneeded and the vehicle is equippedwith a front-looking camera sensor forthe Driver Assistance Systems, thewindscreen must be installedaccording to GM specifications forthese systems to work properly. If it isnot, there may be unexpectedbehaviour and/or messages from thesesystems. See Object Detection SystemMessages 0 156.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp alignment has been presetand should need no furtheradjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp alignment may beaffected. If adjustment to theheadlamps is necessary, see yourdealer.


292 VEHICLE CARE

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs 0 293.

For any bulb-changing procedure notlisted in this section, contact yourdealer.

LED LightingThis vehicle has several LED lamps.For replacement of any LED lightingassembly, contact your dealer.

Front Indicator LampsTo replace the front indicator bulb:

1. Locate the front indicator lampunder the front bumper.

2. Turn the bulb socketanti-clockwise to remove it fromthe front indicator assembly andpull it straight out

3. Pull the bulb straight out of thebulb socket.

Number Plate Lamp

Passenger Side Shown, Driver SideSimilar

1. Bulb Socket2. Bulb3. Lamp Assembly

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Push the lamp assembly (3)toward the centre of the vehicle.

2. Pull the lamp assembly down toremove.

3. Turn the bulb socket (1)anticlockwise to remove it fromthe lamp assembly (3).

4. Pull the bulb (2) straight out ofthe bulb socket (1).


VEHICLE CARE 293

5. Push the replacement bulbstraight into the bulb socket andturn the bulb socket clockwise toinstall it into the lamp assembly.

6. Push the lamp assembly backinto position until the release tablocks into place.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp BulbNumber

Front Turn SignalLight

WY21W

Number Plate Lamp W5W LL

For replacement bulbs not listed here,contact your dealer.

Electrical System

Electrical System OverloadThe vehicle has fuses to protectagainst an electrical system overload.Fuses also protect power devices inthe vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new one ofthe identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, there aresome spare fuses and a fuse puller inthe left instrument panel fuse block.The same amperage fuse can also beborrowed. Choose some feature of thevehicle that is not needed to use andreplace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may cause thelamps to go on and off, or in somecases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right away ifthe lamps go on and off or remain off.

Windscreen Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windscreenwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protected fromelectrical overload, overload due toheavy snow or ice may cause wiperlinkage damage. Always clear ice andheavy snow from the windscreenbefore using the windscreen wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.


294 VEHICLE CARE

FusesThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by fuses.This greatly reduces the chance offires caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-coloured bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage can betemporarily borrowed from anotherfuse location, if a fuse goes out.Replace the fuse as soon as you can.

Engine Compartment FuseBlockThe engine compartment fuse block isin the engine compartment, on thedriver side of the vehicle.

Lift the cover to access the fuse block.

Caution

Spilling liquid on any electricalcomponent on the vehicle maydamage it. Always keep the coverson any electrical component.

A fuse puller is available in the leftinstrument panel fuse block.


VEHICLE CARE 295

Item Usage

1 Electric running boards

2 ABS pump

Item Usage

3 Interior BEC LT1

4 Passenger motorized seat belt

Item Usage

5 Suspension levellingcompressor


296 VEHICLE CARE

Item Usage

6 4WD transfer case electroniccontrol

7 -

8 -

9 -

10 Electric parking brake

11 -

12 -

13 Interior BEC LT2

14 Rear BEC 1

15 -

16 -

17 Driver motorized seat belt

18 -

19 -

20 -

21 ALC exhaust solenoid

23 Integrated chassis controlmodule

24 Real time dampening

25 Fuel pump power module

Item Usage

26 –/Battery regulated voltagecontrol

27 -

28 Upfitter 2

29 Upfitter 2 relay

30 Wiper

31 TIM

32 -

33 -

34 Reversing lamps

35 ABS valve

36 Trailer brakes

37 Upfitter 3 relay

38 -

39 Right trailer brake lamp/Indicator lamp

40 Left trailer brake lamp/Indicator lamp

41 Trailer parking lamps

42 Right parking lamps

43 Left parking lamps

Item Usage

44 Upfitter 3

45 Automatic level control/Run/Crank

46 -

47 Upfitter 4

48 Upfitter 4 relay

49 Reversing lamps

50 -

51 Parking lamp relay

52 -

53 -

54 -

55 -

56 -

57 -

58 -

59 Euro trailer

60 A/C control

61 -

62 -


VEHICLE CARE 297

Item Usage

63 Upfitter 1

64 -

65 -

66 -

67 Trailer battery

68 -

69 RC upfitter 3 and 4

70 VBAT upfitter 3 and 4

71 -

72 Upfitter 1 relay

73 -

74 Engine control moduleignition

75 Miscellaneous ignition spare

76 Transmission ignition

77 RC upfitter 1 and 2

78 VBAT upfitter 1 and 2

79 -

80 -

81 -

Item Usage

82 -

83 Euro trailer/RC

84 Run/Crank relay

85 -

86 -

87 Engine

88 Injector A – odd

89 Injector B – even

90 O2 sensor B

91 Throttle control

92 Engine control module relay

93 Horn

94 Fog lamps

95 Main beam headlamps

96 -

97 -

98 -

99 -

100 O2 sensor A

101 Engine control module

Item Usage

102 Engine control module/Transmission control module

103 Auxiliary interior heater

104 Starter

105 -

106 -

107 Aeroshutter

108 -

109 Police upfitter

110 -

111 -

112 Starter relay

113 -

114 Front windscreen washer

115 Rear window washer

116 Left cooling fan

117 Fuel pump prime

118 -

119 -

120 Fuel pump prime


298 VEHICLE CARE

Item Usage

121 Right HID headlamp

122 Left HID headlamp

123 Right cooling fan

Instrument Panel FuseBlock (Left)

The left instrument panel fuse blockaccess door is on the driver side edgeof the instrument panel.

Pull off the cover to access the fuseblock.

The vehicle may not be equipped withall of the fuses, relays, and featuresshown.

Item Usage

1 -

2 -


VEHICLE CARE 299

Item Usage

3 -

4 Accessory powersocket 1

5 Retained accessorypower

6 APO/BATT

7 Universal garage dooropener/Interiorrearview mirror

8 SEO/Retained accessorypower

9 -

10 Body control module 3


12 Steering wheel controlbacklighting

13 -

14 -

15 -

16 Discrete logic ignitionsensor

17 Video processingmodule

Item Usage

18 Mirror window module


20 Front bolster (ifequipped)

21 -

22 -

23 -

24 HVAC/Ignition

25 Instrument cluster/Ignition sensingdiagnostic module/Ignition

26 Tilt column/SEO/Tiltcolumn lock 1/SEO

27 Data link connector/Driver seat module

28 Passive entry/Passivestart/HVAC battery

29 Content theft deterrent

30 -

31 -

32 -

Item Usage

33 SEO/Automatic levelcontrol

34 Park enable/Electricadjustable pedal (ifequipped)

35 -

36 Miscellaneous/RC

37 Heated steering wheel

38 Steering column lock 2(if equipped)

39 Instrument clusterbattery

40 -

41 -

42 Euro trailer (ifequipped)

43 Left doors

44 Driver power seat

45 -

46 Right heated, cooled,or ventilated seat (ifequipped)


300 VEHICLE CARE

Item Usage

47 Left heated, cooled,or ventilated seat (ifequipped)

48 -

49 -


51 -

52 Retained accessorypower relay

53 Run/Crank relay

54 -

55 -

56 -

Instrument Panel FuseBlock (Right)

The right instrument panel fuse blockaccess door is on the passenger sideedge of the instrument panel.

Pull off the cover to access the fuseblock.


VEHICLE CARE 301


Item Usage

1 -

2 -

Item Usage

3 -


5 -

6 -

7 -

8 Glove box

9 -

10 -

11 -

12 Steering wheel controls


14 -

15 -

16 -

17 -

18 -


20 Rear seatentertainment

21 Sunroof


302 VEHICLE CARE

Item Usage

22 -

23 -

24 -

25 -

26 Infotainment/Airbag

27 –/RF window switch/Rain sensor

28 Obstacle detection/USB

29 Radio

30 -

31 -

32 -

33 -

34 -

35 -

36 Special equipmentoption B2

37 Special equipmentoption


39 A/C Inverter

Item Usage

40 -

41 -

42 -

43 -

44 Right door windowmotor

45 Front blower



48 Amplifier

49 Right front seat


51 -

52 Retained accessorypower relay

53 -

54 -

55 -

56 -

Rear Compartment FuseBlock

The rear compartment fuse block isbehind the access panel on the leftside of the compartment.

Pull the panel out by grabbing thefinger access slot at the rear edge.


VEHICLE CARE 303


Item Usage

1 Rear demister relay

2 Left heated secondrow seat

3 Right heated secondrow seat

4 Heated mirrors

5 Tailgate

6 Glass breakage

7 Liftglass

8 Tailgate module logic

9 Rear wiper

10 Rear HVAC blower

11 Second row seat

12 Tailgate module

13 Third row seat

Item Usage

14 Rear accessory powersocket

15 Rear demister

16 Tailgate

17 Liftglass

18 Rear fog lamp (ifequipped)

19 Rear fog lamp (ifequipped)

20 Heated mirror


304 VEHICLE CARE

Wheels and Tyres

TyresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tyres made by aleading tyre manufacturer. See thewarranty manual for informationregarding the tyre warranty andwhere to get service. Foradditional information refer to thetyre manufacturer.

{ Warning

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tyres aredangerous.

. Overloading the tyres cancause overheating as aresult of too much flexing.There could be a blowoutand a serious crash. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 202.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Underinflated tyres posethe same danger asoverloaded tyres. Theresulting crash could causeserious injury. Check alltyres frequently tomaintain therecommended pressure.Tyre pressure should bechecked when the tyresare cold.

. Overinflated tyres aremore likely to be cut,punctured, or broken by asudden impact - such aswhen hitting a pothole.Keep tyres at therecommended pressure.

. Worn or old tyres cancause a crash. If the treadis badly worn,replace them.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Replace any tyres thathave been damaged byimpacts with potholes,curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tyrescan cause a crash. Onlythe dealer or an authorisedtyre service centre shouldrepair, replace, dismount,and mount the tyres.

. Do not spin the tyres inexcess of 56 km/h(35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow,mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause thetyres to explode.

See Tyre Pressure for High-SpeedOperation 0 307 for inflationpressure adjustment forhigh-speed driving.


VEHICLE CARE 305

All-Season TyresThis vehicle may come with all-seasontyres. These tyres are designed toprovide good overall performance onmost road surfaces and weatherconditions. Original equipment tyresdesigned to GM's specific tyreperformance criteria have a TPCspecification code moulded onto thesidewall. Original equipmentall-season tyres can be identified bythe last two characters of this TPCcode, which will be “MS.”

Consider installing winter tyres on thevehicle if frequent driving on snow orice-covered roads is expected.All-season tyres provide adequateperformance for most winter drivingconditions, but they may not offer thesame level of traction or performanceas winter tyres on snow or ice-coveredroads. See Winter Tyres 0 305.

Winter TyresThis vehicle was not originallyequipped with winter tyres. Wintertyres are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice-coveredroads. Consider installing winter tyres

on the vehicle if frequent driving onice or snow covered roads is expected.See your dealer for details regardingwinter tyre availability and proper tyreselection. Also, see Buying New Tyres0 313.

With winter tyres, there may bedecreased dry road traction, increasedroad noise and shorter tread life. Afterchanging to winter tyres, be alert forchanges in the vehicle handling andbraking.

If using winter tyres:

. Use tyres of the same brand andtread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tyres of thesame size, load range and speedrating as the original equipmenttyres.

Winter tyres with the same speedrating as the original equipment tyresmay not be available for H, V, W, Yand ZR speed rated tyres. If wintertyres with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tyre'smaximum speed capability.

Low-Profile TyresThe vehicle has low profile tyresthat are classified as touring tyresand are designed for on road use.The low-profile, wide tread designis not recommended for off-roaddriving. See Off-Road Driving 0 195,for additional information.

Caution

Low-profile tyres are moresusceptible to damage from roadhazards or curb impact thanstandard profile tyres. Tyre and/orwheel assembly damage can occurwhen coming into contact withroad hazards like potholes, or sharpedged objects, or when sliding intoa kerb. The warranty does not coverthis type of damage. Keep tyres setto the correct inflation pressure andwhen possible, avoid contact withkerbs, potholes, and other roadhazards.


306 VEHICLE CARE

Tyre PressureTyres need the correct amount ofair pressure to operate effectively.

Caution

Neither tyre underinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tyres, or tyresthat do not have enough air,can result in:

. Tyre overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tyres, or tyres thathave too much air, can result in:

. Unusual wear.

. Poor handling.

. Rough ride.(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tyre and Loading Informationlabel on the vehicle indicates theoriginal equipment tyres and thecorrect cold tyre inflationpressures. The recommendedpressure is the minimum airpressure needed to support thevehicle's maximum load carryingcapacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weight thevehicle can carry, and an exampleof the Tyre and LoadingInformation label, see Vehicle LoadLimits 0 202. How the vehicle isloaded affects vehicle handlingand ride comfort. Never load thevehicle with more weight than itwas designed to carry.

When to Check

Check the tyres once a monthor more.

Do not forget the spare tyre, if thevehicle has one. See Full-Size SpareTyre 0 326 for additionalinformation.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tyre pressure.Proper tyre inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tyre.Check the tyre inflation pressurewhen the tyres are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been driven forat least three hours or no morethan 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetyre valve stem. Press the tyregauge firmly onto the valve to geta pressure measurement. If thecold tyre inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tyre and LoadingInformation label, no furtheradjustment is necessary. If the


VEHICLE CARE 307

inflation pressure is low, add airuntil the recommended pressure isreached. If the inflation pressureis high, press on the metal stem inthe centre of the tyre valve torelease air.

Re-check the tyre pressure withthe tyre gauge.

Put the valve caps back on thevalve stems to keep out dirt andmoisture and prevent leaks. Useonly valve caps designed for thevehicle by GM. TPMS sensorscould be damaged and would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Tyre Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation

{ Warning

Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h(100 mph) or higher, putsadditional strain on tyres. Sustainedhigh-speed driving causes excessive

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

heat build-up and can cause suddentyre failure. This could cause acrash, and you or others could bekilled. Some high-speed rated tyresrequire inflation pressureadjustment for high-speedoperation. When speed limits androad conditions allow the vehicle tobe driven at high speeds, make surethe tyres are rated for high-speedoperation, are in excellentcondition, and are set to the correctcold tyre inflation pressure for thevehicle load.

When driving the vehicle at speeds of160 km/h (100 mph) or higher, set thecold inflation pressure to 20 kPa(3 psi) above the recommended tyrepressure shown on the Tyre andLoading Information label. Return thetyres to the recommended cold tyreinflation pressure when high-speeddriving has ended. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 202 and Tyre Pressure 0 306.

Tyre Pressure MonitorSystem

Caution

Modifications made to the TyrePressure Monitor System (TPMS) byanyone other than an authorisedservice facility may voidauthorisation to use the system.

The Tyre Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tyre pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitor theair pressure in your vehicle's tyres andtransmit tyre pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tyre, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checked monthlywhen cold and inflated to theinflation pressure recommended bythe vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tyre inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastyres of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or


308 VEHICLE CARE

tyre inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tyreinflation pressure for those tyres.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tyrepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tyre pressuretelltale when one or more of yourtyres is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tyrepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tyres assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tyrecauses the tyre to overheat and canlead to tyre failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tyretread life, and may affect the vehicle'shandling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tyremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tyrepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tyrepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicator toindicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combinedwith the low tyre pressure telltale.When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as longas the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tyrepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tyres orwheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretyres or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tyres and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tyre Pressure Monitor Operation0 308 for additional information.

See Declaration of Conformity 0 356.

Tyre Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a Tyre PressureMonitor System (TPMS). The TPMS isdesigned to warn the driver when alow tyre pressure condition exists.TPMS sensors are mounted onto eachtyre and wheel assembly, excludingthe spare tyre and wheel assembly.The TPMS sensors monitor the airpressure in the tyres and transmitsthe tyre pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

When a low tyre pressure condition isdetected, the TPMS illuminates thelow tyre pressure warning light on theinstrument cluster. If the warninglight comes on, stop as soon as


VEHICLE CARE 309

possible and inflate the tyres to therecommended pressure shown on theTyre and Loading Information label.See Vehicle Load Limits 0 202.

A message to check the pressure in aspecific tyre displays in the DriverInformation Centre (DIC). The low tyrepressure warning light and the DICwarning message come on at eachignition cycle until the tyres areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tyre pressurelevels can be viewed. For additionalinformation and details about the DICoperation and displays see DriverInformation Centre (DIC) 0 146.

The low tyre pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that the airpressure is getting low and needs tobe inflated to the proper pressure.

A Tyre and Loading Information label,attached to your vehicle, shows thesize of the original equipment tyresand the correct inflation pressure forthe tyres when they are cold. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 202 for an

example of the Tyre and LoadingInformation label and its location.Also see Tyre Pressure 0 306.

The TPMS can warn about a low tyrepressure condition but it does notreplace normal tyre maintenance. SeeTyre Inspection 0 311, Tyre Rotation0 311, and Tyres 0 304.

Caution

Tyre sealant materials are not allthe same. A non-approved tyresealant could damage the TPMSsensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tyresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use onlythe GM approved tyre sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properly ifone or more of the TPMS sensors aremissing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, the low

tyre warning light flashes for aboutone minute and then stays on for theremainder of the ignition cycle. A DICwarning message also displays. Themalfunction light and DIC warningmessage come on at each ignitioncycle until the problem is corrected.Some of the conditions that can causethese to come on are:

. One of the road tyres has beenreplaced with the spare tyre. Thespare tyre does not have a TPMSsensor. The malfunction light andDIC message should go off afterthe road tyre is replaced and thesensor matching process isperformed successfully. See “TPMSSensor Matching Process”following.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tyres. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing the sensormatching process. See "TPMSSensor Matching Process"following.


310 VEHICLE CARE

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. See yourdealer for service.

. Replacement tyres or wheels donot match the original equipmenttyres or wheels. Tyres and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tyres 0 313.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tyre condition. See your dealer forservice if the TPMS malfunction lightand DIC message come on andstay on.

TPMS Sensor Matching Process

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtyre/wheel position after rotating thevehicle's tyres or replacing one ormore of the TPMS sensors. The TPMSsensor matching process should alsobe performed after replacing a sparetyre with a road tyre containing theTPMS sensor. The malfunction lightand the DIC message should go off atthe next ignition cycle. The sensorsare matched to the tyre/wheelpositions, using a TPMS relearn tool,in the following order: driver sidefront tyre, passenger side front tyre,passenger side rear tyre, and driverside rear tyre. See your dealer forservice or to purchase a relearn tool.

You have two minutes to match thefirst tyre/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtyre/wheel positions. If it takes longer,the matching process stops and mustbe restarted.

The TPMS sensor matching process isoutlined below:

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Place the vehicle power mode inON/RUN/START. See IgnitionPositions 0 207.

3. Make sure the Tyre Pressure infodisplay option is turned on. Theinfo displays on the DIC can beturned on and off through theSettings menu. See DriverInformation Centre (DIC) 0 146.

4. Use the five-way DIC control onthe right side of the steeringwheel to scroll to the TyrePressure screen under the DICinfo page. See Driver InformationCentre (DIC) 0 146.

5. Press and hold SEL in the centreof the five-way DIC control.

The horn sounds twice to signalthe receiver is in relearn modeand the TYRE LEARNINGACTIVE message displays on theDIC screen.

6. Start with the driver sidefront tyre.

7. Place the relearn tool against thetyre sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor. A horn


VEHICLE CARE 311

chirp confirms that the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to this tyre and wheelposition.

8. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tyre, and repeat theprocedure in Step 7.

9. Proceed to the passenger siderear tyre, and repeat theprocedure in Step 7.

10. Proceed to the driver side reartyre, and repeat the procedure inStep 7. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartyre, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TYRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.

11. Press ENGINE START/STOP toturn the ignition off.

12. Set all four tyres to therecommended air pressure levelas indicated on the Tyre andLoading Information label.

Tyre InspectionWe recommend that the tyres,including the spare tyre, if thevehicle has one, be inspected forsigns of wear or damage at leastonce a month.

Replace the tyre if:

. The indicators at three or moreplaces around the tyre canbe seen.

. There is cord or fabric showingthrough the tyre's rubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snagged deepenough to show cord or fabric.

. The tyre has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tyre has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

Tyre RotationTyres should be rotated at theintervals specified in theMaintenance Schedule. SeeScheduled Maintenance 0 344.

Tyres are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tyres. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Anytime unusual wear is noticed,rotate the tyres as soon aspossible, check for proper tyreinflation pressure, and check fordamaged tyres or wheels. If theunusual wear continues after therotation, check the wheelalignment. See When It Is Time forNew Tyres 0 312 and WheelReplacement 0 315.


312 VEHICLE CARE

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tyres.

Do not include the spare tyre inthe tyre rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tyres tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tyre and LoadingInformation label after the tyreshave been rotated. See TyrePressure 0 306 and Vehicle LoadLimits 0 202.

Reset the Tyre Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tyre Pressure MonitorOperation 0 308.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacities andSpecifications 0 350.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove any rustor dirt from places where the wheelattaches to the vehicle. In anemergency, a cloth or a paper towelcan be used; however, use a scraperor wire brush later to remove allrust or dirt.

Lightly coat the centre of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change or tyrerotation to prevent corrosion orrust build-up. Do not get greaseon the flat wheel mountingsurface or on the wheel nuts orbolts.

When It Is Time for NewTyresFactors, such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds, vehicleloading, and road conditions affect thewear rate of the tyres.

Tread wear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tyres.Tread wear indicators appear whenthe tyres have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. Somecommercial truck tyres may not havetread wear indicators. See TyreInspection 0 311 and Tyre Rotation0 311 for additional information.


VEHICLE CARE 313

The rubber in tyres ages over time.This also applies to the spare tyre,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factors includingtemperatures, loading conditions, andinflation pressure maintenance affecthow fast ageing takes place. GMrecommends that tyres, including thespare if equipped, be replaced after sixyears, regardless of tread wear. Thetyre manufacture date is the last fourdigits of the DOT Tyre IdentificationNumber (TIN) which is moulded intoone side of the tyre sidewall. The firsttwo digits represent the week (01–52)and the last two digits, the year. Forexample, the third week of the year2010 would have a four-digit DOTdate of 0310.

Vehicle Storage

Tyres age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Park avehicle that will be stored for at leasta month in a cool, dry, clean areaaway from direct sunlight to slowageing. This area should be free ofgrease, petrol, or other substancesthat can deteriorate rubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tyres that mayresult in vibrations while driving.When storing a vehicle for at least amonth, remove the tyres or raise thevehicle to reduce the weight from thetyres.

Buying New TyresGM has developed and matchedspecific tyres for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tyres installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tyre Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec) systemrating. When replacement tyresare needed, GM stronglyrecommends buying tyres with thesame TPC Spec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Spec systemconsiders over a dozen criticalspecifications that impact theoverall performance of the vehicle,including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tyre pressuremonitoring performance. GM'sTPC Spec number is moulded onto

the tyre's sidewall near the tyresize. If the tyres have anall-season tread design, the TPCSpec number will be followed byMS for mud and snow.

GM recommends replacing worntyres in complete sets of four.Uniform tread depth on all tyreswill help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handling performancemay be adversely affected if all thetyres are not replaced at the sametime. If proper rotation andmaintenance have been done, allfour tyres should wear out atabout the same time. See TyreRotation 0 311 for information onproper tyre rotation. However, if itis necessary to replace only oneaxle set of worn tyres, place thenew tyres on the rear axle.


314 VEHICLE CARE

{ Warning

Tyres could explode duringimproper service. Attempting tomount or dismount a tyre couldcause injury or death. Only yourdealer or authorised tyre servicecentre should mount ordismount the tyres.

{ Warning

Never drive faster than the speedthe tyres are rated, regardless of thelegal speed limit. When frequentlydriving the vehicle at high speedsand/or for prolonged periods oftime, check with your vehicle/tyredealer for the proper type of tyresto use for the specific driving andweather conditions.

{ Warning

Mixing tyres of different sizes,brands, or types may cause lossof control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use the correctsize, brand, and type of tyres onall wheels.

This vehicle may have adifferent size spare than theroad tyres originally installed onthe vehicle. When new, thevehicle included a spare tyreand wheel assembly with asimilar overall diameter as theroad tyres and wheels, so it isall right to drive on it. The sparetyre was developed for use onthis vehicle and will not affectvehicle handling.

{ Warning

Using bias-ply tyres on thevehicle may cause the wheel rimflanges to develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tyreand/or wheel could fail suddenlyand cause a crash. Use onlyradial-ply tyres with the wheelson the vehicle.

Winter tyres with the same speedrating as the original equipmenttyres may not be available for H,V, W, Y and ZR speed rated tyres.Never exceed the winter tyre'smaximum speed capability whenusing winter tyres with a lowerspeed rating.

If the vehicle tyres must bereplaced with a tyre that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size, loadrange, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tyres.


VEHICLE CARE 315

Vehicles that have a tyre pressuremonitoring system could give aninaccurate low-pressure warning ifnon-TPC Spec rated tyres areinstalled. See Tyre PressureMonitor System 0 307.

The Tyre and Loading Informationlabel indicates the originalequipment tyres on the vehicle.See Vehicle Load Limits 0 202, forthe label location and moreinformation about the Tyre andLoading Information label.

Different Size Tyres andWheelsIf wheels or tyres are installed that area different size than the originalequipment wheels and tyres, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, electronic stability control,or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also be affected.

{ Warning

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftyres not recommended for thosewheels are selected. This increasesthe chance of a crash and seriousinjury. Only use GM specific wheeland tyre systems developed for thevehicle, and have them properlyinstalled by a GM certifiedtechnician.

See Buying New Tyres 0 313 andAccessories and Modifications 0 269.

Wheel Alignment and TyreBalanceThe tyres and wheels were aligned andbalanced at the factory to provide thelongest tyre life and best overallperformance. Adjustments to wheelalignment and tyre balancing are notnecessary on a regular basis. Consideran alignment check if there is unusualtyre wear or the vehicle is significantlypulling to one side or the other. Some

slight pull to the left or right,depending on the crown of the roadand/or other road surface variationssuch as troughs or ruts, is normal.If the vehicle is vibrating when drivingon a smooth road, the tyres andwheels may need to be rebalanced.See your dealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted or corroded.If wheel nuts keep coming loose, thewheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nutsshould be replaced. If the wheel leaksair, replace it. Some aluminium wheelscan be repaired. See your dealer if anyof these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter,width, offset, and be mounted thesame way as the one it replaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tyre Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) sensors with new GM originalequipment parts.


316 VEHICLE CARE

{ Warning

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nutscan be dangerous. It could affectthe braking and handling of thevehicle. Tyres can lose air, andcause loss of control, causing acrash. Always use the correct wheel,wheel bolts, and wheel nuts forreplacement.

Caution

The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brakecooling, speedometer or odometercalibration, headlamp aim, bumperheight, vehicle ground clearance,and tyre or tyre chain clearance tothe body and chassis.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ Warning

Replacing a wheel with a used oneis dangerous. How it has been usedor how far it has been driven maybe unknown. It could fail suddenlyand cause a crash. When replacingwheels, use a new GM originalequipment wheel.

Tyre ChainsUse tyre chains only where legal andonly when you must.

Before using tyre chains, check withthe tyre manufacturer to make suretyre chains are compatible with thetyres on the vehicle.

It is recommended that tyre chains beused only on P265/70R17 size tyres.

Install them on the rear tyres, astightly as possible, with the endssecurely fastened.

Caution

Do not install traction devices onthe front tyres.

Drive slowly and follow the cablemanufacturer's instructions. If youhear the cables contacting the vehicle,stop and retighten them. If thecontact continues, slow down until itstops.

Caution

To help avoid damage to thevehicle, drive slowly, do not spinthe wheels, and readjust or removethe device if it contacts the vehicle.

If a Tyre Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tyre to blowoutwhile driving, especially if the tyresare maintained properly. If air goesout of a tyre, it is much more likely toleak out slowly. But if there ever is ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:


VEHICLE CARE 317

If a front tyre fails, the flat tyrecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid and mayrequire the same correction as used ina skid. Stop pressing the acceleratorpedal and steer to straighten thevehicle. It may be very bumpy andnoisy. Gently brake to a stop, well offthe road, if possible.

{ Warning

Driving on a flat tyre will causepermanent damage to the tyre.Re-inflating a tyre after it has beendriven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash. Neverattempt to re-inflate a tyre that hasbeen driven on while severelyunderinflated or flat. Have your

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

dealer or an authorised tyre servicecentre repair or replace the flat tyreas soon as possible.

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without the appropriatesafety equipment and training. If ajack is provided with the vehicle, itis designed only for changing a flattyre. If it is used for anything else,you or others could be badly injuredor killed if the vehicle slips off thejack. If a jack is provided with thevehicle, only use it for changing aflat tyre.

If a tyre goes flat, avoid further tyreand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See Hazard WarningFlashers 0 176.

{ Warning

Changing a tyre can be dangerous.The vehicle can slip off the jack androll over or fall causing injury ordeath. Find a level place to changethe tyre. To help prevent the vehiclefrom moving:

1. Apply the parking brakefirmly.

2. Put the shift lever in P (Park).

3. For vehicles with four-wheeldrive with an N (Neutral)transfer case position, be surethe transfer case is in a drivegear — not in N (Neutral).

4. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

5. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

6. Place wheel chocks,if equipped, on both sides ofthe tyre at the oppositecorner of the tyre beingchanged.


318 VEHICLE CARE

When the vehicle has a flat tyre (2),use the following example as a guideto assist in the placement of thewheel blocks (1), if equipped.

1. Wheel Chock (If Equipped)2. Flat Tyre

The following information explainshow to use the jack and change a tyre.

Tyre ChangingBefore changing a flat tyre, see“Hands-Free Operation” under Tailgate0 37.

Removing the Spare Tyre andTools

The equipment needed to change aflat tyre is stored in the rear of thevehicle, on the driver side, behind adoor in the trim panel.

1. Jack Knob2. Wing Nut Retaining the

Wheel Blocks3. Wing Nut Retaining the

Tool Bag

If equipped, the tow eye boltwill be in a bag secured tothe tool bag.

1. Pull to open the trim panel door.

The third row driver side seatmay need to be folded to accessthe trim panel door.

2. Lift the acoustic pad to accessthe jack and tools.

3. Turn the wing nut retaining thetool bag (3) anti-clockwise toremove it.

Pull the tool bag toward the frontof the vehicle and lift the rearportion of the bag upward toremove it.


VEHICLE CARE 319

4. Turn the jack knob (1)anti-clockwise to release the jackand wheel blocks from thebracket.

5. Turn the wing nut retaining thewheel blocks (2) anti-clockwiseto remove the wheel blocks andthe wheel block retainer.

Use the following tools:

1. Jack2. Wheel Blocks3. Jack Handle4. Jack Handle Extensions5. Wheel Wrench

To access the spare tyre, refer to thefollowing graphics and instructions:

1. Hoist Assembly2. Hoist Shaft3. Hoist Shaft Access

Cover/Hole4. Jack Handle Extensions5. Wheel Wrench6. Spare Tyre Lock7. Hoist End of Extension Tool8. Hoist Shaft Access Hole9. Spare Tyre (Valve Stem

Pointed Down)10. Tyre/Wheel Retainer11. Hoist Cable

1. Open the hoist shaft accessdoor (3) on the bumper to accessthe spare tyre lock (6).

If equipped with a hitch cover,turn the hitch cover retainersanti-clockwise and pull the coverdownward to remove it beforeremoving the hoist shaftaccess door.

2. To remove the spare tyre lock(6), insert the key located insidethe remote, turn it clockwise,and then pull it straight out.


320 VEHICLE CARE

3. Assemble the two jack handleextensions (4) and wheelwrench (5), as shown.

4. Insert the open end of theextension (7) through the hole inthe rear bumper (8) (hoist shaftaccess hole).

Be sure the hoist end of theextension (7) connects to thehoist shaft. The ribbed squareend of the extension is used tolower the spare tyre.

5. Turn the wheel wrenchanti-clockwise to lower the sparetyre to the ground. Continue toturn the wheel wrench until thespare tyre can be pulled out fromunder the vehicle.

6. Use the wheel wrench hook topull the hoist cable closer toassist in reaching the spare tyre.

7. Tilt the tyre toward the vehiclewith some slack in the cable toaccess the tyre/wheel retainer.Tilt the retainer and pull it andthe cable and spring through thecentre of the wheel.

Once the retainer is separatedfrom the guide pin, tilt theretainer and pull it through thecentre of the wheel along withthe cable and latch.

8. Put the spare tyre near theflat tyre.


VEHICLE CARE 321

Removing the Flat Tyre andInstalling the Spare Tyre

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tyre GoesFlat 0 316 for more information.

2. If the vehicle has a centre capthat covers the wheel fasteners,place the chisel end of the wheelwrench in the slot on the wheeland gently pry the cap out.

3. Use the wheel wrench to loosenall the wheel nuts. Turn thewheel wrench anticlockwise toloosen the wheel nuts. Do notremove the wheel nuts yet.

Jacking Locations (Overall View)

4. Position the jack under thevehicle, as shown.

Left Front Shown, Right Front Similar

Front Tyre Flat: If the flat tyreis on a front tyre of the vehicle,use the jack handle and only onejack handle extension. Attach thewheel wrench to the jack handleextension. Attach the jack handleto the jack. Position the jack onthe frame behind the flat tyrewhere the frame sections overlap.Turn the wheel wrench clockwiseto raise the vehicle. Raise thevehicle far enough off the groundso there is enough room for thespare tyre to clear the ground.


322 VEHICLE CARE

Rear Position

Rear Tyre Flat: If the flat tyre ison a rear tyre of the vehicle, usethe jack handle (2) and both jackhandle extensions (3). Attach thewheel wrench (4) to the jackhandle extensions (3). Attach thejack handle (2) to the jack (1).Use the jacking pad (5) providedon the rear axle. Turn the wheelwrench (4) clockwise to raise thevehicle. Raise the vehicle farenough off the ground so there isenough room for the spare tyreto clear the ground.

{ Warning

Getting under a vehicle when it islifted on a jack is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack, you couldbe badly injured or killed. Never getunder a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.

{ Warning

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damagethe vehicle and even make thevehicle fall. To help avoid personalinjury and vehicle damage, be sureto fit the jack lift head into theproper location before raising thevehicle.

5. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

6. Take off the flat tyre.


VEHICLE CARE 323

7. Remove any rust or dirt from thewheel bolts, mounting surfaces,and spare wheel.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove any rustor dirt from places where the wheelattaches to the vehicle. In anemergency, a cloth or a paper towelcan be used; however, use a scraperor wire brush later to remove allrust or dirt.

8. Put the wheel nuts back on withthe rounded end of the nutstoward the wheel after mountingthe spare tyre.

{ Warning

Never use oil or grease on bolts ornuts because the nuts might comeloose. The vehicle's wheel could falloff, causing a crash.

9. Tighten each wheel nut by hand.Then use the wheel wrench totighten the nuts until the wheelis held against the hub.

10. Turn the wheel wrenchanticlockwise to lower thevehicle. Lower the jackcompletely.

11. Tighten the nuts firmly in acrisscross sequence as shown byturning the wheel wrenchclockwise.

{ Warning

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can cause thewheels to become loose or come off.The wheel nuts should be tightenedwith a torque wrench to the propertorque specification after replacing.Follow the torque specificationsupplied by the aftermarketmanufacturer when using accessorylocking wheel nuts. See Capacitiesand Specifications 0 350 for originalequipment wheel nut torquespecifications.

Caution

Improperly tightened wheel nutscan lead to brake pulsation and discdamage. To avoid expensive brake

(Continued)


324 VEHICLE CARE

Caution (Continued)

repairs, evenly tighten the wheelnuts in the proper sequence and tothe proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications 0 350for the wheel nut torquespecification.

When reinstalling the regular wheeland tyre, also reinstall the centre cap,if equipped. Line up the tab on thecentre cap with the slot in the wheel.The cap only goes in one way. Placethe cap on the wheel and press until itsnaps into place.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tyre andTools

{ Warning

Storing a jack, a tyre, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop or

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

Caution

Storing an aluminium wheel with aflat tyre under your vehicle for anextended period of time or with thevalve stem pointing up can damagethe wheel. Always stow the wheelwith the valve stem pointing downand have the wheel/tyre repaired assoon as possible.

Caution

The tyre hoist can be damaged ifthere is no tension on the cablewhen using it. To have thenecessary tension, the spare or roadtyre and wheel assembly must beinstalled on the tyre hoist to use it.

Store the tyre under the rear of thevehicle in the spare tyre carrier. Referto the following graphics andinstructions:

1. Hoist Assembly2. Hoist Shaft3. Hoist Shaft Access

Cover/Hole4. Jack Handle Extensions5. Wheel Wrench6. Spare Tyre Lock7. Hoist End of Extension Tool8. Hoist Shaft Access Hole9. Spare Tyre (Valve Stem

Pointed Down)10. Tyre/Wheel Retainer


VEHICLE CARE 325

11. Hoist Cable

1. Put the tyre (9) on the ground atthe rear of the vehicle with thevalve stem pointed down, and tothe rear.

2. Tilt the tyre toward the vehicle.Separate the tyre/wheel retainerfrom the guide pin. Pull the pinthrough the centre of the wheel.Tilt the retainer down throughthe centre wheel opening.

Make sure the retainer is fullyseated across the underside ofthe wheel.

3. Assemble the two jack handleextensions (4) and wheelwrench (5).

4. Insert the open end of theextension (7) through the hole inthe rear bumper (8) (hoist shaftaccess hole).

5. Raise the tyre part way upward.Make sure the retainer is seatedin the wheel opening.

6. Raise the tyre fully against theunderside of the vehicle byturning the wheel wrenchclockwise until you hear twoclicks or feel it skip twice. Thecable cannot be overtightened.

7. Make sure the tyre is storedsecurely. Push, pull, and then tryto turn the tyre. If the tyremoves, use the wheel wrench totighten the cable.

8. Reinstall the spare tyre lock.

9. Reinstall the hoist shaft accesscover.

If equipped, reinstall the hitchcover and turn the retainersclockwise.

To store the tools:

1. Return the tools (wheel wrench,jack handle, and jack handleextensions) to the tool bag.


326 VEHICLE CARE

2. Assemble the wheel blocks andjack together with the wing nut.

3. Position the jack and wheelblocks in the driver side trimpanel over the wheelhouse.

4. Turn the jack knob clockwiseuntil the jack is secured tight inthe mounting bracket. Be sure toposition the holes in the base ofthe jack onto the pin in themounting bracket.

5. Use the retaining bracket tofasten the tool bag on the studand turn the wing nut clockwiseto secure.

6. Close the trim panel door.

Full-Size Spare TyreIf this vehicle came with a full-sizespare tyre, it was fully inflated whennew, however, it can lose air overtime. Check the inflation pressureregularly. See Tyre Pressure 0 306 andVehicle Load Limits 0 202. Forinstructions on how to remove, install,or store a spare tyre, see TyreChanging 0 318.

If equipped with a temporary usefull-size spare tyre, it is indicated onthe tyre sidewall. This spare tyreshould not be driven on over112 km/h (70 mph), or 88 km/h(55 mph) when pulling a trailer, at theproper inflation pressure. Repair andreplace the road tyre as soon as it isconvenient, and stow the spare tyrefor future use.

Caution

If the vehicle has four-wheel driveand a different size spare tyre isinstalled, do not drive in four-wheeldrive until the flat tyre is repairedand/or replaced. The vehicle couldbe damaged and the repairs wouldnot be covered by the warranty.Never use four-wheel drive when adifferent size spare tyre is installedon the vehicle.

The vehicle may have a different sizespare tyre than the road tyresoriginally installed on the vehicle. Thisspare tyre was developed for use onthis vehicle, so it is all right to driveon it. If the vehicle has four-wheel

drive and a different size spare tyre isinstalled, only drive in two-wheeldrive.

After installing the spare tyre on thevehicle, stop as soon as possible andcheck that the spare tyre is correctlyinflated.

Have the damaged or flat road tyrerepaired or replaced and installedback onto the vehicle as soon aspossible so the spare tyre will beavailable in case it is needed again.

Do not mix tyres and wheels ofdifferent sizes, because they will notfit. Keep your spare tyre and its wheeltogether. If the vehicle has a spare tyrethat does not match the original roadtyres and wheels in size and type, donot include the spare in the tyrerotation.


VEHICLE CARE 327

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery 0 286.

If the vehicle's battery (or batteries)has run down, you may want to useanother vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sure touse the following steps to do it safely.

{ Warning

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of these thingscan hurt you.

Caution

Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to the vehicle thatwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Trying to start the vehicleby pushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

Caution

If the other vehicle does not have a12-volt system with a negativeground, both vehicles can bedamaged. Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jump starting.

2. If the vehicle is equipped withdual batteries, using the batterythat is closer to the starter willreduce electrical resistance. This

is located on the passenger side,in the rear of the enginecompartment.

3. Get the vehicles close enough sothe jump leads can reach, but besure the vehicles are nottouching each other. If they are,it could cause an unwantedground connection. You wouldnot be able to start your vehicle,and the bad grounding coulddamage the electrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, apply theparking brake firmly on bothvehicles involved in the jumpstart procedure. Put theautomatic transmission inP (Park) or a manual gearbox inNeutral before setting theparking brake. For vehicles withfour-wheel-drive with aN (Neutral) transfer caseposition, be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear — notN (Neutral).


328 VEHICLE CARE

Caution

If any accessories are left on orplugged in during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Wheneverpossible, turn off or unplug allaccessories on either vehicle whenjump starting.

4. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into theaccessory power outlets. Turn offthe radio and all the lamps thatare not needed. This will avoidsparks and help save bothbatteries. And it could save theradio!

5. Open the hood on the othervehicle and locate the positive (+)and negative (-) terminallocations on that vehicle.

The positive (+) terminal is undera red plastic cover at the positivebattery post. To uncover thepositive (+) terminal, open thered plastic cover.

For more information on thelocation of the remotepositive (+) and remote negative(−) terminals, see EngineCompartment Overview 0 271.

{ Warning

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not running andcan injure you. Keep hands,clothing, and tools away from anyunderbonnet electric fan.

{ Warning

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode. Peoplehave been hurt doing this, andsome have been blinded. Use atorch if you need more light.

Battery fluid contains acid that canburn you. Do not get it on you.If you accidentally get it in youreyes or on your skin, flush the placewith water and get medical helpimmediately.

{ Warning

Fans or other moving engine partscan injure you badly. Keep yourhands away from moving partsonce the engine is running.


VEHICLE CARE 329

6. Check that the jump leads do nothave loose or missing insulation.If they do, you could get a shock.The vehicles could bedamaged too.

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one. Negative (-) willgo to a heavy, unpainted metalengine part or to a remotenegative (-) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (-) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other partstoo. And do not connect thenegative (-) cable to thenegative (-) terminal on the deadbattery because this can causesparks.

7. Connect the red positive (+) cableto the positive (+) terminal of thevehicle with the dead battery.

8. Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one.

9. Connect the black negative (−)cable to the negative (−) terminalof the good battery. Use a remotenegative (-) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step.

10. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable to the metalbracket that is bolted to theengine and supports theresonator, on the vehicle withthe dead battery.

11. Start the vehicle with the goodbattery and run the engine for awhile.

12. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, it probablyneeds service.


330 VEHICLE CARE

Caution

If the jump leads are connected orremoved in the wrong order,electrical shorting may occur anddamage the vehicle. The repairswould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always connect andremove the jump leads in thecorrect order, making sure that thecables do not touch each other orother metal.

Jump Lead Removal

Reverse the sequence exactly whenremoving the jump leads.

After starting the disabled vehicle andremoving the jump leads, allow it toidle for several minutes.

Towing the Vehicle

Caution

Incorrectly towing a disabledvehicle may cause damage. Thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Do not lash or hook to suspensioncomponents. Use the proper strapsaround the tyres to secure thevehicle.

Have the vehicle towed on a flatbedcar carrier. A wheel lift tow truckcould damage the vehicle.

Consult your dealer or a professionaltowing service if the disabled vehiclemust be towed.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle, such as a motor home. Thetwo most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are dinghy

and dolly towing. Dinghy towing istowing the vehicle with all four wheelson the ground. Dolly towing is towingthe vehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels on a dolly.

Follow the tow vehicle manufacturer'sinstructions. See your dealer ortrailering professional for additionaladvice and equipmentrecommendations.

Caution

Use of a shield mounted in front ofthe vehicle grille could restrictairflow and cause damage to thetransmission. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehicle warranty.If using a shield, only use one thatattaches to the towing vehicle.


VEHICLE CARE 331

Dinghy Towing

Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Caution

If the two-wheel-drive vehicle istowed with all four wheels on theground, the drivetrain componentscould be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles should notbe towed with all four wheels on theground.

Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Only dinghy tow four-wheel-drivevehicles with a two-speed transfercase that have an N (Neutral) and aFour-Wheel Drive Low (4 n) setting.

{ Warning

Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle'stransfer case into N (Neutral) cancause the vehicle to roll even if thetransmission is in P (Park). You orothers could be injured. Apply theparking brake before shifting thetransfer case to N (Neutral).

To dinghy tow:

1. Position the vehicle being towedbehind the tow vehicle, facingforward and on a level surface.

2. Securely attach the vehicle beingtowed to the tow vehicle.

3. Apply the parking brake andstart the engine.

For vehicles with Electric ParkingBrakes (EPB), the EPB cannot beapplied and the tyres must bechocked.

4. Shift the transfer case toN (Neutral). See “Shifting intoN (Neutral)” under Four-WheelDrive 0 219. Check that thevehicle is in N (Neutral) byshifting the transmission toR (Reverse) and then to D(Drive). There should be nomovement of the vehicle whileshifting.

5. Shift the transmission into D(Drive). Turn the engine off.


332 VEHICLE CARE

Caution

Failure to disconnect the negativebattery cable or to have it contactthe terminals can cause damage tothe vehicle.

6. Disconnect the negative batterycable at the battery and securethe nut and bolt. Cover thenegative battery post with anon-conductive material toprevent any contact with thenegative battery terminal.

7. Shift the transmission toP (Park).

Caution

If the steering column is locked,vehicle damage may occur.

8. Move the steering wheel to makesure the steering column isunlocked.

9. With a foot on the brake pedal,release the parking brake.

10. If equipped with Keyless Access,keep the RKE transmitter outsidethe vehicle, and manually lockthe doors. Access the vehicle asif it has a dead RKE transmitterbattery, by using the key in thedoor lock.

Disconnecting the Towed Vehicle

Before disconnecting the towedvehicle:

1. Park on a level surface.

2. Apply the parking brake, thenshift the transmission toP (Park).

3. Connect the battery.

4. Apply the brake pedal.

5. Turn the ignition to ON/RUNwith the engine off. Shift thetransfer case out of N (Neutral)to 2 m. See “Shifting out ofN (Neutral)” under Four-WheelDrive 0 219. See your dealer ifthe transfer case cannot beshifted out of N (Neutral).

6. Check that the vehicle is in 2 mby starting the engine andshifting the transmission toR (Reverse) and then to D(Drive). There should bemovement of the vehicle whileshifting.

7. Shift the transmission to P (Park)and turn off the ignition.

8. Disconnect the vehicle from thetow vehicle.


10. Reset any lost presets.

The outside temperature displaywill default to 0 °C (32 °F) butwill reset with normal usage.


VEHICLE CARE 333

Dolly Towing - Front Towing(Front Wheels Off the Ground)

Caution

If a two-wheel-drive vehicle istowed with the rear wheels on theground, the transmission could bedamaged. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Never tow the vehicle with the rearwheels on the ground.

Caution

Towing a four-wheel-drive vehiclewith all four wheels on the ground,or even with only two of its wheelson the ground, will damagedrivetrain components. Do not towa four-wheel-drive vehicle with anyof its wheels on the ground.

This vehicle should not be towed withthe rear wheels on the ground.

Dolly Towing – Rear Towing(Rear Wheels Off the Ground) –Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Caution

Towing a four-wheel-drive vehiclewith all four wheels on the ground,or even with only two of its wheelson the ground, will damagedrivetrain components. Do not towa four-wheel-drive vehicle with anyof its wheels on the ground.

This vehicle should not be towed withany wheels on the ground.

Dolly Towing – Rear Towing(Rear Wheels Off the Ground) –Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles


334 VEHICLE CARE

To dolly tow the vehicle from the rear:

1. Attach the dolly to the towvehicle following the dollymanufacturer's instructions.

2. Drive the rear wheels onto thedolly.

3. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Parking Brake 0 223.

4. Put the transmission in P (Park).

5. Secure the vehicle to the dollyfollowing the manufacturer'sinstructions.

6. Use an adequate clamping devicedesigned for towing to ensurethat the front wheels are lockedinto the straight position.


Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Locks

Locks are lubricated at the factory.Use a de-icing agent only whenabsolutely necessary, and have thelocks greased after using. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants0 347.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish, washit often and out of direct sunlight.

Caution

Do not use petroleum-based, acidic,or abrasive cleaning agents as theycan damage the vehicle's paint,metal, or plastic parts. If damageoccurs, it would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Approvedcleaning products can be obtainedfrom your dealer. Follow allmanufacturer directions regarding

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

correct product usage, necessarysafety precautions, and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.

Caution

Avoid using high-pressure washerscloser than 30 cm (12 in) to thesurface of the vehicle. Use of powerwashers exceeding 8,274 kPa(1,200 psi) can result in damage orremoval of paint and decals.

Caution

Do not power wash any componentunder the bonnet that has thise symbol.

This could cause damage thatwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.


VEHICLE CARE 335

If using an automatic car wash, followthe car wash instructions. Thewindscreen wiper and rear windowwiper, if equipped, must be off.Remove any accessories that may bedamaged or interfere with the carwash equipment.

Rinse the vehicle well, before washingand after, to remove all cleaningagents completely. If they are allowedto dry on the surface, they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfaces aredamaged, see your dealer to have thedamage assessed and repaired. Foreignmaterials such as calcium chlorideand other salts, ice melting agents,road oil and tar, tree sap, birddroppings, chemicals from industrialchimneys, etc., can damage thevehicle's finish if they remain onpainted surfaces. Wash the vehicle assoon as possible. If necessary, use

non-abrasive cleaners that are markedsafe for painted surfaces to removeforeign matter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. See yourdealer for approved cleaning products.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber, decals,simulated wood, or flat paint asdamage can occur.

Caution

Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may damageit. Use only non-abrasive waxes andpolishes that are made for a basecoat/clear coat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged or coveredwhenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalMouldings

Caution

Failure to clean and protect thebright metal mouldings can resultin a hazy white finish or pitting.This damage would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

The bright metal mouldings on thevehicle are aluminium, chrome orstainless steel. To prevent damagealways follow these cleaninginstructions:

. Be sure the moulding is cool tothe touch before applying anycleaning solution.

. Use only approved cleaningsolutions for aluminium, chromeor stainless steel. Some cleanersare highly acidic or containalkaline substances and candamage the mouldings.

. Always dilute a concentratedcleaner according to themanufacturer's instructions.


336 VEHICLE CARE

. Do not use cleaners that are notintended for automotive use.

. Use a nonabrasive wax on thevehicle after washing to protectand extend the moulding finish.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses,Emblems, Decals, and Stripes

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soap toclean exterior lamps, lenses, emblems,decals, and stripes. Follow instructionsunder "Washing the Vehicle"previously in this section.

Lamp covers are made of plastic, andsome have a UV protective coating. Donot clean or wipe them when dry.

Do not use any of the following onlamp covers:

. Abrasive or caustic agents.

. Washer fluids and other cleaningagents in higher concentrationsthan suggested by themanufacturer.

. Solvents, alcohols, fuels, or otherharsh cleaners.

. Ice scrapers or other hard items.

. Aftermarket appearance caps orcovers while the lamps areilluminated, due to excessive heatgenerated.

Caution

Failure to clean lamps properly cancause damage to the lamp coverthat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Caution

Using wax on low gloss black finishstripes can increase the gloss leveland create a non-uniform finish.Clean low gloss stripes with soapand water only.

Air Intakes

Clear debris from the air intakes,between the bonnet and windscreen,when washing the vehicle.

Windscreen and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windscreenwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindscreen washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windscreenthoroughly when cleaning the blades.Insects, road grime, sap, and abuild-up of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiper streaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dusty conditions,sand, salt, heat, sun, snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply Dielectric silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. Lubricate weatherstrips atleast once a year. Hot, dry climatesmay require more frequentapplication. Black marks from rubbermaterial on painted surfaces can beremoved by rubbing with a cleancloth. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 347.


VEHICLE CARE 337

Tyres

Use a stiff brush with tyre cleaner toclean the tyres.

Caution

Using petroleum-based tyredressing products on the vehiclemay damage the paint finish and/ortyres. When applying a tyredressing, always wipe off anyoverspray from all painted surfaceson the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim — Aluminiumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mild soapand water to clean the wheels. Afterrinsing thoroughly with clean water,dry with a soft, clean towel. A waxmay then be applied.

Caution

Chrome wheels and other chrometrim may be damaged if the vehicleis not washed after driving on roads

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

that have been sprayed withmagnesium, calcium, or sodiumchloride. These chlorides are usedon roads for conditions such as iceand dust. Always wash the chromewith soap and water after exposure.

Caution

To avoid surface damage, do notuse strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes,or cleaners that contain acid onaluminium or chrome-platedwheels. Use only approved cleaners.Also, never drive a vehicle withaluminium or chrome-plated wheelsthrough an automatic car wash thatuses silicone carbide tyre cleaningbrushes. Damage could occur andthe repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Brake System

Visually inspect brake lines and hosesfor proper hook-up, binding, leaks,cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brakepads for wear and discs for surfacecondition. Inspect drum brake linings/shoes for wear or cracks. Inspect allother brake parts.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect steering, suspension,and chassis components for damaged,loose, or missing parts or signs ofwear at least once a year.

Inspect power steering for properattachment, connections, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.

Visually check constant velocity jointboots and axle seals for leaks.

For 1500 Series vehicles, at least everyother oil change lubricate the outertrack rod ends.

Control arm ball joints on 1500 Seriesvehicles are maintenance-free.


338 VEHICLE CARE

Caution

Lubrication of applicable steering/suspension points should not bedone unless the temperature is−12 °C (10 °F) or higher, or damagecould result.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,bonnet hinges, tailgate hinges, steelfuel door hinge and power assist stephinges, unless the components areplastic. Applying silicone grease onweatherstrips with a clean cloth willmake them last longer, seal better,and not stick or squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

At least twice a year, spring and fall,use plain water to flush any corrosivematerials from the underbody. Takecare to thoroughly clean any areaswhere mud and other debris cancollect. If equipped with power assiststeps, extend them and then use ahigh pressure wash to clean all jointsand gaps.

Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure water canovercome the seals and contaminatethe fluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfer caseand/or axles and should be replaced.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged and requiressheet metal repair or replacement,make sure the body repair shopapplies anti-corrosion material toparts repaired or replaced to restorecorrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall upon andattack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolourations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface. See “Finish Care” previously inthis section.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soiling.Newspapers or dark garments cantransfer colour to the vehicle'sinterior..

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mild soapsolution, immediately remove handlotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Use cleaners specifically designed forthe surfaces being cleaned to preventpermanent damage. Apply cleanersdirectly to the cleaning cloth. Do notspray cleaners on any switches orcontrols. Remove cleaners quickly.


VEHICLE CARE 339

Before using cleaners, read and followall safety instructions on the label.While cleaning the interior, open thedoors and windows to get properventilation.

To prevent damage, do not clean theinterior using the following cleanersor techniques:

. Never use a razor or any othersharp object to remove a soil fromany interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surface aggressivelyor with too much pressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners, useapproximately 20 drops per 3.8 L(1 gal) of water. A concentratedsoap solution will create streaksand attract dirt. Do not usesolutions that contain strong orcaustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.If necessary, use a commercial glasscleaner after cleaning with plain water.

Caution

To prevent scratching, never useabrasive cleaners on automotiveglass. Abrasive cleaners oraggressive cleaning may damagethe rear window defogger.

Cleaning the windscreen with waterduring the first three to six months ofownership will reduce tendency to fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will not bedamaged. Clean spots with water andmild soap.

Coated Mouldings

Coated mouldings should be cleaned.

. When lightly soiled, wipe with asponge or soft, lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surface usinga soft brush attachment. If a rotatingvacuum brush attachment is beingused, only use it on the floor carpet.Before cleaning, gently remove asmuch of the soil as possible:

. Gently blot liquids with a papertowel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soil, remove as much aspossible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean, lint-freecolourfast cloth with water orclub soda. Microfiber cloth isrecommended to prevent linttransfer to the fabric or carpet.


340 VEHICLE CARE

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecentre. Rotate the cleaning clothto a clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any colour transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by clubsoda or plain water.

If the soil is not completely removed,it may be necessary to use acommercial upholstery cleaner or spotlifter. Test a small hidden area forcolourfastness before using acommercial upholstery cleaner or spotlifter. If ring formation occurs, cleanthe entire fabric or carpet.

After cleaning use a paper towel toblot excess moisture.

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

Use a microfibre cloth on high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays. First, usea soft bristle brush to remove dirt thatcan scratch the surface. Then gentlyclean by rubbing with a microfibrecloth. Never use window cleaners orsolvents. Periodically hand wash themicrofibre cloth separately, using mildsoap. Do not use bleach or fabricsoftener. Rinse thoroughly and air drybefore next use.

Caution

Do not attach a device with asuction cup to the display. This maycause damage and would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Instrument Panel, Leather, Vinyl,Other Plastic Surfaces, LowGloss Paint Surfaces andNatural Open Pore WoodSurfaces

Use a soft microfiber cloth dampenedwith water to remove dust and loosedirt. For a more thorough cleaning,use a soft microfiber cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution.

Caution

Soaking or saturating leather,especially perforated leather, as wellas other interior surfaces, maycause permanent damage. Wipeexcess moisture from these surfacesafter cleaning and allow them todry naturally. Never use heat,steam, or spot removers. Do not usecleaners that contain silicone orwax-based products. Cleanerscontaining these solvents canpermanently change the appearanceand feel of leather or soft trim, andare not recommended.


VEHICLE CARE 341

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windscreenunder certain conditions.

Caution

Use of air fresheners may causepermanent damage to plastics andpainted surfaces. If an air freshenercomes in contact with any plasticor painted surface in the vehicle,blot immediately and clean with asoft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution. Damage caused byair fresheners would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Cargo Cover andConvenience Net

Wash with warm water and milddetergent. Do not use chlorine bleach.Rinse with cold water, and then drycompletely.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye seat beltwebbing. It may severely weakenthe webbing. In a crash, they mightnot be able to provide adequateprotection. Clean and rinse seat beltwebbing only with mild soap andlukewarm water. Allow the webbingto dry.

Floor Mats

{ Warning

If a floor mat is the wrong size or isnot properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended acceleration and/or increased stopping distancewhich can cause a crash and injury.Make sure the floor mat does notinterfere with the pedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage:

. The original equipment floor matswere designed for your vehicle.If the floor mats need replacing, itis recommended that GM certifiedfloor mats be purchased. Non-GMfloor mats may not fit properlyand may interfere with the pedals.Always check that the floor matsdo not interfere with the pedals.

. Do not use a floor mat if thevehicle is not equipped with afloor mat retainer on the driverside floor.

. Use the floor mat with the correctside up. Do not turn it over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat on thedriver side.

. Do not place one floor mat on topof another.


342 VEHICLE CARE

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mats

Pull up on the rear of the floor mat tounlock each retainer and remove.

Reinstall by lining up the floor matretainer openings over the carpetretainers and snapping into position.

Make sure the floor mat is properlysecured in place.

Verify the floor mat does not interferewith the pedals.


SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE 343

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Scheduled MaintenanceScheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 344

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

General Information

Caution

Damage caused by impropermaintenance can lead to costlyrepairs and may not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Maintenanceintervals, checks, inspections,recommended fluids, and lubricantsare important to keep the vehicle ingood working condition.

Do not have chemical flushes thatare not approved by GM performedon the vehicle. The use of flushes,solvents, cleaners, or lubricants thatare not approved by GM coulddamage the vehicle, requiringexpensive repairs that are notcovered by the vehicle warranty.

It is essential that your vehiclereceives the maintenance outlined onthe following pages to retain thesafety, reliability and performanceoriginally built into your vehicle.

When your odometer reaches themileage indicated on the followingpages, or the corresponding timeinterval has been reached, take yourvehicle, preferably to an authoriseddealer and/or repairer, who willprovide the proper parts and service.

Once maintenance has beenperformed, have the authorised dealerand/or repairer fill out and stamp theappropriate box in this booklet toserve as your maintenance recordwhich may be needed for warrantyrepairs. It will also show futureowners how well your vehicle hasbeen maintained.


344 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE

Scheduled MaintenanceEngine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1,000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, the engineoil life system may not indicate theneed for vehicle service for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and theoil life system must be reset. Yourtrained dealer technician can performthis work. If the engine oil life systemis reset accidentally, service thevehicle within 5,000 km/3,000 misince the last service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.

Inspection Every 15 000 km orEvery Year. Change engine oil and filter. Reset

oil life system.

. Engine coolant level check.

. Engine cooling system inspection.Visual inspection of hoses, pipes,fittings, and clamps andreplacement, if needed.

. Windscreen washer fluid levelcheck.

. Windscreen wiper blade inspectionfor wear, cracking,or contamination and windscreenand wiper blade cleaning,if contaminated. Worn or damagedwiper blade replacement.

. Tyre inflation pressures check.

. Tyre wear inspection.

. Fluids visual leak check. A leak inany system must be repaired andthe fluid level checked.

. Engine air cleaner filter inspection.

. Brake system inspection. SeeExterior Care 0 334.

. Steering and suspensioninspection. Visual inspection fordamaged, loose, or missing partsor signs of wear.

. Lubricate the outer track rods atleast every other oil change.Control arm ball joints aremaintenance free.

. Body hinges and latches, key lockcylinders, folding seat hardware,and rear compartment, bonnet,

and console door hinges andlatches lubrication. More frequentlubrication may be required whenthe vehicle is exposed to acorrosive environment. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth makes them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak.

. Restraint system componentcheck.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Exhaust system and nearby heatshields inspection for loose ordamaged components.

. Accelerator pedal check fordamage, high effort, or binding.

. Bonnet/Boot lid/Tailgate/LiftglassSupport Gas Strut Service: Visuallyinspect gas strut, if equipped, forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the gas strut. Contactyour authorised repairer if serviceis required.

. Road Test. Check all systems forcorrect function/performance.



. To maintain air conditioningefficiency, have an authorisedrepairer check the system at leastonce each year.

. Automatic transmission shift lockcontrol function check.

. Parking brake and automaticP (Park) mechanism check.

. Underbody flushing service.

. Tyre sealant and compressor kit (ifequipped with tyre sealant andcompressor kit), check sealantexpiration date.

. Verify spare tyre key lockoperation and lubricate as needed.See Tyre Changing 0 318.

Additional Maintenance Every30 000 km or Two Years

In addition to the items listed under“Inspection every 15 000 km or everyyear” the following items should becarried out every 30 000 km ortwo years (whichever occurs first):

. Passenger compartment airfilter — replace. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with

heavy traffic, poor air quality,areas with high dust levels or aresensitive to environmentalallergens. Filter replacement mayalso be needed if you noticereduced airflow, windows mistingup, or odours. Your local GMService location can help youdetermine when it is the righttime to replace your filter.

. Engine Air Filter Replacement.If driving in dusty conditions,inspect the filter at each oilchange or more often as needed.

Replace Every Two Years

Replace brake fluid every two years orevery 60 000 km whichever occursfirst.

Note: All vehicles with rear-wheeldrive — change driveline axle oilevery 30 000 km, if vehicle is used fortowing purposes.

Additional Maintenance Every50 000 km. Visually check all fuel and vapour

lines and hoses for properattachment, connection, routing,and condition.

Additional Maintenance Every150 000 km or if Necessary. Spark plugs — replace

Additional Maintenance Every156 000 km or if Necessary. Four-wheel drive only: Transfer

case fluid change. During anymaintenance, if a power washer isused to clean mud and dirt fromthe underbody, do not directlypower wash the transfer case and/or front/rear axle output seals.High pressure water can overcomethe seals and contaminate thefluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfercase and/or drive axles and shouldbe replaced.



Check vent hose at transfer casefor kinks and proper installation.Check to be sure vent hose isunobstructed, clear, and free ofdebris.

Additional Maintenance Every250 000 km or Every Five Years,Whichever Occurs First. Engine cooling system drain and

refill (or every five years,whichever occurs first).

Conditions Requiring MoreFrequent Maintenance (SevereService)

Severe Service is described as:

. Extreme temperatures

. Heavy city traffic

. Hilly or mountainous terrain

. Dusty, muddy or off-roadconditions

. Commercial use or trailer towing

. Most trips less than 6 km

Every 72 000 km or if Necessary

. Automatic transmission fluid andfilter change (severe service) forvehicles mainly driven in heavycity traffic in hot weather, in hillyor mountainous terrain, whenfrequently towing a trailer, or usedfor taxi, police, or delivery service.

. Four-wheel drive only: Transfercase fluid change (severe service)for vehicles mainly driven in heavycity traffic in hot weather, in hillyor mountainous terrain, whenfrequently towing a trailer, or usedfor taxi, police, or delivery service.During any maintenance, if apower washer is used to cleanmud and dirt from the underbody,do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axle

output seals. High pressure watercan overcome the seals andcontaminate the fluid.Contaminated fluid will decreasethe life of the transfer case and/ordrive axles and should be replaced.

Check vent hose at transfer casefor kinks and proper installation.Check to be sure vent hose isunobstructed, clear, and free ofdebris.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and LubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-HP Automatic Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 19331925).

Chassis Lubrication, Parking BrakeCable Guides

Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985) or lubricant meeting requirements ofNLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL® Coolant. SeeEngine Coolant 0 279.

Engine Oil Engine oil meeting the dexos2™ specification of the proper SAE viscosity grade.ACDelco dexos2 Synthetic Blend is recommended. See Engine Oil 0 272.

Front Axle (4WD Only) SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 88900401).

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299818).

Key Lock Cylinders, Bonnet Hinges,Body Door Hinge Pins, Tailgate Hingeand Linkage, Folding Seats, Fuel DoorHinge, and Outer Tailgate Handle Pivot

Points

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241).

Rear Axle SAE 75W-85 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 19300457).

Transfer Case DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Weatherstrip: All Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287).



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770) or Dielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. 12345579).

Windscreen Washer Automotive windscreen washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.

Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 22845992 A3181C

Oil Filter 19330000 PF63E

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 23281440 CF188

Spark Plugs 12622441 41–114

Wiper Blades

Driver Side – 55 cm (21.7 in) 22756331 -

Passenger Side — 55 cm (21.7 in) 22756331 -

Rear — 33 cm (13.0 in) 22956295 -


TECHNICAL DATA 349

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Vehicle DataCapacities and Specifications . . . . 350Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . 352

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, on thedriver side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windscreen fromoutside. The Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) also appears on theVehicle Certification and Service Partslabels and certificates of title andregistration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is theengine code. This code identifies thevehicle's engine, specifications, andreplacement parts. See “EngineSpecifications” under Capacities andSpecifications 0 350 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service Parts IdentificationLabelThis label, on the inside of the glovebox, has the following information:

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

. Model designation.

. Paint information.

. Production options and specialequipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


350 TECHNICAL DATA

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants0 347 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type andcharge amount, see the refrigerant label under thebonnet. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System 16.8 L 17.8 qt

Engine Oil with Filter 7.6 L 8.0 qt

Fuel Tank

Short Wheelbase 98.4 L 26.0 gal

Long Wheelbase 119.2 L 31.5 gal

Transfer Case Fluid 1.5 L 1.6 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 190Y 140 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual.Recheck fluid level after filling.


TECHNICAL DATA 351

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Horsepower Torque Spark Plug Gap

6.2L V8 J 313 kW @5,600 min -1

610Y @4,100 min -1

0.95–1.10mm (0.037–0.043 in)

Fuel Consumption and Emissions Information

Fuel Consumption

Urban 17.1 L/100 km

Extra-Urban 9.9 L/100 km

Combined 12.6 L/100 km

Carbon Dioxide Emissions

Urban 390 g/km

Extra-Urban 227 g/km

Combined 287 g/km


352 TECHNICAL DATA

Engine Drive Belt Routing


CUSTOMER INFORMATION 353

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationLibcurl and UnzipAcknowledgements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . 356

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Customer Information

Libcurl and UnzipAcknowledgements

OnStar - SoftwareAcknowledgements

Certain OnStar components includelibcurl and unzip software and otherthird party software. Below are thenotices and licenses associatedwith libcurl and unzip and for otherthird party software please seehttp://www.lg.com/global/support/opensource/index andhttps://www.onstar.com/us/en/support/getdocuments.html

The original language of the licensesis English, the translations below areprovided for reference.

libcurl:

COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSIONNOTICE

Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, DanielStenberg, <[email protected]>.

All rights reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify, anddistribute this software for anypurpose with or without fee is herebygranted, provided that the abovecopyright notice and this permissionnotice appear in all copies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “ASIS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANYKIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TOTHE WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE ANDNONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRDPARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALLTHE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHTHOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANYCLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHERLIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTIONOF CONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUTOF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THESOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHERDEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice, thename of a copyright holder shall notbe used in advertising or otherwise topromote the sale, use or other


354 CUSTOMER INFORMATION

dealings in this Software without priorwritten authorization of the copyrightholder.

unzip:

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of theInfo-ZIP copyright and license.The definitive version of thisdocument should be available atftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely.

Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. Allrights reserved.

For the purposes of this copyright andlicense, “Info-ZIP” is defined as thefollowing set of individuals:

Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, EdGordon, Ian Gorman, Chris Herborth,Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig, RobertHeath, Jonathan Hudson, Paul Kienitz,David Kirschbaum, Johnny Lee, Onnovan der Linden, Igor Mandrichenko,Steve P. Miller, Sergio Monesi, KeithOwens, George Petrov, Greg Roelofs,Kai Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,

Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,Rich Wales, Mike White.

This software is provided “as is,”without warranty of any kind, expressor implied. In no event shall Info-ZIPor its contributors be held liable forany direct, indirect, incidental, specialor consequential damages arising outof the use of or inability to use thissoftware.

Permission is granted to anyone touse this software for any purpose,including commercial applications,and to alter it and redistribute itfreely, subject to the followingrestrictions:

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form(compiled executables) mustreproduce the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions indocumentation and/or othermaterials provided with thedistribution. The sole exception

to this condition is redistributionof a standard UnZipSFX binary(including SFXWiz) as part of aself-extracting archive; that ispermitted without inclusion ofthis license, as long as thenormal SFX banner has not beenremoved from the binary ordisabled.

3. Altered versions–including, butnot limited to, ports to newoperating systems, existing portswith new graphical interfaces,and dynamic, shared, or staticlibrary versions–must be plainlymarked as such and must not bemisrepresented as being theoriginal source. Such alteredversions also must not bemisrepresented as being Info-ZIPreleases–including, but notlimited to, labeling of the alteredversions with the names“Info-ZIP” (or any variationthereof, including, but notlimited to, differentcapitalizations), “Pocket UnZip,”“WiZ” or “MacZip” without theexplicit permission of Info-ZIP.



Such altered versions arefurther prohibited frommisrepresentative use of theZip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mailaddresses or of theInfo-ZIP URL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to usethe names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,” and“MacZip” for its own source andbinary releases.

libcurl:

COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSIONNOTICE

Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, DanielStenberg, <[email protected]>.

All rights reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify, anddistribute this software for anypurpose with or without fee is herebygranted, provided that the abovecopyright notice and this permissionnotice appear in all copies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “ASIS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANYKIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO

THE WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE ANDNONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRDPARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALLTHE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHTHOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANYCLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHERLIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTIONOF CONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUTOF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THESOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHERDEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice, thename of a copyright holder shall notbe used in advertising or otherwise topromote the sale, use or otherdealings in this Software without priorwritten authorisation of the copyrightholder.

unzip:

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of theInfo-ZIP copyright and license.The definitive version of thisdocument should be available atftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely.

Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. Allrights reserved.

For the purposes of this copyright andlicense, “Info-ZIP” is defined as thefollowing set of individuals:

Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, EdGordon, Ian Gorman, Chris Herborth,Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig, RobertHeath, Jonathan Hudson, Paul Kienitz,David Kirschbaum, Johnny Lee, Onnovan der Linden, Igor Mandrichenko,Steve P. Miller, Sergio Monesi, KeithOwens, George Petrov, Greg Roelofs,Kai Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,Rich Wales, Mike White

This software is provided “as is,”without warranty of any kind, expressor implied. In no event shall Info-ZIPor its contributors be held liable forany direct, indirect, incidental, specialor consequential damages arising outof the use of or inability to use thissoftware.



Permission is granted to anyone touse this software for any purpose,including commercial applications,and to alter it and redistribute itfreely, subject to the followingrestrictions:

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form(compiled executables) mustreproduce the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions indocumentation and/or othermaterials provided with thedistribution. The sole exceptionto this condition is redistributionof a standard UnZipSFX binary(including SFXWiz) as part of aself-extracting archive; that ispermitted without inclusion ofthis license, as long as thenormal SFX banner has not beenremoved from the binary ordisabled.

3. Altered versions–including, butnot limited to, ports to newoperating systems, existing portswith new graphical interfaces,and dynamic, shared, or staticlibrary versions–must be plainlymarked as such and must not bemisrepresented as being theoriginal source. Such alteredversions also must not bemisrepresented as being Info-ZIPreleases–including, but notlimited to, labelling of the alteredversions with the names“Info-ZIP” (or any variationthereof, including, but notlimited to, differentcapitalisations), “Pocket UnZip,”“WiZ” or “MacZip” without theexplicit permission of Info-ZIP.Such altered versions arefurther prohibited frommisrepresentative use of theZip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mailaddresses or of theInfo-ZIP URL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to usethe names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,” and“MacZip” for its own source andbinary releases.

Declaration of Conformity

Transmission Systems

This vehicle has systems that transmitand/or receive radio waves subject toDirective 1999/5/EC or 2014/53/EU.These systems are in compliancewith the essential requirements andother relevant provisions of Directive1999/5/EC or 2014/53/EU. Copies ofthe original Declarations ofConformity can be obtained on ourwebsite.

Tyre Jack



Translation of the OriginalDeclaration of Conformity

Declaration of Conformity

Pursuant to Machinery Directive2006/42/EC

We hereby declare that the product:

Product Description: Scissor / ScrewAutomotive Jack

Type/Part Number: 23237463Screw Jack

13502709 Scissor Jack



Is in conformity with MachineryDirective 2006/42/EC.

Technical standards applied:

GMW14337 Standard EquipmentJack – Hardware Tests

GMW15005 Standard Equipment Jackand Spare Tyre, Vehicle Test

The person authorised to compile thetechnical file is:

Hans-Peter Metzger

Adam Opel AG

65423 Russelsheim / Germany

signed by

Gena Vitale

Engineering Group Manager Tyre/Wheel Systems

GMNA, USA

Vehicle Data Recordingand PrivacyEvent Data Recorders

Data Storage Modules in the Vehicle

A large number of electroniccomponents of your vehicle containdata storage modules temporarily orpermanently storing technical dataabout the condition of the vehicle,events, and errors. In general, thistechnical information documents thecondition of parts, modules, systems,or the environment:

. Operating conditions of systemcomponents (e.g., filling levels).

. Status messages of the vehicle andits single components (e.g.,number of wheel revolutions/rotational speed, deceleration,lateral acceleration).

. Dysfunctions and defects inimportant system components.



. Vehicle reactions in particulardriving situations (e.g., inflation ofan airbag, activation of thestability regulation system).

. Environmental concerns (e.g.,temperature).

This data is exclusively technical andhelps identify and correct errors aswell as optimise vehicle functions.

Motion profiles indicating travelledroutes cannot be created withthis data.

If services are used (e.g., repair works,service processes, warranty cases,quality assurance), employees of theservice network (manufacturerincluded) are able to read out thistechnical information from the eventand error data storage modulesapplying special diagnostic devices.If required, you will receive furtherinformation at these dealers. After anerror has been corrected, the data isdeleted from the error storage moduleor constantly overwritten.

When using the vehicle, situationsmay occur in which this technicaldata related to other information

(accident report, damages on thevehicle, witness statements, etc.)may be associated with a specificperson — possibly, with theassistance of an expert.

Additional functions contractuallyagreed upon with the client (e.g.,vehicle location in emergency cases)allow the transmission of particularvehicle data from the vehicle.

OnStarIf the vehicle is equipped withOnStar® and has an activesubscription, additional data may becollected through the OnStar system.This includes information about thevehicle's operation; collisions involvingthe vehicle; the use of the vehicle andits features; and, in certain situations,the location and approximate GPSspeed of the vehicle. Refer to theOnStar Terms and Conditions andPrivacy Statement on the OnStarwebsite.

See OnStar Overview 0 360.

Infotainment SystemUsing the navigation system mayresult in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, andother trip information. See theinfotainment manual for informationon stored data and for deletioninstructions.


360 ONSTAR

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

OnStar OverviewOnStar® system

OnStar is a personal connectivity andservice assistant with integrated Wi-Fihotspot. The OnStar service isavailable 24 hours a day, seven daysa week.

Note: OnStar is not available for allmarkets. For further information,contact your retailer.

Note: In order to be available andoperational, OnStar needs a validOnStar subscription, functioningvehicle electrics, mobile service andGPS satellite link.

To activate the OnStar services andset up an account, press| and speakwith an OnStar advisor.

Depending on the equipment of thevehicle, the following services areavailable:

. Emergency services and support inthe case of a vehicle breakdown

. Wi-Fi hotspot

. Smartphone application

. Remote control, e.g. location ofthe vehicle, activation of horn andlights, control of central lockingsystem

. Stolen vehicle assistance

. Vehicle diagnostics

. Destination download

Note: The OnStar module of thevehicle is deactivated after ten dayswithout an ignition cycle. Functionsrequiring a data connection will beavailable again after switching on theignition.

OnStar buttons

Privacy button

Press and hold ! until an audiomessage is heard to activate ordeactivate the transmission of thevehicle location.


ONSTAR 361

Press ! to answer a call or to end acall to an advisor.

Press ! to access the Wi-Fi settings.

Service button

Press| to establish a connection toan advisor.

SOS button

PressU to establish a priorityemergency connection to a speciallytrained emergency advisor.

Status LED

Green: The system is ready.

Green flashing: The system is ona call.

Red: A problem arose.

Off: System is in standby mode.

Red / green flashing for a short periodof time: Transmission of the vehiclelocation has been deactivated.

OnStar services

General services

If you need any informationconcerning e.g. opening hours, pointof interest and destinations or if youneed any support e.g. in the case of avehicle breakdown, a flat tyre andempty fuel tank, press| to establisha connection to an advisor.

Emergency services

In the case of an emergency situation,pressU and talk to an advisor. Theadvisor then contacts emergency orassistance service providers anddirects them to your vehicle.

In the case of an accident withactivation of airbags or belttensioners, an automatic emergencycall is established. The advisor isimmediately connected to your vehicleto see whether help is needed.

Wi-Fi hotspot

The Wi-Fi hotspot of the vehicleprovides internet connectivity with amaximum speed of 4G/LTE.

Note: The Wi-Fi hotspot functionalityis not available for all markets.

Up to seven devices may beconnected.

To connect a mobile device with theWi-Fi hotspot:

1. Press ! and then select Wi-Fisettings on the Info-Display. Thesettings displayed include theWi-Fi hotspot name (SSID),password and, if equipped,connection type.

2. Start a Wi-Fi network search onyour mobile device.

3. Select your vehicle hotspot(SSID) when listed.

4. When prompted, enter thepassword on your mobile device.

Note: To change the SSID orpassword, press| and talk to anOnStar advisor or login to youraccount.

To switch off the Wi-Fi hotspotfunctionality, press| to call anadvisor.


362 ONSTAR

Smartphone app

With the smartphone app, somevehicle functions can be operatedremotely:

. Lock or unlock vehicle.

. Honk horn or flash lights.

. Check fuel level, engine oil life,if equipped, and tyre pressure(only with tyre pressuremonitoring system).

. Send navigation destination to thevehicle, if equipped with a built-innavigation system.

. Locate vehicle on a map.

. Manage Wi-Fi settings.

To operate these functions, downloadthe app from Apple's App Store orGoogle Play Store.

Remote control

If desired, use any phone to call anadvisor, who can remotely operatespecific vehicle functions. Find therespective OnStar phone number onour country-specific website.

The following functions are available:

. Lock or unlock vehicle.

. Provide information on the vehiclelocation.

. Honk horn or flash lights.

Stolen vehicle assistance

If the vehicle is stolen, report the theftto the authorities and request OnStarstolen vehicle assistance. Use anyphone to call an advisor. Find therespective OnStar phone number onour country-specific website.

OnStar can provide support inlocating and recovering the vehicle.

Theft alert

When the anti-theft alarm system istriggered, a notification is sent toOnStar. You are then informed aboutthis event by text message or email.

Restart prevention

By sending remote signals, OnStar canprevent the vehicle from restartingonce it has been turned off.

On-demand diagnostics

At any time e.g. if the vehicle displaysa service message, press | to contactan advisor and ask to complete areal-time diagnostic check to directlydetermine the issue. Depending on theresults, the advisor will providefurther support.

Diagnostic report

The vehicle automatically transmitsdiagnostic data to OnStar which sendsa monthly email report to you andyour preferred retailer.

Note: The retailer notificationfunction can be disabled in youraccount.

The report contains the status of keyoperating systems of the vehicle likeengine, transmission, airbags, ABS,and other major systems. It alsoprovides information on possiblemaintenance items and tyre pressure(only with tyre pressure monitoringsystem).

To look at the information in greaterdetail, select the link within the emailand log into your account.


ONSTAR 363

Destination download

If equipped with this feature, a desireddestination can be directlydownloaded to the navigation system.

Press| to call an advisor anddescribe the destination or point ofinterest.

The advisor can look up any addressor point of interest and directly sendthe destination to the built-innavigation system.

OnStar settings

OnStar PIN

To have full access to all OnStarservices, a four-digit PIN is required.The PIN has to be personalised whenfirst talking to an advisor.

To change the PIN, press| to call anadvisor.

Account data

An OnStar subscriber has an account,where all the data is stored. Torequest a change of the accountinformation, press| and talk to anadvisor or login to your account.

If the OnStar service is used onanother vehicle, press| and requestthat the account be transferred to thenew vehicle.

Note: In any case, if the vehicle isdisposed of, sold or otherwisetransferred, immediately informOnStar about the changes andterminate the OnStar service on thisvehicle.

Vehicle location

The vehicle location is transmitted toOnStar when service is requested ortriggered. A message on theInfo-Display informs about thistransmission.

To activate or deactivate thetransmission of the vehicle location,press and hold ! until an audiomessage is heard.

The deactivation is indicated by thestatus light flashing red and green fora short period of time and each timethe vehicle is started.

Note: If the transmission of thevehicle location is deactivated, someservices are no longer available.

Note: The vehicle location alwaysremains accessible to OnStar in thecase of an emergency.

Find the privacy policy in youraccount.

Software updates

OnStar may remotely carry outsoftware updates without furthernotice or consent. These updates areto enhance or maintain safety andsecurity or the operation of thevehicle.

These updates may concern privacyissues. Find the privacy policy in youraccount.


364 INDEX

Index AAccessories and Modifications . . . . . 269Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210AcknowledgementsLibcurl and Unzip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Active Fuel Management® . . . . . . . . . 213Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . 267Adjustable Throttle and BrakePedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 277Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182, 186Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . .84Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . .85What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . .83What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . .81

AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

Passenger Status Indicator . . . . . . . 137Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79AlarmVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

AlertLane Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Side Blind Zone (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . 249

All-Season Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Anti-theftLocking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . 223Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Assistance Systems for Driving . . . . 245Assistance Systems for Parkingand Reversing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

AutomaticDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36


INDEX 365

Automatic (cont'd)Forward Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Level Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . . . . . . . 290Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270BrakeParking, Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Pedal and Adjustable Throttle . . . 207System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Brakes (cont'd)Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Automatic Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Front Indicator Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 292Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Buying New Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

CCapacities and Specifications . . . . . . 350Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

CargoTie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Caution, Danger, and Warning . . . . . . . .2Centre Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Chains, Tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316ChargingWireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

CheckEngine Light (MalfunctionIndicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Child RestraintsInfants and Young Children . . . . . . . .93ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113, 114Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

Child-View Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132CompartmentsStorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

ConformityDeclaration of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

ControlTraction and ElectronicStability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120


366 INDEX

Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Engine Temperature Gauge . . . . . . 135Engine Temperature WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182, 186Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Cornering Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Cruise Control, Adaptive . . . . . . . . . . . 233Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

DDanger, Warning, and Caution . . . . . . . .2Data CollectionInfotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . 174Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . 356Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178DoorAjar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Door (cont'd)Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . . . . . 352Driver Assistance Systems . . . . . . . . . 240Driver InformationCentre (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Driver Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228DrivingAssistance Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193For Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . .26Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 200If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Winter Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

EElectric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Electric Parking Brake Light . . . . . . . 140Electrical Equipment, Add-On . . . . . 267Electrical SystemEngine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298, 300

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277Check Light (MalfunctionIndicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . . . 271Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . 135Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Cooling System Messages . . . . . . . . 154Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274


INDEX 367

Engine (cont'd)Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Running While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . 214Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Extended Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . . . . 174

FFanEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

FeaturesMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Flat Tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . 275Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Fluid (cont'd)Four-Wheel DriveTransfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Forward Automatic Braking . . . . . . . . 248Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219, 287Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Front Indicator Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Front SeatsHeated and Cooled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 145Management, Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Full-Size Spare Tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Fuses (cont'd)Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298, 300

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

GaugesEngine Coolant Temperature . . . . 135Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Mileometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Rev Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Gear Shifting Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . . . . 343Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118


368 INDEX

HHazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . 176Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Head-up Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Main-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Main/Dipped Beam Changer . . . . . 174

HeatedRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Heated and Cooled Front Seats . . . . . 62Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182, 186High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . 200Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

HVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182, 186

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45IndicatorVehicle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Indicator and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Instrument PanelStorage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 48Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems . . . 112

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

LLampsCornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Lamps (cont'd)Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . 174Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . . 174Front Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Malfunction Indicator (CheckEngine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Number Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . . . . . . . . 249Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Lane Keep Assist Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Level ControlAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Libcurl and UnzipAcknowledgements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37LightGear Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130


INDEX 369

LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . 139Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Check Engine (MalfunctionIndicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Main-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Main/Dipped Beam Changer . . . . . 174Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Service Electric Parking Brake . . . 140Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Lights (cont'd)Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Tyre Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Winter Driving Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Lights, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Locking Systems, Anti-theft . . . . . . . . . 45LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . 145Low-Profile Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

MMagnetic Ride Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Main-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Maintenance Schedule (cont'd)Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 344Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . 138Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Massage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Battery Voltage and Charging . . . . 152Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Engine Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . 154Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Object Detection System . . . . . . . . . 156Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Starting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159


370 INDEX

Messages (cont'd)Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Mileometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

MirrorChild-View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming Rear View . . . .48Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46Tilt in Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . 48Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Driver Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Monitor System, Tyre Pressure . . . . 307

NNet, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120New Vehicle Running-In . . . . . . . . . . . 206

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . 274Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . 91OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360OperationFog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Parking (cont'd)Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Parking or ReversingAssistance Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . 85PersonalisationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Retained Accessory (RAP) . . . . . . . . 210Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts . . . . . . 78PrivacyVehicle Data Recording . . . . . . . . . . 358

RReading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288


INDEX 371

Rear Axle (cont'd)Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Rear Camera Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Rear Climate Control System . . . . . . 186Rear SeatsHeated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Rear View MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . 240Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . . . . 125Reclining Seat Backrests . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . 330Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33ReplacementGlass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Rev Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Ride Control SystemsMagnetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Rotation, Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . . . . . 352Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Running-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 206

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Replacing after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

Safety Belts (cont'd)Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 344SeatsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55Heated, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . .58Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . .57Reclining Seat Backrests . . . . . . . . . . .59Second Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64Third Row Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Securing Child Restraints . . . . .113, 114SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . . . . 270Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . 349


372 INDEX

Service (cont'd)Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Service Electric Parking BrakeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . 249Signals, Turn and Lane-Change . . . . 176Specifications and Capacities . . . . . . 350Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Sport Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Start Assist, Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Starting the Vehicle Messages . . . . . 159Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Steering System Messages . . . . . . . . . 159

StepsPower Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

StorageRear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Storage AreasArmrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Centre Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Sunglasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Sunglass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3SystemForward Collision Alert (FCA) . . . . 245Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181, 359Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

SystemsDriver Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

TTheft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Third-Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Throttle, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . 256Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . 266Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

TrailerSway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134


INDEX 373

Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304All-Season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Buying New Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326If a Tyre Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306, 307Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . 308Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . 307Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Wheel Alignment and TyreBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315When It Is Time for NewTyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

UUniversal Remote System . . . . . . . . . . 169Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2

VVehicleAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . 349Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Personalisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Vehicle CareTyre Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Caution and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Lane Departure (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

WarningsHazard Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

WheelsAlignment and Tyre Balance . . . . . 315Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

When It Is Time for New Tyres . . . . 312Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . . . . 96Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

WindshieldReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Winter Driving Mode Light . . . . . . . . 142Winter Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 290WipersRear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Wireless Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

cm escalade edition: february 2017, cadillac …...cadillac escalade owner manual...

Documents